HE-Catalog 2014 en

Accumulator Technology 30.
000
Filter Technology 70.000
Global Presence.
Local Expertise.
www.hydac.com
Electronic Product Catalogue
HYDAC Headquarters
HYDAC Companies
HYDAC Distributors and Service Partners
Accessories 61.000
Hauptstrae 27
66128 Saarbrcken
Deutschland
Tel.:
+49 6897 509-01
Fax:
+49 6897 509-1726
E-Mail: electronic@hydac.com
Internet: www.hydac.com
E 180.000.2/11.13
Cooling Systems 5.700
Electronics 180.000
HYDAC ELECTRONIC
GMBH
E 180.000.2/11.13
Compact Hydraulics 53.000
Filter Systems 79.000
Process Technology 77.000
Electronic
Product Catalogue
HYDAC Electronic
HYDAC is best known for hydraulics,
systems and fluid engineering. For over
50 years, HYDAC has been developing
and manufacturing components and
system solutions for specific applications
in these fields.
Over 30 years ago, inspired by its industry
and application experience, HYDAC
expanded its portfolio to include sensors,
measuring instruments and electronic
controls.
The range of sensors includes products
for the measurement of pressure,
temperature, distance, position, level, flow
volume, speed as well as contamination
and oil condition. In addition to
products for standard applications, the
product portfolio also covers special
applications such as potentially explosive
atmospheres or applications with
increased functional safety.
Almost all these products are
developed, manufactured and marketed
by HYDAC ELECTRONIC.
Suitability for the application is tested on
HYDAC test rigs. As a Tier 1 automotive
supplier, HYDAC ELECTRONIC is certified
in accordance with the rigorous quality
standard ISO/TS 16949 and therefore
fulfils the very high requirements
regarding product quality, production
processes and continuous improvement
processes.
Our international sales network provides
customers with worldwide product
availability, expert advice and support. An
extensive service package completes our
offer.
Computer simulation
of a HYDAC pressure transmitter.
Production and automatic function testing.
Development and manufacturing plant in Saarbrcken-Gersweiler.
Ins
pe
cti
on
Se
rv
ic
in
g
HYDAC Servicenter, a complete

package of services.
E 180.000.2 /11.13
e
nc
na
te
n
i
a
ion
M
lat
tal
Ins
n
atio
imiz
Opt
Technical advice
and training.
The information in this brochure

relates to the operating conditions
and applications described.
For applications or operating
conditions not described, please
contact the relevant technical
department.
Subject to technical modifications.
Page
1. Introduction
zzIndustries / Applications / Product Range
2
2-7
2. Electronic pressure transmitters

for general applications
zzHDA 4800
zzHDA 4700
zzHDA 4700 Approvals for shipping
zzHDA 4700 CANopen
zzHDA 4400
zzHDA 4300
zzHDA 4100
zzHDA 7446
zzHDA 7400 CANopen
zzHDA 3800 for Iron and Steel Works Applications
8 - 33
3. Electronic pressure switches

zzEDS 3400
zzEDS 3400 Menu navigation according to VDMA
zzEDS 3400 IO-Link
zzEDS 3300
zzEDS 3300 IO-Link
zzEDS 3100
zzEDS 3100 IO-Link
zzEDS 300
zzEDS 300 Approvals for shipping
zzEDS 8000
zzEDS 601
zzEDS 1700
zzEDS 4400 Programmable
zzEDS 4300 Programmable
zzEDS 820 IO-Link
36 - 79
4. Pressure sensors with flush membrane

zzHDA 4700
zzHDA 4400
zzHDA 4300
zzHDA 7400
zzEDS 3400
zzEDS 3300
80 - 95
5. Electronic temperature transmitters

zzETS 7200
zzETS 4100
zzETS 4500
HYDAC electronic GmbH

Hauptstrae 27,
D-66128 Saarbrcken
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01,
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
3
37
41
43
45
49
51
53
57
59
61
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
4
81
83
85
87
89
93
96 - 103
97
99
101
6
6. Electronic temperature switches

104 - 129
zzETS 3200 pressure-resistant for inline installation
105
zzETS 3200 pressure-resistant for inline installation, menu navigation to VDMA 107
zzETS 3200 pressure-resistant for inline installation, IO-Link
109
zzETS 3200 for tank installation
111
zzETS 3200 for tank installation, menu navigation to VDMA
113
zzETS 3200 for tank installation, IO-Link
115
zzETS 3800 for separate temperature probe
117
zzETS 3800 for separate temperature probe, with menu navigation to VDMA
119
zzETS 3800 for separate temperature probe, IO-Link
121
zzETS 320 pressure-resistant for inline installation
123
125
127
zzTFP 100 (separate temperature probe)
129
E 180.000.2 /11.13
Note

7. Sensors for distance and position

for mobile and stationary applications
zzHLT 1000-R2
zzHLT 2100-R1
zzHLT 2500-F1
zzHLT 2500-L2
zzHLS 528
10
11
Page
130 - 145
131
133
137
141
145
. Level sensors
8
zzENS 3000
zzENS 3000 IO-Link
zzHNS 3000
zzHNS 526
zzHNT 1000
148 - 161
9. Flow transmitters / flow switches

zzEVS 3110
zzEVS 3100
zzHFS 2100
zzHFS 2500
zzHFT 2100
zzHFT 2500
164 - 181
149
153
155
157
161
165
167
169
173
177
181
10. Speed sensors

zzHSS 110
zzHSS 120
zzHSS 130
zzHSS 210
zzHSS 220
184 - 193
11. Sensors

for applications with increased functional safety
zzHDA 4700 for applications with increased functional safety
zzHLT 1000 for applications with increased functional safety
196 - 201
185
187
189
191
193
197
199
202 - 311
12. Sensors

for potentially explosive atmospheres
zzHDA 4700 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure
203
zzEDS 4400 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure, programmable
207
zzETS 4500 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure
211
zzHDA 4700 ATEX Intrinsically safe
215
219
223
227
zzEDS 4400 ATEX Intrinsically safe programmable
231
235
239
zzHDA 4700 CSA Intrinsically safe
243
247
251
255
zzHDA 4700 IECEx Intrinsically safe
259
263
267
271
zzHDA 4700 with Flush Membrane ATEX Intrinsically safe
275
279
283
zzHDA 4700 with Flush Membrane IECEx Intrinsically safe
287
291
295
zzHDA 4700 with Flush Membrane ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure 299
zzHFS 2100 ATEX Intrinsically safe
303
zzHFS 2500 ATEX Intrinsically safe
307
E 180.000.2 /11.13
12
Page
13. Display and monitoring units

zzHDA 5500
312 - 315
313
13
14. Service instruments

zzHMG 500
zzHMG 510
zzHMG 3010
zzHDA 4748-H
zzETS 4148-H
zzEVS 31X0-H
316 - 331
317
319
321
325
327
329
14
332 - 349
15. Condition monitoring products
zzCMU 1000
333
zzCSI-B-2 337
zzHLB 1300
339
zzAS 1000
341
zzAS 3000
343
zzAS 3000 IO-Link
345
zzEY 1356
347
15
16. OEM products for large volume production

zzHDA 8700
zzHDA 8400
zzHDA 8000 for applications with increased functional safety
zzHDA 7400
zzHDA 9300
zzEDS 810
zzEDS 710
zzEDS 410
zzECS 4400 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure
zzEDS 4400 ATEX Intrinsically safe
zzHTT 8000
zzHTS 8000
zzHLS 100 for applications with increased functional safety
zzSpecial products
- IES 2010 / 2015 / 2020
- IWE 40
- HLS 200 for applications with increased functional safety
350 - 381
351
353
355
357
359
361
363
365
367
369
371
373
375
377
379
381
16
1
7. Accessories
382 - 403
383 - 388
17
zzElectrical accessories
E 180.000.2 /11.13
for electrical connection type "4" (Binder, Series 714M18)

for electrical connection type "5" (EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) /ISO 4400)
for electrical connection type "6" (M121, 4 pole)
for electrical connection type "7" (DIN 43561)
for electrical connection type "8" (M121, 5 pole)
for electrical connection type "P" (M121, 8 pole)
zzMechanical accessories
389 - 396
- Connection adapters for pressure sensors
- Mounting accessories for EDS 8000, HDA 8000, EDS 810
- Mounting accessories for EDS 3000, ETS 3000, AS 3000, ENS 3000, HNS 3000
- Mounting accessories for EDS 300, ETS 300
- Mounting accessories for EDS 601
- Tank mounting sleeve for ETS 3000
- Connection blocks for ENS 3000
- Connection blocks for HLB 1300
- Connection blocks for AS 1000, AS 3000
zzAccessories for sensors for distance and position
397 - 400
- Magnets for HLT 1000, HLT 2000, HNT 1000
- Electrical accessories for HLT 2000
zzAccessories for service instruments
401 - 403
- Accessories for HMG 30X0
- Accessories for HMG 500/510
Industries and applications

1
There is almost no hydraulic or

pneumatic medium or system
that could not be monitored and
controlled by HYDAC measurement
technology - quickly, precisely and
safely.
It is not surprising, therefore, that the
individually designed
HYDAC Measuring Technology
is employed by well-known
manufacturers and operators
in all industries.
These applications range from
analysis and diagnostics of
operating fluids in the laboratory
and on site, to controlling
complex industrial systems and
to miniaturised systems
in construction and road vehicles.
Excavators
Electronic controls and sensors
to complete the system electronics.
- Load limit control
- Electro-hydraulic load sensing
- Integrated operating data logging
- Controls of special equipment
- Cut-off devices
- Safety cut-off devices
Wheel Loaders
- Cut-off devices
Road Construction Machinery
Sensor technology and system electronics to generate
modern control concepts or ready-to-install total concepts.
- Load spectra
- Condition monitoring
- Safety systems
- Load limiting
- Function controls
- Energy management
Telescopic Cranes
Sensor technology and system electronics to generate
modern control concepts
or ready-to-install total concepts.
- Load torque limiting
- Load spectra
- Load sensing
- Energy management
Municipal Machines
Sensors, system electronics
and condition monitoring.
- Working hydraulics
- Axle suspension systems
- Cab suspension systems
- Levelling systems
Tractors
- Cab suspension
- Central hydraulics
- Front axle suspension
- Transmission shift control
- Level control
- Anti-roll stabilisation
E 180.000.2 /11.13
Agricultural Technology

- Cut-off devices
Mining
Electronic measurement technology for
underground applications.
Aviation and Aerospace Industry

- Pump station / Media supply

- Mining of raw materials
- Heading
- Material-handling and passenger transportation
- Analysis and diagnostics
- Rocket test rigs

- Test rigs for aircraft hydraulics
- Satellite test rigs
- Flight simulators
Iron - Steel - Metal

Measuring technology and electronics.
Wind Turbines
- Pump stations
- Valve stations
- Accumulator stations
- Heat exchangers
- Condition monitoring of
hydraulic and lubrication oils
- Measurement technology
- Safety and yaw brakes
- Pitch control
- Performance testing stations for transmission systems
Machine Tools
Power Plant Technology

- Hydraulic weight counter-balance

- Hydrostatic slide bearing
- Pressure boost station
- Central processing of cooling lubricants
- Tool clamping device
- Condition monitoring of
hydraulic and lubrication oils
- Hydraulic drive and control systems
including electronic controls
Pulp and Paper Industry

Transformers
Measuring technology, electronics and condition
monitoring.
- Insulating oil conditioning
- Insulating oil monitoring
- Cooling
Automotive Production
Measurement technology and condition monitoring
for machine tools and presses,
Cooling lubricant supply and test rigs.
Oil and Gas Industry

and condition monitoring
for offshore, subsea or
onshore applications.
Shipping
Measuring technology, electronics and condition
monitoring for:
Condition Monitoring
Data logging and interpretation
providing information on the condition of machines,
systems and their components.
E 180.000.2 /11.13
- Engines
- Control of motion sequences
- Steering gear/Propeller
- Ballast water treatment
- Deck superstructures
Electronic Pressure Transmitters

The right pressure transmitter for every application! The wide ranging
product choice from HYDAC offers solutions for all industries, whether
systems or machinery manufacture, mobile technology or for laboratory
applications.
The pressure transmitters are available with a variety of output signals,
connectors and fluid port connection options.
Pressure transmitters for general applications:

Page
HDA 4800 9
HDA 4700 11
HDA 4700 Approvals for shipping 13
HDA 4700 CANopen 15
HDA 4400 17
HDA 4300 21
HDA 4100 25
HDA 7446 29
HDA 7400 CANopen 31
HDA 3800 Iron and steel works
33
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.3
1.0
Absolute pressure
Available as individual units
OEM product for large volume

production
Flush membrane
CANopen Version
HDA 9000
0.5
HDA 8400
0.25
HDA 8700
HDA 7400
Relative pressure
HDA 3800
High pressure (from 40 bar)
HDA 4100
Low pressure (up to 40 bar)
HDA 4300
Accuracy (max. error)
HDA 4400
Electronic
Pressure Transmitters
HDA 4700
HDA 4800
Further pressure transmitters for special applications can be found in the

sections "Pressure Sensors with Flush Membrane", "Service Instruments",
"Sensors for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres" and "OEM Products for
Large Volume Production" .
0.5
1.0
1.0
ECE type authorisation

(approved for road vehicles)
Approval for potentially

explosive atmospheres
E 180.000.2 /11.13
Approvals for Shipping
UL Approval
Increased functional safety
Note:
Not all feature combinations are possible. For precise information, please consult the relevant data sheet.
Electronic
Pressure Transmitter
HDA 4800
The pressure transmitter series

HDA 4800 has a very accurate and
robust sensor cell with a thin-film
strain gauge on a stainless steel
membrane.
Outstanding technical specifications
and robust construction make the
HDA 4800 particularly suited to
the field of test rig and diagnostic
technology. It is also suitable for a
broad range of industrial applications.
Since the accuracy of a pressure
transmitter varies greatly with
the temperature of the fluid,
the instrument has excellent
characteristics in this respect. The
output signals 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 10V
and 0 .. 20 mA (source)
are available as standard.
Special features:
Accuracy 0.125 % FS typ.

Highly robust sensor cell
Very small temperature error
Excellent EMC
characteristics
Excellent long term stability
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
6; 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
Overload pressures
15; 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
Burst pressures
100; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
Mechanical connection
G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm
Parts in contact with medium
Mech. connection: Stainless steel

Seal: FPM
Output data
Output signal, permitted load resistance
4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]

0 ..10 V, 3 conductor
RLmin = 2 kW

0 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor source
RLmax = (UB - 4 V) / 20 mA [kW]
Accuracy to DIN 16086,
0.125 % FS typ.
0.25 % FS max.
Max. setting
Accuracy at min. setting
0.06 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.125 % FS max.
Temperature compensation
0.005 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.01 % FS / C max.
0.005 % FS / C typ.
0.01 % FS / C max.
Over range
Non-linearity at max. setting
0.15 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.05 % FS
Rise time
1 ms
Long-term drift
0.1 % FS typ. / year
Environmental conditions
Compensated temperature range
-25 .. +85 C
Operating temperature range1)
-40 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
Storage temperature range
-40 .. +100 C
Fluid temperature range1)
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark2)
Certificate No. E318391
Vibration resistance to
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Protection class to IEC 60529
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803
(DIN 43650) and Binder 714 M18)

IP 67 (M12x1, when an
IP 67 connector is used)
Other data
Supply voltage
10 .. 30 V DC 2-conductor

12 .. 30 V DC 3 conductor
for use acc. to UL spec.
- limited energy - according to

9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Residual ripple of supply voltage
5%
Current consumption
15 mA
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 180 g
Note:

Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit
protection are provided.
FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
B.F.S.L.= Best Fit Straight Line
1)
-25 C with FPM seal, -40 C on request
2)
Environmental conditions according to 1.4.2 UL 61010-1; C22.2 No 61010-1
E 18.380.1/11.13
Description:
Model code:
HDA 4 8 4 X X XXX 000
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Electrical connection
4 = Male, 4 pole Binder series 714 M18
(connector not supplied)
5 = Male, 3 pole+ PE, EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
(connector supplied)
6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
Signal
A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
B = 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor
E = 0 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor
Pressure ranges in bar
006, 016; 060; 100; 250; 400; 600
Modification number
000 = Standard
Pin connections:
Binder series 714 M18
Pin
HDA
4844-A
HDA
4844-B
HDA
4844-E
n.c.
+UB
+UB
Signal+
Signal
Signal
Signal-
0V
0V
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Note:
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label
or the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, can be found in the
Accessories brochure.
Dimensions:
Pin
HDA
4845-A
HDA
4845-B
HDA
4845-E
Signal+
+UB
+UB
Signal-
0V
0V
n.c.
Signal
Signal
Housing
Housing
Housing
M12x1
profile seal
ring
male electr. conn.

Binder series 714 -4p
male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
electr. conn.
4 pole
Pin
HDA
4846-A
HDA
4846-B
HDA
4846-E
Signal+
+UB
+UB
n.c
n.c
n.c
Signal-
0V
0V
n.c
Signal
Signal
Note:
hex-SW27
E 18.380.1/11.13
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
10
The information in this brochure relates to

the operating conditions and
applications described.
For applications and operating conditions
not described, please contact the relevant
technical department.
Hauptstrae 27, D-66128 Saarbrcken
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Description:

HDA 4700 has a very accurate and
robust sensor cell with a thin-film
membrane.
The 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V output
signals enable connection to all
measurement and control devices of
HYDAC ELECTRONIC GMBH as well
as standard evaluation systems
(e.g. PLC controls).
The main areas of application are
in the mobile or industrial sectors
of hydraulics and pneumatics,
particularly in applications with
restricted installation space.
Special features:

Excellent EMC characteristics
Very compact design
Persuasive price /
performance ratio
Technical data:
Input data
Measurement ranges1)
6; 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
Overload pressures
15; 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
Burst pressures
100; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
Mechanical connection1)
G1/4 A DIN 3852;

G1/2 A DIN3852
Torque value
20 Nm (G1/4); 45 Nm (G1/2)
Mech. conn.: Stainless steel

Seal: FPM
Output data
RLmax. = (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]

RLmin= 2 kW
0.25 % FS typ.
Max. setting
0.5 % FS max.
0.15 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.25 % FS max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
Over range
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.05 % FS
Rise time
1 ms
Long-term drift
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark3)
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803

IP 67 (M12x1, when an
Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
Current consumption
25 mA
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 145 g
Note:

Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and
short circuit protection are provided.
1)
1000 bar only with mechanical connection G 1/2 A DIN 3852 and vice versa
2)
3)
E 18.306.6/11.13
Electronic Pressure
Transmitter
HDA 4700
11
Model code:
HDA 4 7 X X X XXX 000
2 = G1/2 A DIN 3852 (only for "1000 bar" press. range)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
6 =
Male M12x1, 4 pole
Signal
006; 016; 060; 100; 250; 400; 600
1000 bar (only in conjunction with mechanical connection type "2")
Pin connections:
Pin
HDA 47X4-A
HDA 47X4-B
n.c.
+UB
Signal+
Signal
Signal-
0V
n.c.
n.c.
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
4
Pin
HDA 47X5-A
HDA 47X5-B
Signal+
+UB
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Housing
Housing
M12x1
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4 pole
Pin
HDA 47X6-A
HDA 47X6-B
Signal+
+UB
n.c.
n.c.
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
hex.-SW27
Note:
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
E 18.306.6/11.13
hex. SW27
12
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78

the operating conditions and applications
described.
For applications or operating conditions
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 4700
with Approvals for Shipping
This pressure transmitter has been

specially developed for shipbuilding
applications and is based on the
HDA 4000 series.
With its stainless steel measurement
cell and thin-film strain gauge,
the HDA 4700 is designed to measure
relative pressures in the high
pressure range.
The evaluation electronics converts
the measured pressure into a
proportional analogue signal of
4 .. 20 mA.
The electronic module is completely
potted to protect it against humidity,
vibrations and shock, and is enclosed
in a solid stainless steel housing.
For use in the shipping industry,
these pressure transmitters have
been approved by the following
organisations.
Approvals:
American Bureau
of Shipping

Lloyds Register
of Shipping
Det Norske Veritas

Germanischer Lloyd
Bureau Veritas
Other approvals on request
Technical data:
Input data
Measurement ranges 6; 16; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
Overload pressures 15; 32; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
Burst pressures 100; 200; 200; 300; 500; 1
000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
Torque value

Seal: FPM
Output data

RLmax = (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0.25 % FS typ.
Max. setting
0.5 % FS max.
0.15 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.25 % FS max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.015 % FS / C max.
4
0.008 % FS / C typ.
Range
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis

0.1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.05 % FS
Rise time
1 ms
Long-term drift
5
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
6
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803 (DIN 43650))

IP 67 (for M12x1 male, when an

IP 67 connector female is used)
Other data
Supply voltage
10 .. 32 V DC
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
Note:

1)
E 18.322.2/11.13
Description:
13
Model code:
HDA 4 7 4 X A XXXX S00
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
5 =
Male, 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6 =
Male M12x1, 4 pole
Signal
0006; 0016; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Modification number
S00 = With approvals for shipping
Note:
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the
technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
Pin connections:
Pin
HDA 4745-A
Signal+
Signal-
n.c.
Housing
M12x1
Accessories:
Pin
HDA 4746-A
Signal+
n.c.
Signal-
n.c.
Dimensions:
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4 pole
Note:
hex.-SW27
E 18.322.2/11.13
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
14

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 4700
CANopen
The HDA 4700 CAN is a digital

pressure transmitter which is used
to measure relative pressures in
hydraulics and pneumatics. The
measured pressure value is digitized
and made available to the CAN
field bus system via the CANopen
protocol. The instrument parameters
can be viewed and configured by the
user via the CANopen object directory
using standard CAN software.
This pressure transmitter, which is
based on the HDA 4700, has a very
accurate and robust sensor cell with
a thin-film strain gauge on a stainless
steel membrane.
Due to their outstanding temperature
and EMC characteristics, together
with their compact dimensions, these
instruments can be used in a wide
range of applications in the mobile
and industrial sectors.
Special features:
CANopen interface
Robust thin-film cell
Very compact design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges1)
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
Torque value

Output data
Output signal
Max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
Zero point
Over range
to DIN 16086

Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long-term drift
mark
mark3)
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Other data
Supply voltage

Current consumption
Life expectancy

Weight
Note:

40; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar

80; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852; G1/2 A DIN 3852
20 Nm (G1/4); 45 Nm (G1/2)
Seal: FPM
CANopen protocol
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.15 % FS typ.
0.25 % FS max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
0.1 % FS max.
0.08 % FS
1 ms
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
20 g
IP 67
10 .. 35 V DC
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
25 mA
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
approx. 150 g
Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage and

excess voltage protection are provided.
Special models available on request.
1)
1000 bar only with mechanical connection G1/2 A DIN 3852 and vice versa
2)
3)
E 18.316.3/11.13
Description:
15
Pin connections:
Model code:
HDA 4 7 X 8 K XXXX 000
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
8 =
Male M12x1, 5 pole
Signal
K = CANopen
0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
1000 (only in conjunction with mechanical connection type "2")
Modification number
000 = Standard (Baud Rate: 250k Node Id: 1)
Note:
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or
the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
M12x1
3
5
Pin
Signal
Description
Housing
shield/housing
+UB
supply +
0V
supply -
CAN_H
bus line dominant high
CAN_L
bus line dominant low
Accessories:
Protocol data for CANopen:

Communication profile
CiA DS 301 V4.2
Device profile
CiA DS 404 V1.3
Layer setting services and protocol
CiA DSP 305 V2.2
Automatic bit-rate detection
CiA AN 801
Baud rates
10 kbit .. 1 Mbit corresp. to DS305 V2.2
Transmission services
- PDO
- Transfer
Measured value as 16/32 bit, float status

synchronous, asynchronous, cyclical, measured
value change, exceeding boundaries
Node ID/Baud rate
Can be set via Manufacturer Specific Profile
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

5 pole
6
hex. SW27
E 18.316.3/11.13
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
16
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
Note:

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Description:

HDA 4400 has a pressure
measurement cell with thin-film strain
gauge on a stainless steel membrane.
The 4 .. 20 V or 0 .. 10 V output
HYDAC ELECTRONIC GMBH
measurement and control devices
as well as connection to standard
evaluation systems (e.g. PLC
controls).
The main areas of application are
in the mobile or industrial sectors
of hydraulics and pneumatics,
particularly in applications with
restricted installation space.
Special features:

Very compact design
Persuasive price /
performance ratio
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges1)
16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
Overload pressures
32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
Burst pressures
200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852; G1/2 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm (G1/4); 45 Nm (G1/2)

Seal: FPM
Output data
RLmax. = (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]

RLmin. = 2 kW
Accuracy to DIN 16086
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.5 % FS max.

0.015 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.025 % FS / C max.

0.015 % FS / C typ.
Over range

0.025 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086

Hysteresis
0.4 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.1 % FS
Rise time
1 ms
Long-term drift
-25 .. +85 C
Operating temperature range
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark3)
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803


IP 67 (for M12x1, when an

Other data
Supply voltage
8 .. 30 V DC, 2 conductor

12 .. 30 V DC, 3 conductor

9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
Current consumption
25 mA
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 145 g
Note:

1)
1000 bar only with mechanical connection G 1/2 A DIN 3852 and vice versa
2)
3)
Environmental conditions in accordance with 1.4.2 UL 61010-1; C22.2 No 61010-1
E 18.305.4/11.13
Electronic Pressure
Transmitter
HDA 4400
17
Model code:
HDA 4 4 X X X XXX 000
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6 =
Male M12x1, 4 pole
Signal
016; 060; 100; 250; 400; 600
1000 bar (only in conjunction with mechanical connection type "2")
Pin connections:
Pin
HDA 44X4-A
HDA 44X4-B
n.c.
+UB
Signal+
Signal
Signal-
0V
n.c.
n.c.
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Pin
Dimensions:
4
HDA 44X5-A
HDA 44X5-B
Signal+
+UB
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Housing
Housing
M12x1
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

Binder series 714 -4pole
male electr. conn.

3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4 pole
Pin
HDA 44X6-A
HDA 44X6-B
Signal+
+UB
n.c.
n.c.
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
hex.-SW27
Note:
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
E 18.305.4/11.13
hex. SW27
18
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
Optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 4400

HDA 4000 series.
With its stainless steel measurement
cell and thin-film strain gauge,
the HDA 4400 is designed to measure
relative pressures in the high
pressure range.
4 .. 20 mA.
organisations.
Approvals:
American Bureau
of Shipping

Lloyds Register
of Shipping
Det Norske Veritas

Germanischer Lloyd
Bureau Veritas
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
6; 16; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
Overload pressures
15; 32; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
100; 200; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
Burst pressures
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
Torque value
Mech. connector: Stainless steel

Seal: FPM
Output data

RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.5 % FS max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.025 % FS / C max.
4
0.015 % FS / C typ.
Range
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis

0.4 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.1 % FS
Rise time
1 ms
Long-term drift
5
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
6
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803

(DIN 43650))

IP 67 (for M12x1 male when

an IP 67 connector is used
Other data
Supply voltage
10 .. 32 V DC
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
Note:

1)
E 18.317.3/11.13
Description:
19
Model code:
HDA 4 4 4 X A XXXX S00
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6 =
Male M12x1, 4 pole
Signal
0006; 0016; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Modification number
Note:
Pin connections:
Pin
HDA 4445-A
Signal+
Signal-
n.c.
Housing
M12x1
Accessories:
Pin
HDA 4446-A
Signal+
n.c.
Signal-
n.c.
Dimensions:
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
male electr.
conn.
4p
Note:
hex.-SW27
E 18.317.3/11.13
elastomer
profile seal
ring DIN3869
20

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Description:

HDA 4300 has a ceramic pressure
measurement cell with a thick-film
strain gauge which has been specially
developed for measuring relative
pressure in the low pressure range.
The output signals 4 .. 20 mA or
0 .. 10 V allow connection of all
measurement and control devices as
well as industry standard control and
monitoring instruments.
The main areas of application
are low-pressure applications
in hydraulics and pneumatics,
particularly in refrigeration and airconditioning technology, the food and
pharmaceutical industries.
Special features:

Very compact design
Persuasive price /
performance ratio
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40 bar
-1 .. 5; -1 .. 9 bar
Overload pressures
3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120 bar

20; 32 bar
Burst pressures
5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180 bar

30; 48 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852; G1/2 B DIN-EN 837
20 Nm (G1/4); 45 Nm (G1/2)
Torque value

Sensor cell: Ceramic

Seal: Copper (G1/2) / FPM / EPDM

(as per model code)
Output data
RLmax. = (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]

RLmin = 2 kW
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.02 % FS / C typ.

0.03 % FS / C max.
Zero point

0.02 % FS / C typ.
Over range

0.03 % FS / C max.
0.5 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis

0.4 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.1 % FS
Rise time
1 ms
Long-term drift
-25 .. +85 C
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark2)
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803


IP 67 (M12x1, when an IP 67 connector is used)
Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
Current consumption
25 mA
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles, 0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
Note:

Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override

and short circuit protection are provided.
1)
-25 C with FPM or EDPM seal, -40 C on request
2)
E 18.323.2/11.13
Electronic Pressure
Transmitter
HDA 4300
21
Model code:
HDA 4 3 X X X XXXX 000 X 1
1 = G1/2 B DIN-EN 837 (male)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE,
DIN EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6 =
Male M12x1, 4 pole,
Signal
01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
0005 (-1 .. 5); 0009 (-1 .. 9)
Pin connections:
Pin
HDA 43X4-A
HDA 43X4-B
n.c.
+UB
Signal+
Signal
Signal-
0V
n.c.
n.c.
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Modification number
000 = Standard
Seal material (in contact with fluid)
F = FPM seal (e.g.: for hydraulic oils)
E = EPDM seal (e.g.: for refrigerants)
Material of connection (in contact with fluid)
1 = Stainless steel
Note:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors can be found
in the Accessories brochure.
4
Dimensions:
Pin
HDA 43X5-A
HDA 43X5-B
Signal+
+UB
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Housing
Housing
M12x1
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

Binder series 714 -4 pole
male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4 pole
Pin
HDA 43X6-A
HDA 43X6-B
Signal+
+UB
n.c.
n.c.
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Note:
hex.-SW27
hex.-SW27
E 18.323.2/11.13
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
22
flat seal ring Cu

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 4300

HDA 4000 series.
The HDA 4300 has a ceramic
measurement cell with thick-film
strain gauge for measuring relative
4 .. 20 mA.
organisations.
Approvals:
American Bureau
of Shipping

Lloyds Register
of Shipping
Det Norske Veritas

Germanischer Lloyd
Bureau Veritas
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40 bar
-1 .. 5; -1 .. 9 bar
Overload pressures
3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120 bar

20; 32 bar
Burst pressures
5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180 bar

30; 48 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm


Seal: FPM / EPDM

(as per model code)
Output data

RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
Max. setting
4
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.02 % FS / C typ.
0.03 % FS / C max.
Zero point

0.02 % FS / C typ.
Over range

0.03 % FS / C max.
0.5 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
5
Hysteresis
0.4 % FS max.

Repeatability
0.1 % FS
1 ms
Rise time
Long-term drift
-25 .. +85 C
6
-30 .. +85C / -25 .. +85 C
-30 .. +100 C
-30 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803
(DIN 43650))

IP 67 (for M12x1 male, when an IP 67
connector is used)
Other data
Supply voltage
10 .. 32 V DC
5%
> 10 million cycles
Life expectancy

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
Note:

1)
-25 C with FPM or EPDM seal, -30 C on request
E 18.324.2/11.13
Description:
23
Model code:
HDA 4 3 4 X A XXXX S00 X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)

EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6 =
Male M12x1, 4 pole
Signal
Pin connections:
Pin
HDA 4345-A

01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
0005 (-1 .. 5); 0009 (-1 .. 9)
Signal+
Signal-
Modification number
n.c.
Housing

M12x1

1 = Stainless steel
Note:
Accessories:
Pin
HDA 4346-A
Signal+
n.c.
Signal-
n.c.
Dimensions:
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

3pole +PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4 pole
Note:
hex.-SW27
E 18.324.2/11.13
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
24

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic Pressure
Transmitter
HDA 4100

HDA 4100 has a ceramic pressure
strain gauge which has been specially
developed for measuring absolute
pressure in the low-pressure range.
The 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V output
as well as standard control and
evaluation systems.
The main areas of application
are low-pressure applications
in hydraulics and pneumatics,
particularly in refrigeration and airconditioning technology, the food and
pharmaceutical industries.
Special features:

Very compact design
Persuasive price /
performance ratio
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
1; 2.5 bar
Overload pressures
3; 8 bar
Burst pressures
5; 12 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852; G1/2 B DIN-EN 837
Torque value
20 Nm (G1/4); 45 Nm (G1/2)


Seal: Copper (G1/2) / FPM / EPDM
(as per model code)

Output data

RLmax. = (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]

RLmin. = 2 kW
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1.0 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.5 % FS max.

0.02 % FS / C typ.
4
Zero point
0.03 % FS / C max.

0.02 % FS / C typ.
Over range
0.03 % FS / C max.
0.5 % FS max.
to DIN 16086

Hysteresis
0.4 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.1 % FS
Rise time
1 ms
Long-term drift
5
-25 .. +85 C
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
6
mark2)
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803


Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
Current consumption
25 mA
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 145 g
Note:

1)
2)
E 18.314.3/11.13
Description:
25
Model code:
HDA 4 1 X X X XXXX 000 X 1
1 = G1/2 B DIN-EN 837 (male)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6 =
Male M12x1, 4 pole
Pin
HDA 41X4-A
HDA 41X4-B
n.c.
+UB
Signal+
Signal
Signal-
0V

01.0; 02.5
n.c.
n.c.
Modification number
000 = Standard
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
3
Pin connections:

1 = Stainless steel
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
Pin
HDA 41X5-A
HDA 41X5-B
Signal+
+UB
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Housing
Housing
M12x1
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

Binder series 714 -4 pole
male electr. conn.

3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4 pole
Pin
HDA 41X6-A
HDA 41X6-B
Signal+
+UB
n.c.
n.c.
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Note:
hex.-SW27
hex.-SW27
E 18.314.3/11.13
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
26
flat seal ring Cu

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 4100

HDA 4000 series.
The HDA 4100 has a ceramic
strain gauge for measuring absolute
4 .. 20 mA.
organisations.
Approvals:
American Bureau
of Shipping

Lloyds Register
of Shipping
Det Norske Veritas

Germanischer Lloyd
Bureau Veritas
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
1; 2.5 bar
Overload pressures
3; 8 bar
5; 12 bar
Burst pressures
G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm


Seal: FPM / EPDM

(as per model code)
Output data

RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
Max. setting
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
(B.F.S.L.)
4
0.02 % FS / C typ.
0.03 % FS / C max.
Zero point

0.02 % FS / C typ.
Over range

0.03 % FS / C max.
0.5 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.25 % FS max.

Repeatability
0.1 % FS
1 ms
Rise time
5
Long-term drift
-25 .. +85 C
-30 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
-30 .. +100 C
6
-30 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803
(DIN 43650))

Other data
Supply voltage
10 .. 32 V DC
5%
> 10 million cycles
Life expectancy

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
Note:

1)
E 18.325.2/11.13
Description:
27
Model code:
HDA 4 1 4 X A XXXX S00 X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6 =
Male M12x1, 4 pole
Signal
Pin connections:
Pin
HDA 4145-A

01.0; 02.5
Signal+
Signal-
Modification number
n.c.
Housing

M12x1

1 = Stainless steel
Note:
Accessories:
Pin
HDA 4146-A
Signal+
n.c.
Signal-
n.c.
Dimensions:
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4 pole
Note:
hex.-SW27
E 18.325.2/11.13
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
28

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Description:

HDA 7400 combines excellent
technical specifications with a highly
compact design.
The HDA 7446 was specifically
developed for OEM applications e.g.
in mobile applications.
A strain gauge sensor cell is the
basis for a robust, long-life pressure
transmitter.
Various pressure ranges between
0 .. 40 bar and 0 .. 600 bar provide
versatility when adapting to particular
applications.
For integration into modern controls
(e.g. with PLC), the analogue output
signals 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10V are also
available on the standard version.
Other output signals are available on
request.
Special features:

Very compact design
Excellent durability
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
Overload pressures
80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
Burst pressures
200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm

Seal: FPM
Output data
RLmax. = (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]

RLmin. = 2 kW
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.5 % FS max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
0.025 % FS / C max.
Over range
0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.4 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.1 % FS
Rise time
2 ms
Long-term drift
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +85 C /-25 ... +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
-mark2)
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 67 (for M12x1, when an IP 67

connector is used)
Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
Current consumption
25 mA
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 60 g
Note:

1)
2)
E 18.326.2/11.13
Electronic Pressure
Transmitter
HDA 7446
29
Model code:
HDA 7 4 4 6 X XXX 000
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Pin connections:
M12x1
Male M12x1, 4 pole
6 =
Signal
040; 060; 100; 250; 400; 600
Pin
Modification number
000 = Standard
Signal+
+UB
n.c.
n.c.
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Note:
HDA 7446-A
HDA 7446-B
Accessories:
Dimensions:
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Note:
E 18.326.2/11.13

described.
30

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 7400
CANopen
The HDA 7400 CAN is a digital

pressure transmitter which is used
to measure relative pressures in
hydraulics and pneumatics. The
measured pressure value is digitized
and made available to the CAN
field bus system via the CANopen
protocol. The instrument parameters
can be viewed and configured by the
user via the CANopen object directory
using standard CAN software.
This pressure transmitter, which is
based on the HDA 7400, has a very
accurate and robust sensor cell with
a thin-film strain gauge on a stainless
steel membrane.
Due to their outstanding temperature
and EMC characteristics, together
with their compact dimensions, these
instruments can be used in a wide
range of applications in the mobile
and industrial sectors.
Special features:
CANopen interface
Robust thin-film cell
Very compact design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
Torque value

Output data
Output signal
Max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
Zero point
Over range
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis

Repeatability
Rise time
Long-term drift
mark
mark2)
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Other data
Supply voltage

Current consumption
Life expectancy

Weight
Note:

40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar

80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
Seal: FPM
CANopen protocol
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
0.4 % FS max.
0.1 % FS
2 ms
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
20 g
IP 67
10 .. 35 V DC
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
25 mA
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 60 g
Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage and excess voltage protection
are provided.
1)
2)
E 18.367.2/11.13
Description:
31
Model code:
HDA 7 4 4 8 K XXXX 000
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Pin connections:
M12x1
4
Male M12x1, 5 pole
8 =
3
5
Signal
K = CANopen
0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Modification number
000 = Standard (Baud Rate: 250k Node Id: 1)
Note:
Accessories:
Pin
Signal
Description
Housing
shield/housing
+UB
supply +
0V
supply -
CAN_H
CAN_L
Configuration corresp. to CIA-DR-303-1
Protocol data for CANopen:

Communication profile
CiA DS 301 V4.2
Device profile
CiA DS 404 V1.3
Layer setting services and protocol
CiA DSP 305 V2.2
Automatic bit-rate detection
CiA AN 801
Baud rates
10 kbit .. 1 Mbit corresp. to DS305 V2.2
Transmission services
- PDO
- Transfer
Measured value as 16/32 bit, float status

synchronous, asynchronous, cyclical, measured
value change, exceeding boundaries
Node ID/Baud rate
Can be set via Manufacturer Specific Profile
Dimensions:
5
Note:
hex.-SW27
E 18.367.2/11.13
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
32

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 3800
for Iron & Steel Works Applications
This high-precision pressure

transmitter was specially developed
and adapted for the sophisticated
measurement demands of steelworks
technology.
The instrument has a very robust
sensor cell with a thin-film strain
Its outstanding specifications
in respect of temperature effect
(temperature drift for zero point and
range are in each case max.
0.01 % FS / C) and accuracy
( 0.15 % FS typ.) make it ideally
suited for use in the environmental
conditions found in steelworks.
The excellent EMC characteristics
guarantee signal stability during the
harshest high-frequency, electromagnetic interference.
Special features:

Specially designed for use in
steelworks and rolling mills
Technical data:
Input data
Measurement ranges1)
16; 60; 100; 150; 250; 300; 350;

400; 500; 600 bar
Overload pressures
32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 900; 900;

900; 900; 1000 bar
Burst pressures
200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 2000;

2000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852

G1/2 A DIN 3852
20 Nm (G1/4 A)
Torque value

45 Nm (G1/2 A)

Seal:
FPM (G1/4 A)

NBR O-ring (G1/2 A)
Output data

RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]

0 .. 20 mA, (3 conductor rising)
4

RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0.15 % FS typ.
Max. setting
0.3 % FS max.
0.1 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.15 % FS max.
0.005 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.01 % FS / C max.

0.005 % FS / C typ.
5
Over range

0.01 % FS / C max.
0.2 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
(from 100 bar 0.15 % FS max.)
Hysteresis

0.1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.05 % FS
Rise time
1.5 ms
6
Long-term drift
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +85C / -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
25 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 68
Other data
Supply voltage 2 conductor
10 .. 30 V DC
Supply voltage 3 conductor
12 .. 30 V DC
5%
Current consumption 3 conductor
approx. 25 mA
Life expectancy
Weight
~ 210 g
Note:


1)
Other measuring ranges on request
2)
E 18.304.5/11.13
Description:
33
Model code:
HDA 3 8 X 0 X XXX 124 (XXM)
0 = G1/2 A DIN 3852 (male)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
0 = Flying lead
Cable assignment:
Core
HDA
38X0-A
HDA
38X0-E
black
n.c.
+UB
brown
Signal+
Signal
blue
Signal-
0V
Cable type:
Signal
E = 0 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor
016; 060; 100; 150; 250; 300; 350; 400; 500; 600
lflon cable 3 x 0.75 mm2 shielded.

Outer sheath FEP black
Outer diameter 5.9 0.15mm
Modification number
124 = Iron & steel works
Cable length in metres
06; 10; 15
Note:
length as per
model code
Dimensions:
cable gland
PG 7
hex.-SW27
Note:
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
E 18.304.5/11.13
hex.SW27
34
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.304.5/11.13
35
Electronic Pressure Switches
Electronic pressure switches for general applications:

Page
EDS 3400 37
EDS 3400 Menu navigation according to VDMA
41
EDS 3400
IO-Link 43
EDS 3300 45
49
EDS 3300
IO-Link 51
EDS 3100 53
57
EDS 3100
IO-Link 59
EDS 300 61
EDS 300 Approvals for shipping
65
EDS 8000 67
EDS 601 69
EDS 1700 71
EDS 4400
Programmable 73
EDS 4300
Programmable 75
EDS 820
IO-Link 77
Electronic pressure switches offer a

multitude of advantages in comparison
to mechanical pressure switches and
contact pressure gauges.
Their superiority is shown through
greater accuracy, freedom from wear,
long-term stability, simpler operation and
the high number of switching cycles,
among other things.
0.5
Low pressure (up to 40 bar)

High pressure (from 40 bar)
Relative pressure
Analogue output
VDMA Menu Navigation

IO Link Interface
E 180.000.2 /11.13
36
1.0
1.0
ECE type authorisation

Approval for potentially

Approvals for Shipping

UL Approval
1.0
OEM product for large

volume production
Flush membrane
1.0
Factory-set
(not field-adjustable)
DESINA-compliant
1.0
Number of switching outputs
Programmable
1.0
Absolute pressure
Digital display
1.0
EDS 410
1.0
EDS 710
1.0
EDS 810
EDS 1700
1.0
EDS 820
EDS 601
1.0
EDS 4100
EDS 8000
1.0
EDS 4300
EDS 300
1.0
EDS 4400
EDS 3100
EDS 3300
Electronic
Pressure Switches
EDS 3400
Further electronic pressure switches for special applications can be found in the Sections
"Pressure Sensors with Flush Membrane", "Sensors for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres" and "OEM Products for Large Volume Production" .
Note: Not all feature combinations are possible. For precise information, please consult the relevant data sheet.
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3400
The EDS 3400 is a compact electronic

pressure switch with integrated
digital display for relative pressure
measurement in the high-pressure
range. The instrument has a stainless
steel measurement cell with thin-film
strain gauge. The instrument can have
one or two switching outputs and there
is the option of an additional switchable
analogue output signal (4 .. 20 mA
or 0 .. 10 V).
A special design feature of the
EDS 3400 is that the display can be
moved in two planes. The device can be
installed in almost any position and the
display can be turned to the optimum
position without the usual additional
expense of a mechanical adapter. The
4-digit display can indicate the pressure
in bar, psi or MPa.
The user can select the particular
unit of measurement. When changing
to a different measurement unit, the
instrument automatically converts all
the switching settings to the new unit of
measurement. In addition, the
EDS 3400 is also available in a
DESINA-compliant version.
The main applications of the
EDS 3400 are primarily in hydraulics
and pneumatics, as well as in
refrigeration and air conditioning
technology.
Special features:
1 or 2 PNP transistor switching

outputs, up to 1.2 A load per output
Accuracy 1 % FS
Optional switchable analogue output

(4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V)
4-digit digital display
Optimum alignment - can be
rotated in two planes (axes)
Measured value can be displayed in
bar, psi or MPa
User-friendly due to key
programming
Switching points and switch-back
hystereses can be adjusted
independently
Many useful additional functions
Optional Desina-compliant pin
configuration with diagnostic
function
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
Overload pressures
80; 200; 500; 800; 1000; bar
Burst pressures
200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852

Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
Torque value
20 Nm

Seal: FPM (G1/4 A DIN 3852)
Output data
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
(display, analogue output)
Repeatability
0.25 % FS max.
Temperature drift
0.025 % FS / C max. zero point

0.025 % FS / C max. range
Analogue output (optional)
Signal selectable:

4 .. 20 mA
load resistance max. 500 W

0 .. 10 V
load resistance min. 1 kW
Switch outputs
Type
PNP transistor output
Switching current
max. 1.2 A
Switching cycles
> 100 million
Reaction time
< 10 ms
Long-term drift
DESINA diagnostic signal (Pin 2)
Function
OK: HIGH level / not OK: LOW level
Level
HIGH: approx. +UB / LOW: < +0.3 V
-10 .. +70 C
-25 .. +80 C (-25 .. +60 C acc. to UL spec.)
-40 .. +80 C
Fluid temperature range
-25 .. +80 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark1)
10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage
9 .. 35 V DC without analogue output

18 .. 35 V DC with analogue output

9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption
max. 2.455 A total
max. 35 mA with inactive switching outputs


and analogue output
Display
4-digit, LED, 7 segment, red,

height of digits 7 mm
Weight
~ 120 g
Note: Excess voltage, override protection and short circuit protection are provided.

FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measurement range
1)

E 18.060.3/11.13
Description:
37
Setting options:
All settings available on the EDS 3400 are

grouped in 2 easy-to-navigate menus.
In order to prevent unauthorised
adjustment of the device, a programming
lock can be set.
Setting ranges for the switch

outputs:
Switching point function
Meas.
range
in bar
Switch
point
in bar
Hysteresis
in bar
Increment*
in bar
0 .. 40
0.6 .. 40
0.2 .. 39.6
0.1
0 .. 100
1.6 .. 100
0.6 .. 99.0
0.2
0 .. 250
4.0 .. 250
1.5 .. 247.5
0.5
0 .. 400
6.0 .. 400
2.0 .. 396
0 .. 600
9.0 .. 600
3.0 .. 594
Window function
Meas.
range
Upper
switch
value
in bar
Increment*
in bar
Lower
switch
value
in bar
0 .. 40
0.6 .. 39.2
0.9 .. 39.6
0.1
0 .. 100
1.6 .. 98.2
2.4 .. 99
0.2
0 .. 250
4.0 .. 245.5
6.0 .. 247.5
0.5
0 .. 400
6.0 .. 392
9.0 .. 396
0 .. 600
9.0 .. 589
14 .. 594
in bar
* All ranges given in the table

are adjustable by the increments
shown.
Model code:
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
9 = Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
only possible on output models "1", "2" and "3"
only possible on output model "5"
Output
1 = 1 switching output
only in conjunction with electrical connection type "6"
2 = 2 switching outputs
3 = 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
5 = 2 switching outputs and 1 analogue output
0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Modification number
000 = Standard
Model code:
DESINA-compliant or
can be connected to DESINA:
Additional functions:
Switching mode of the switching outputs

adjustable (switching point function or
window function)
Switching direction of the switching
outputs adjustable (N/C or
N/O function)
Switch-on and switch-off delay
adjustable from 0.00 .. 99.99 seconds
Choice of display (actual pressure,
peak value, switch point 1,
switch point 2, display off)
Display filter for smoothing the display
value during pressure pulsations
Optional analogue output signal
selectable 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
Pressure can be displayed in
the measurement units bar, psi, MPa.
The scaling can also be adapted to
indicate force, weight, etc.
EDS 3 4 X X X XXXX 000
EDS 3 4 X 8 X XXXX D00

4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)

Output
0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Modification number
D00 = DESINA-compliant pin configuration for self-diagnostics
E 18.060.3/11.13
EDS 3400 for self diagnostics:
38
The DESINA-compliant pressure

switch has been specially developed
for customers in the machine tool and
mechanical engineering sectors and
complies with the DESINA specification.
A diagnostic signal enables errors to be
detected and an "ERROR" message also
appears in the display. The electrical
connection is a round 5-pole M12x1
to IP 67 in accordance with DESINA
requirements.
Note:
For instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, splash
guards, clamps for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
Pin connections:
Dimensions:
M12x1, 4 pole
display
turns thru
270
housing
turns thru
340
hex. SW27
Pin
EDS
34X6-1
EDS
34X6-2
EDS
34X6-3
+UB
+UB
+UB
n.c.
SP 2
Analogue
0V
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
SP 1
M12x1, 5 pole
4
Elastomer profile gasket

DIN 3869
3
5
male electr. conn. M12x1

4 pole/5 pole
Pin
EDS
34X8-5
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
SP 2
M12x1, 5 pole
3
5
Note:

DESINAcompliant
Can be
connected to
DESINA
Pin
EDS
34X8-1
EDS
34X8-3
+UB
+UB
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
n.c.
Analogue

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.060.3/11.13
39
E 18.060.3/11.13
40
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3400
with Menu Navigation to VDMA

range.
The device has a stainless steel
gauge.
The device can have one or two
switching outputs, and there is the
option of an additional switchable
analogue output signal (4 .. 20 mA
or 0 .. 10 V).
moved in two planes. The unit can
be installed in almost any mounting
position and the display can be turned
to the optimum position without
the usual additional expense of a
mechanical adapter. The 4-digit display
can indicate the pressure in bar, psi or
MPa. The user can select the individual
measurement unit. When changing to a
different measurement unit, the
EDS 3400 automatically converts all
measurement.
technology.
Special features:
Menu navigation according to VDMA

Accuracy 1 % FS
Optional analogue output selectable

(4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V)
Rotation in two planes (axes)
for optimum alignment
bar, psi or MPa
User-friendly due to key programming
independently
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
Overload pressures
80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
Burst pressure
200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852

Torque value
20 Nm

Sensor cell: Stainless steel

Seal: FPM
Output data
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
Max. setting
Repeatability
0.25 % FS max.
Temperature drift

Signal selectable:

4 .. 20 mA

0 .. 10 V
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
max. 1.2 A
Switching cycles
> 100 million
Reaction time
< 10 ms
Long-term drift
-10 .. +70 C
-25 .. +80 C (-25 .. +60 C acc. to UL spec.)
-40 .. +80 C
-25 .. +80 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark
mark1)
10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption
max. 2.455 A total


and analogue output
Display

Weight
~ 120 g

1)
E 18.368.1/11.13
Description:
41
Setting options:
All terms and symbols used for setting the

EDS 3400 as well as the menu structure
comply with the specifications in the
VDMA Standard (VDMA 24574-1) for
pressure switches.
The EDS 3400 can easily be adjusted via
three buttons.

outputs:
Measuring
range
in bar
0 .. 40
0 .. 100
0 .. 250
0 .. 400
0 .. 600
Measuring
range
in bar
0 .. 40
0 .. 100
0 .. 250
0 .. 400
0 .. 600
Lower
limit of
RP / FL
in bar
0.4
1.0
2.5
4
6
Upper limit of
SP / FH
Min. difference
betw.
RP and SP
& FL and FH
0.4
1.0
2.5
4
6
Increment*
in bar
40.0
100.0
250.0
400
600
in bar
0.1
0.2
0.5
1
1

shown.
SP = switch point
RP = switch-back point
FL = pressure window lower value
FH = pressure window upper value
Model code:
EDS 3 4 X 6 X XXXX V00
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Output
040;100; 250; 400; 600
Modification number
V00 = Menu navigation in accordance with VDMA (Standard Sheet 24574)
Notes:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
display
turns thru
270

window function)
outputs adjustable (N/C or N/O function)
Analogue output signal selectable
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
measurement units bar, psi, MPa.
housing
turns thru
340
hex-SW27
elastomer profile gasket

DIN 3869
Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole

4 pole
E 18.368.1/11.13
Pin
42
1
2
3
4
EDS
34X6-1
+UB
n.c.
0V
SP 1
EDS
34X6-2
+UB
SP 2
0V
SP 1
EDS
34X6-3
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
Note:


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3400
with IO-Link Interface
The EDS 3400 with IO-Link

communication interface is a compact
electronic pressure switch with
integrated digital display for relative
pressure measurement in the highpressure range.
The device is equipped with a switching
output and additional output that can be
configured as switching or analogue
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V).
Compared with the standard version,
the IO-Link interface enables
bidirectional communication between
the device and the control.
Parameterisation and cyclical
transmission of process and service
data is therefore possible.
The pressure switch series EDS 3400
with communication interface IO-Link
according to specification V1.1 has
been specially designed for connecting
sensors in automation systems.
Typical fields of application are
machine tools, handling and assembly
automation, intralogistics or the
packaging industry.
Special features:
1 PNP transistor switching output

1 universal output, configurable
as PNP transistor switching output or
analogue output
Accuracy 1 % FS
Optimum alignment: can be rotated in
two axes
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload range
Burst pressures
Torque value
Output data
Output signals
Max. setting (display, analogue output)
Repeatability
Temperature drift
Analogue output
Signal
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles
Reaction time
Long term drift
Parameterisation
- mark
Vibration resistance according to
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
Shock resistance according to
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption
Display
Weight
40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar

80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
200; 500; 1000; 2000, 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
Sensor cell: Stainless steel
Seal: FPM
Output 1: PNP Transistor switching output
Output 2: can be configured as PNP transistor
switching output or analogue output
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS max.
selectable: 4 .. 20 mA

0 .. 10 V
load resistance max. 500

load resistance min. 1 k
PNP transistor switching output

max. 250 mA per output
> 100 million
< 10 ms
Via IO-Link interface, with HYDAC
programming device HPG 3000 or push
buttons on the EDS 3400
-10 .. +70 C
-25 .. +80 C
-40 .. +80 C
-25 .. +80 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
10 g
50 g
IP 67
0.535 A with active switching outputs
35 mA with inactive switching outputs
55 mA with inactive switching output
and analogue output
4-digit, LED, 7-segment, red,
~ 120 g

E 18.368.1.0/11.13
Description:
43
Measuring
range
in bar
0 .. 40
0 .. 100
0 .. 250
0 .. 400
0 .. 600
Lower limit of
RP / FL
in bar
0.4
1.0
2.5
4
6
Upper limit of
SP / FH
in bar
40.0
100.0
250.0
400
600
Measuring
range
Min. difference
betw.
RP and SP
& FL and FH
0.4
1.0
2.5
4
6
Increment*
in bar
0 .. 40
0 .. 100
0 .. 250
0 .. 400
0 .. 600
in bar
0.1
0.2
0.5
1
1
* All ranges given in the table are

adjustable by the increments shown.
SP = switch point

window function)
Analogue output signal selectable:
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
bar, psi, MPa.
Baud rate
38.4 kBaud *
Cycle time
2.5 ms
Process data width
16 Bit
Frame type
2.2
Specification
V1.1
*C
onnection with unshielded standard sensor line possible
up to a max. line length of 20 m.
Download the IO Device Description (IODD) from:
http://www.hydac.com/de-en/service/downloads-software-on-request/
Model code:
EDS34X6LXXXX000
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
= Male M12x1, 4 pole
6
Output
= IO Link Interface
L
0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
1
3
64
housing turns
thru 340
hex. SW27
IO-Link
C/Q
L-
40.4
2 +0.1
12
M12x1, 4 pole
11
display turns
thru 270
Pin connections:
L+
42
25.5
M12x1
91.5

outputs:
IO-Link-specific data:
75

VDMA Standard for pressure switches.
16.1
Setting options:
29.5
G1/4 A DIN 3852-E

16.1
18.9 -0.2

DIN 3869
53.5
Standard IO
E 18.368.1.0/11.13
I/Q
44
Pin
1
2
Signal
L+
I/Q
3
4
LC/Q
Description
Supply voltage
Switching output (SP2) /
analogue output
Gnd
IO-Link communication /
switching output (SP1)
male elect. conn. M12x1

4 pole
Note:


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3300

measurement in the low-pressure
range. It has a ceramic measuring
cell with thick-film strain gauge. The
instrument can have one or two
analogue output signal (4 .. 20 mA or
0 .. 10 V). A special design feature of
the EDS 3300 is that the display can
be moved in two planes (axes). The
instrument can be installed in almost
any mounting position and the display
can be turned to the optimum position
without the usual additional expense
of a mechanical adapter. The 4-digit
display can indicate the pressure in bar,
psi or MPa. The user can select the
particular unit of measurement. When
changing to a different measurement
unit, the instrument automatically
converts all the switching settings to the
new unit of measurement. In addition,
the EDS 3300 is also available in a
DESINA-compliant version.
The main applications of the EDS 3300 are
primarily in hydraulics and pneumatics,
as well as in refrigeration and air
conditioning technology.
Special features:

outputs, up to 1.2 A load
per output
Accuracy 1 % FS
Optional switchable
analogue output (4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V)
Optimum alignment - can be rotated
in two axes
bar, psi or MPa
programming
independently
Optional Desina-compliant
pin configuration with
diagnostic function
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
-1 .. 1; 1; 2.5; 6; 10; 16 bar
Overload pressures
3; 3; 8; 18; 30; 48 bar
5; 5; 12; 30; 50; 80 bar
Burst pressures
G1/4 A DIN 3852

G1/2 B DIN-EN 837

20 Nm (G1/4)
Torque value

45 Nm (G1/2)


Seal: copper (G1/2) / FPM / EPDM
(as per model code)

Output data
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
Max. setting
0.25 % FS max.
Repeatability
Temperature drift

Signal selectable:

4 .. 20 mA

0 .. 10 V
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
max. 1.2 A
Switching cycles
> 100 million
Reaction time
< 10 ms
Long-term drift
Function
Level
-10 .. +70 C
-25 .. +80 C (-25 .. +60 C acc. to UL spec.)
-40 .. +80 C
-25 .. +80 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark1)
10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption
max. 2.455 A total



and analogue output
Display

Weight
~ 120 g
Note: Excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are provided.


1)
E 18.068.2/11.13
Description:
45
Setting options:
All settings offered by the EDS 3300 are

lock can be set.

outputs:
Meas.
range
in bar
Switch
point
in bar
Hysteresis
in bar
Increment*
in bar
-1 .. 1
-0.97 .. 1
-0.99 .. 0.98
0.01
0 .. 1
0.016 .. 1
0.006 .. 0.99
0.002
0 .. 2.5
0.04 .. 2.5
0.015 .. 2.475
0.005
0 .. 6
0.09 .. 6
0.3
0 .. 10
0.16 .. 10
0.06 .. 9.9
.. 5.94
0.02
0 .. 16
0.25 .. 16
0.1
0.05
.. 15.8
0.01
Window function
Meas.
range
in bar
Lower
switch value
in bar
Upper
switch value
in bar
Increment*
in bar
-1 .. 1
-0.97 .. 0.96
-0.95 .. 0.98
0.01
0 .. 1
0.016 .. 0.982
0.024.. 0.99
0.002
0 .. 2.5
0.04 .. 2.455
0.06 .. 2.475
0.005
0 .. 6
0.09 .. 5.89
0.14 .. 5.94
0.01
0 .. 10
0.16 .. 9.82
0.24 .. 9.9
0.02
0 .. 16
0.25 .. 15.7
0.4 .. 15.8
0.05
* All ranges given in the table are adjustable by

the increments shown.

window function)
outputs adjustable (N/C or N/O
function)
peak value, switch point 1, switch point 2,
display off)
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
E 18.068.2/11.13
46

requirements.
Model code:
EDS 3 3 X X X XXXX 000 X 1
1 = G1/2 B DIN-EN 837 (male)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Output
0001 (-1 .. 1); 01.0; 02.5; 06.0; 0010; 0016
Modification number
000 = Standard
E = EPDM seal (e.g.: for water, refrigerants)
1 = Stainless steel
Model code:
DESINA-compliant or
EDS 3 3 X X X XXXX D00 X 1
1 = G1/2 B DIN-EN 837 (male)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Output
0001 (-1 .. 1); 01.0; 02.5; 06.0; 0010; 0016
Modification number
1 = Stainless steel
Note:
Accessories:
Pin connections:
Dimensions:
M12x1, 4 pole
display
turns thru
270
housing
turns thru
340
hex. SW27
Pin
EDS
33X6-1
EDS
33X6-2
EDS
33X6-3
+UB
+UB
+UB
n.c.
SP 2
Analogue
0V
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
SP 1
M12x1, 5 pole
G1/2 B
DIN EN 837
flat seal ring Cu

DIN 3869
3
5

4 pole/5 pole
Pin
EDS
33X8-5
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
SP 2
M12x1, 5 pole
3
5
DESINAcompliant
Can be
connected to
DESINA
Pin
EDS
33X8-1
EDS
33X8-3
+UB
+UB
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
n.c.
Analogue


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.068.2/11.13
Note:
47
E 18.068.2/11.13
48
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3300

range.
It has a ceramic measuring cell with
thick-film strain gauge. The instrument
can have one or two switching outputs,
and there is the option of an additional
switchable analogue output signal
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V).
rotated in two planes. The unit can
MPa. The user can select the particular
measurement.
technology.
Special features:

outputs, up to 1.2 A load
per output
Accuracy 1 % FS

(4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V)
bar, psi or MPa
User-friendly due to
key programming
independently
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
-1..1; 1; 2.5; 6; 10; 16 bar
Overload pressures
3; 3; 8, 18, 30, 48 bar
Burst pressures
5; 5; 12; 30; 50; 80 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852

Torque value
20 Nm


Seal: FPM / EPDM

(as per model code)
Output data
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.25 % FS max.
Temperature drift

Signal selectable:

4 .. 20 mA load resistance max. 500 W

0 .. 10 V
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
max. 1.2 A
Switching cycles
> 100 million
Reaction time
< 10 ms
Long-term drift
-10 .. +70 C
-25 .. +80 C (-25 ... +60 C acc. to UL spec.)
-40 .. +80 C
-25 .. +80 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark1)
10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption
max. 2.455 A total


and analogue output
Display

Weight
~ 120 g

1)

E 18.369.2/11.13
Description:
49
Setting options:

pressure switches.
three buttons.

outputs:
Measuring
range
in bar
-1.. 1
0 .. 1
0 .. 2.5
0 .. 6
0 .. 10
0 .. 16
Measuring
range
in bar
- 1 .. 1
0 .. 1
0 .. 2.5
0 .. 6
0 .. 10
0 .. 16
Lower
limit of
RP / FL
in bar
-0.9 8
0.0 10
0.0 25
0.0 6
0.1 0
0.2 0
Upper limit of
SP / FH
Min. difference
betw.
RP and SP
& FL and FH
0.02
0.010
0.025
0.06
0.10
0.20
Increment*
in bar
1. 00
1. 000
2. 500
6. 00
10. 00
16. 00
in bar
0.01
0.002
0.005
0.01
0.02
0.05

shown.
SP = switch point
Model code:
EDS 3 3 X 6 X XXXX V00 X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Output
0001 (-1 .. 1 bar); 01.0; 02.5; 06.0; 0010; 0016
Modification number
F = FPM seal (e.g. for hydraulic oils)
E = EPDM seal (e.g. for water, refrigerants)
Connection material (in contact with fluid)
1 = Stainless steel
Notes:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
display
turns thru
270

window function)
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
housing
turns thru
340
hex-SW27

DIN 3869
Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole

4 pole
E 18.369.2/11.13
Pin
50
1
2
3
4
EDS
33X6-1
+UB
n.c.
0V
SP 1
EDS
33X6-2
+UB
SP 2
0V
SP 1
EDS
33X6-3
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
Note:


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3300

integrated digital display for relative
pressure measurement in the lowpressure range.
The device is equipped with a switching
output and additional output that can be
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V).
packaging industry.
Special features:
IO Link Interface
Additional signal output,
can be configured as PNP transistor
Accuracy 1 % FS
Display can be rotated in two axes for
optimal alignment
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload range
Burst pressures
Torque value
Output data
Output signals
Repeatability
Temperature drift
Analogue output
Signal
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles
Reaction time
Long term drift
Parameterisation
- mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption
Display
Weight
-1..1; 1; 2.5; 6; 10; 16 bar

3; 3; 8; 18; 30; 48 bar
5; 5; 12; 30; 50; 80 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
Seal: FPM / EPDM (as per model code)
Output 1: PNP transistor switching output
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS max.

0 .. 10 V


> 100 million
< 10 ms
-10 .. +70 C
-25 .. +80 C
-40 .. +80 C
-25 .. +80 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
10 g
50 g
IP 67
and analogue output
~ 120 g

E 18.369.1.0/11.13
Description:
51
Upper limit of
SP / FH
in bar
- 1 .. 1
-0.98
1.00
0 .. 1
0.010
1.000
0 .. 2.5
0.025
2.500
0 .. 6
0.06
6.00
0 .. 10
0.10
10.00
0 .. 16
0.20
16.00
Measuring
range
Increment*
in bar
Min. difference
betw.
RP and SP
& FL and FH
- 1 .. 1
0.02
0.01
0 .. 1
0.010
0.002
in bar
0 .. 2.5
0.025
0.005
0 .. 6
0.06
0.01
0 .. 10
0.10
0.02
0 .. 16
0.20
0.05

SP = switch point

window function)
Analogue output signal selectable to
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
Pressure can be displayed in bar, psi,
MPa.
Model code:

EDS 3 3 X 6 L XXXX 000 X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
6
Output
= IO Link Interface
L
0001 (-1 .. 1 bar); 01.0; 02.5; 06.0; 0010; 0016
Modification number
000 = Standard
1
= Stainless steel
Notes:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
42
25.5
M12x1
G1/4 DIN 3852
1
3
64
29.5
E 18.369.1.0/11.13
52
Signal
L+
I/Q
3
4
LC/Q
Description
Supply voltage
analogue output
Gnd
G1/4 A DIN 3852-E

16.1
18.9 -0.2

DIN 3869
53.5
Standard IO
I/Q
Pin
1
2
hex. SW27
IO-Link
C/Q
L-
housing turns
thru 340
2 +0.1
12
M12x1, 4 pole
40.4
display turns
thru 270
20
Pin connections:
L+
11
91.5
Lower limit of
RP / FL
in bar
75
Measuring
range
in bar
Baud rate
38.4 kBaud *
Cycle time
2.5 ms
Process data width
16 Bit
Frame type
2.2
Specification
V1.1
*C
16.1

outputs:
13

13
Setting options:
male elect. conn. M12x1

4 pole
Note:


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3100

digital display for absolute pressure
range. It has a ceramic measuring
cell with thick-film strain gauge. The
instrument can have one or two
analogue output signal (4 .. 20 mA or
0 .. 10 V).
rotated in two planes. The instrument
can be installed in almost any mounting
unit of measurement. When changing
to a different measurement unit, the
instrument automatically converts all
measurement. In addition, the EDS 3100 is
also available in a DESINA -compliant
version.
technology.
Special features:

Accuracy 1 % FS
Optional switchable
analogue output (4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V)
Optimum alignment - can be rotated
in two axes
bar, psi or MPa
User-friendly due to key programming
Switching points and switchback hystereses can be adjusted
independently
Optional Desina-compliant pin
configuration with diagnostic
function
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
1; 2.5 bar
Overload pressures
3; 8 bar
5; 12 bar
Burst pressures
G1/4 A DIN 3852

G1/2 B DIN-EN 837

Torque value
20 Nm (G1/4)

45 Nm (G1/2)


Seal: copper (G1/2) / FPM / EPDM

(as per model code)
Output data
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS max.
Repeatability
Temperature drift

Signal selectable:

4 .. 20 mA

0 .. 10 V
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
max. 1.2 A
Switching cycles
> 100 million
Reaction time
< 10 ms
Long-term drift
Function
Level
-10 .. +70 C
-25 .. +80 C (-25 .. +60 C acc. to UL spec.)
-40 .. +80 C
-25 .. +80 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark1)
10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption
max. 2.455 A total



and analogue output
Display

Weight
~ 120 g

1)

E 18.069.1/11.13
Description:
53
Setting options:

lock can be set.

outputs:
Meas.
range
in bar
Switch
point
in bar
Hysteresis
in bar
Increment*
in bar
0 .. 1
0.016 .. 1
0.006 .. 0.99
0.002
0 .. 2.5
0.04 .. 2.5
0.015 .. 2.475
0.005
Upper
switch value
in bar
Increment*
in bar
Window function
3
Meas.
range
in bar
Lower
switch value
in bar
0 .. 1
0.016 .. 0.982
0.024 .. 0.99
0.002
0 .. 2.5
0.04 .. 2.455
0.06 .. 2.475
0.005

shown.

window function)
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V

requirements.
Model code:
EDS 3 1 X X X XXXX 000 X 1
1 = G1/2 B DIN-EN 837 (male)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Output
01.0; 02.5
Modification number
000 = Standard
1 = Stainless steel
Model code:
DESINA-compliant or
EDS 3 1 X 8 X XXXX D00 X 1
1 = G1/2 B DIN-EN 837 (male)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Output
01.0; 02.5
Modification number
1 = Stainless steel
E 18.069.1/11.13
Note:
54
Accessories:
Pin connections:
Dimensions:
M12x1, 4 pole
display
turns thru
270
housing
turns thru
340
hex. SW27
EDS
31X6-1
EDS
31X6-2
EDS
31X6-3
+UB
+UB
+UB
n.c.
SP 2
Analogue
0V
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
SP 1
M12x1, 5 pole
G1/2 B
DIN EN 837
flat seal ring Cu
Pin

DIN 3869
3
5

4 pole/5 pole
Pin
EDS
31X8-5
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
SP 2
M12x1, 5 pole
3
5
DESINAcompliant
Can be
connected to
DESINA
Pin
EDS
31X8-1
EDS
31X8-3
+UB
+UB
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
n.c.
Analogue


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.069.1/11.13
Note:
55
E 18.069.1/11.13
56
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3100

digital display for absolute pressure
range.
It has a ceramic measuring cell with
thick-film strain gauge. The instrument
can have one or two switching outputs,
and there is the option of an additional
switchable analogue output signal
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V).
rotated in two planes. The unit can
measurement.
technology.
Special features:

Accuracy 1 % FS

(4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V)
bar, psi or MPa
User-friendly due to
key programming
independently
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
1; 2.5 bar
Overload pressures
3; 8 bar
Burst pressures
5; 12 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852

Torque value
20 Nm


Seal: FPM / EPDM

(as per model code)
Output data
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.25 % FS max.
Temperature drift

Signal selectable:

4 .. 20 mA

0 .. 10 V
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
max. 1.2 A
Switching cycles
> 100 million
Reaction time
< 10 ms
Long-term drift
-10 .. +70 C
-25 .. +80 C (-25 .. +60 C acc. to UL spec.)
-40 .. +80 C
-25 .. +80 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark1)
10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption
max. 2.455 A total


and analogue output
Display

Weight
~ 120 g

1)

E 18.370.1/11.13
Description:
57
Setting options:

pressure switches.
three buttons.

outputs:
Measuring
range
Upper limit of
SP / FH
in bar
Lower
limit of
RP / FL
in bar
0 .. 1
0.010
1.000
0 .. 2.5
0.025
2.500
Measuring
range
Min. difference
betw.
RP and SP
& FL and FH
Increment*
0 .. 1
0.010
0.002
0 .. 2.5
0.025
0.005
in bar
in bar
in bar

are adjustable by the increments shown.
SP = switch point
Model code:
EDS 3 1 X 6 X XXXX V00 X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Output
01.0; 02.5
Modification number
1 = Stainless steel
Notes:
Accessories:
Dimensions:

window function)
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
display
turns thru
270
housing
turns thru
340
Pin connections:
hex-SW27
M12x1, 4 pole
E 18.370.1/11.13

DIN 3869
58
Pin
EDS
31X6-1
EDS
31X6-2
EDS
31X6-3
+UB
+UB
+UB
n.c.
SP 2
Analogue
0V
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
SP 1

4 pole
Note:


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3100

integrated digital display for absolute
pressure measurement in the lowpressure range.
The instrument is equipped with a
switching output and additional output
that can be configured as switching or
analogue (4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V).
packaging industry.
Special features:
IO Link Interface
Accuracy 1 % FS
Can be rotated in two axes for optimal
alignment
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
Torque value
Output data
Output signals
Repeatability
Temperature drift
Analogue output
Signal
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles
Reaction time
Long term drift
Parameterisation
- mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption
Display
Weight
1; 2.5 bar
3; 8 bar
5; 12 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS max.

0 .. 10 V


> 100 million
< 10 ms
-10 .. +70 C
-25 .. +80 C
-40 .. +80 C
-25 .. +80 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
10 g
50 g
IP 67
and analogue output
~ 120 g

E 18.370.1.0/11.13
Description:
59
Setting options:


outputs:
Measuring
range
in bar
Lower limit of
RP / FL
in bar
Upper limit of
SP / FH
in bar
0 .. 1
0.010
1.000
0 .. 2.5
0.025
2.500
Measuring
range
Increment*
in bar
Min. difference
betw.
RP and SP
& FL and FH
0 .. 1
0.010
0.002
0 .. 2.5
0.025
0.005
in bar

SP = switch point

window function)
Analogue output signal selectable:
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
Pressure can be displayed in bar, psi,
MPa.
Baud rate
38.4 kBaud *
Cycle time
2.5 ms
Process data width
16 Bit
Frame type
2.2
Specification
V1.1
*C
Model code:

EDS 3 1 X 6 L XXXX 000 X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
9
= Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
6
Output
L
= IO Link Interface
01.0; 02.5
Modification number
000 = Standard
1
= Stainless steel
Notes:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
Pin connections:
42
25.5
M12x1
11
16
91.5
20
L-
Standard IO
75
C/Q
64
12
I/Q
Pin
1
2
Signal
L+
I/Q
3
4
LC/Q
housing turns
thru 340
2 +0.1
G1/4 DIN 3852
IO-Link
display turns
thru 270
13
L+
13
M12x1, 4 pole
40.4
Description
Supply voltage
analogue output
Gnd
hex. SW27
29.5
G1/4 A DIN 3852-E

16.1
18.9 -0.2

DIN 3869
53.5

4 pole
E 18.370.1.0/11.13
Note:
60


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 300
The EDS 300 is a compact, electronic

pressure switch with integral digital
display.
Four different output models are
available: with one switching point, with
two switching points and both models
can also have an additional analogue
output signal 4 .. 20 mA.
The switching points and the associated
hystereses can be adjusted using the
keypad. For optimum adaptation to a
particular application, the instrument
has many additional adjustment
parameters, e.g. switching delay times,
N/O / N/C function of the outputs.
EDS300 are to indicate pressures and
limits in hydraulics and pneumatics
and anywhere where high switching
frequency or constant switching
accuracy would overburden a
mechanical pressure switch. The unit is
ideal for building accumulator charging
circuits or pump and compressor
controls.
Special features:
Integrated pressure sensor

with thin-film strain gauge on
stainless steel membrane
Compact, robust construction
Accuracy 1 % FS
Easy to operate thanks to
key programming
independently
Window function
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
Torque value

Output data
Max. setting
Repeatability
Temperature drift

Signal
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles
Reaction time
Compensation temperature range
mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption
Display

Weight
16; 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar

32; 80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
200; 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
Seal: FPM
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
0.5 % FS max.
4 .. 20 mA
load resistance 400 W

max. 1.2 A per switch output
> 100 million
approx. 10 ms
-10 .. +70 C
-25 .. +80 C
-40 .. +80 C
-25 .. +80 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
10 g
50 g
IP 65
20 .. 32 V DC
approx. 100 mA (inactive switch output)
height of digits 9.2 mm
~ 300 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit


E 18.056.6/11.13
Description:
61
Setting options:

lock can be set.

outputs:
Meas.
range
in bar
in bar
Increment*
in bar
0.3 .. 16
0.1 .. 15.8
0.1
0 .. 40
0.6 .. 40
0.2 .. 39.6
0.2
0 .. 100
1.5 .. 100
0.5 .. 99.0
0.5
0 .. 250
3.0 .. 250
1.0 .. 248
1.0
0 .. 400
6.0 .. 400
2.0 .. 396
2.0
0 .. 600
15.0 .. 600
5.0 .. 590
5.0
0 .. 16
Switch
point
in bar
Hysteresis
Window function
Meas.
range
Lower
switch value
in bar
in bar
0 .. 16
0.2 .. 15.9
Upper
switch
value
in bar
0.3 .. 16
Increment*
in bar
0.1
0 .. 40
0.4 .. 39.8
0.6 .. 40
0.2
0 .. 100
1.0 .. 99.5
1.5 .. 100
0.5
0 .. 250
2.0 .. 249.0
3.0 .. 250
1.0
0 .. 400
4.0 .. 398.0
6.0 .. 400
2.0
0 .. 600
10.0 .. 595.0
15.0 .. 600
5.0

shown.
E 18.056.6/11.13

window function)
function)
4 .. 20 mA
Subsequent correction of zero point in
the range 3 % FS possible
62
Model code:
EDS 3 4 X X XXX 000
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
4 = Male 4 pole Binder series 714 M18
only possible on output models "2" and "3"
5 = Male 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Output
only in conjunction with electrical connection type "5" or "6"
only in conjunction with electrical connection "4" or "6"
only in conjunction with electrical connection type "4" or "6"
016; 040; 100; 250; 400; 600
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Special models on request.
Accessories:
Pin connections:
Dimensions:
male electrical connection

profile
gasket
Pin
EDS 344-2
EDS 344-3
+UB
+UB
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
SP 2
Analogue
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
Pin
EDS 345-1
+UB
0V
SP 1
Housing
M12x1, 4 pole
Pin
EDS
346-1
EDS
346-2
EDS
346-3
+UB
+UB
+UB
n.c.
SP 2
Analogue
0V
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
SP 1
M12x1, 5 pole
4
3
5
Note:


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Pin
EDS 348-5
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
SP 2
E 18.056.6/11.13
63
E 18.056.6/11.13
64
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 300
The EDS 300 is a compact, electronic

pressure switch with digital display. The
pressure measurement is based on a
strain gauge sensor cell in stainless
steel. All parts in contact with the
medium are in stainless steel, and are
welded together. Since no seals are
required in the sensor interior, leakage
is eliminated.
Two relay switch outputs with N/O
function and an additional analogue
output signal (4 .. 20 mA) enable the
pressure switch to be incorporated into
modern controls.
The switch points and the
corresponding hystereses can easily be
adjusted via the keypad.
For optimum adaptation to a particular
application, the instrument has many
additional setting parameters, e.g.
switching direction of the relays or
switching delay times.
Areas of application are pressure or limit
monitoring on marine transmissions,
diesel engines, pumps and general
hydraulic and pneumatic systems.
Approvals:
American Bureau
of Shipping

Lloyds Register
of Shipping
Det Norske Veritas

Germanischer Lloyd
Bureau Veritas
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
Torque value

Output data
Max. setting
Repeatability
Temperature drift

Analogue output
Signal
Switch outputs
Type
Switching voltage
Switching current
Switching capacity

Switching cycles

Reaction time
mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption
Display

Weight
-1..5; 6; 16; 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar

15; 15; 32; 80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
100; 100; 200; 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852

20 Nm
Seal: FPM
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
0.5 % FS max.
4 .. 20 mA
load resistance 400 W
relay contacts (N/O)

max. 60 V AC / DC
max. 1 A per switch output
max. 30 W / 30 VA
(for inductive load, use varistors)
20 million at minimum load
0.5 million at maximum load
approx. 10 ms
-10 .. +70 C
-25 .. +80 C
-40 .. +80 C
-25 .. +80 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
5 .. 25 Hz: 3.2 mm
25 .. 500 Hz: 4 g
50 g
IP 65
20 .. 32 V DC
approx. 100 mA (inactive switch output)
~ 300 g


E 18.058.5/11.13
Description:
65
Setting options:
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)

outputs:
7 = Male 6 pole + PE, DIN 43651
(connector ZBE 10 not supplied)
Model code:

lock can be set.
Meas.
range
in bar
Switch
point
in bar
Hysteresis
in bar
Increment*
in bar
-1 .. 5
-0.85 .. 5
-0.95 .. 4.9
0.05
0 .. 6
0.15 .. 6
0.05 .. 5.9
0.05
0 .. 16
0.3 .. 16
0.1 .. 15.8 0.1
0 .. 40
0.6 .. 40
0.2 .. 39.6 0.2
0 .. 100
1.5 .. 100
0.5 .. 99.0 0.5
0 .. 250
3.0 .. 250
1.0 .. 248
1.0
0 .. 400
6.0 .. 400
2.0 .. 396
2.0
0 .. 600 15.0 .. 600 5.0 .. 590 5.0

shown.
Scale of the display range

adjustable (bar or psi)
Switching direction of the relays
adjustable (N/C or N/O function)
Subsequent correction of zero point in
the range 3 % FS possible
EDS 3 4 7 4 XXX SXX
Output
4 = 2 switch outputs and 1 analogue output
006; 016; 040; 100; 250; 400; 600
Modification number
S00 = Version in bar (except -1 .. 5)
S13 = Vacuum version -1 .. 5 bar (in conjunction with pressure range 006)
Notes:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, clamps
for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
Dimensions:
Male connection
DIN 43651
6p +PE
Pin connections:
DIN 43651
hex. SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
Pin
EDS 347-4
+UB
Centre relay 1 and 2
Relay contact 1 (SP 1)
0V
Analogue
Relay contact 2 (SP 2)
Housing
E 18.058.5/11.13
Note:
66


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 8000
EDS 8000 is an electronic pressure

switch in compact design which is
simple to adjust.
Models with one or two transistor switch
outputs (PNP or NPN) are available.
The switch points are set using the
two keys and a four-digit display.
During operation the switch position
is indicated by either a red or a green
backlight in the display.
For optimum adaptation to a particular
additional adjustment parameters,
e.g. switching delay times, N/O / N/C
function of the outputs.
EDS 8000 is available in various
pressure ranges between 0 .. 25 bar
and 0 .. 600 bar.
The main applications of the EDS8000
are to indicate pressures and limits
in hydraulics and pneumatics, or any
application where high switching
frequency or consistent switching
accuracy would overburden a
mechanical pressure switch.
Special features:

1 or 2 PNP transistor
switching outputs
Robust stainless steel measurement
cell
Accuracy class 1 % FS

4-digit display
Multi-colour switch display
Protection class IP 67
Simple operation with key
programming
Technical data:
Input data
Measurement range
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
Torque value

Output data
Max. setting
(display)
Repeatability
Temperature drift (environment)

Long-term stability
Switch outputs
Type

Switching current
Switching cycles
Reaction time
Ambient temperature range1)
Nominal temperature range of display
(read-out)
mark
-mark2)
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage

Current consumption

Display

Life expectancy
Weight
Note:

25; 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar

80; 80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
200; 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G A DIN 3852; Form E
20 Nm
Mech. conn.:
Stainless steel
Sensor cell:
Thin-film strain gauge
Seal:
FPM
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
0.5 % FS max.
0.25 % FS / year max.
1 or 2 transistor switching outputs
PNP or NPN
> 100 million
< 10 ms
-25 .. + 85 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 C +100 C
-40 .. + 85 C
-40 .. +125 C / -25 .. +125 C
-15 .. 70 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
approx. 10 g
approx. 50 g
IP 67 (when an IP 67 connector is used)
9.6 .. 32 V DC
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
max. 0.535 A total
max. 35 mA (with inactive switch output)
4-digit, LED, 7 segment,
> 10 million cycles (0 .. 100 %)
~ 70 g

1)
2)
E 18.365.2/11.13
Description:
67
Setting options:
All the terms and symbols used for setting

the EDS 8000 as well as menu structure
comply with the specifications of the
German Engineering Federation Standard
(VDMA 24574-1) for pressure switches.
The EDS 8000 is easy and convenient to set
up using the two buttons.

outputs:
Meas.
range
in bar
Lower
limit of
RP / FL
in bar
Upper
limit of
SP / FH
in bar
0 .. 25
0.25
25.00
0 .. 40
0.4
40.0
0 .. 100
1.0
100.0
0 .. 250
2.5
250.0
0 .. 400
400
0 .. 600
600
Meas.
range
in bar
Min. difference
betw. RP & SP
and FL & FH
Increment*
in bar
0 .. 25
0.25
0.05
0 .. 40
0.4
0.1
0 .. 100
1.0
0.2
0 .. 250
2.5
0.5
0 .. 400
0 .. 600
Model code:
EDS 8 4 4 6 - X - XXXX X00
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Output
0025; 0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Modification number
000 = Standard
N00 = Version with NPN switching outputs
Note:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, etc, can
be found in the Accessories brochure.
Dimensions:

SP = Switching point
RP = Switch-back point
FL = Pressure window lower value
FH = Pressure window upper value
male electr. conn. M12x1,

4 pole

window function)
function)
bar, psi, MPa
orifice
Pin connections:
E 18.365.2/11.13
M12x1, 4 pole
68
Pin
EDS 8446-1
EDS 8446-2
+UB
+UB
n.c.
SP 2
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
Note:


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 601
The EDS 601 is an electronic twoway pressure switch with display and
analogue output.
Its digitally adjustable switching points
and switching hystereses, make it
ideally suited to applications which
require frequent change-overs or
accurate switch point setting.
The variety of setting parameters
ensures versatility for use in all control
and monitoring tasks in hydraulics,
pneumatics, process control and
general test and control technology.
Special features:
Two-channel pressure switch with

change-over contacts
Accuracy 1 % FS

4-digit LED display

Signal output 4 .. 20 mA or
0 .. 10 V selectable
Can be installed as a pressure gauge
or as a front panel mounted unit
Digitally adjustable parameters
Optional permanent display of the

switching point or of the pressure
peak value
Can be set to display values in
any unit of measurement e.g.: kN, kg,
psi, ...
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
16; 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
Overload pressures
24; 60; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
Burst pressures
200; 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
Threaded port G1/4 DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm
Output data
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.5 % FS max.
Temperature drift

Signal selectable:

4 .. 20 mA
ohmic resistance 400 W

0 .. 10 V
ohmic resistance 2 kW
Switch outputs
Type
2 relay outputs with change-over contacts
Switching voltage
max. 250 V
Switching current
Switching capacity
max. 50 W / 400 VA
Switching cycles
10 million without load

1 million with load
approx. 10 ms including electronics
Reaction time
-10 .. +70 C
-25 .. +70 C
-25 .. +80 C
-25 .. +80 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
25 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)

Shock resistance to
100 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
IP 65
Other data
Supply voltage
20 .. 32 V DC
Current consumption
approx. 120 mA
approx. 1.5 A (100 ms)
Switch-on current
Display

Connection supply voltage /
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) / ISO 4400
analogue output
(3 pole + PE)
Connection relay outputs
DIN 43651

(6 pole + PE)
Housing material
aluminium, anodised
Weight
~ 300 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override


FS (Full Scale) = relative to the full measuring range
E 18.052.6/11.13
Description:
69
Setting options:
The EDS 601 combines a multitude of

functions with easy operation so that
frequently-used parameters can be
changed quickly.
Pin connections:
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
(voltage supply / analogue output)
Switch point settings:

Switching point relay 1 and 2
(1 % .. 100 % FS)
Switching hysteresis 1 and 2
(0.5 % .. 99 % FS)
Basic settings:
Switching direction relay 1 and 2
(pull-in/release)
Switching delay relay 1 and 2
(0.00 .. 90 seconds)
Switch-off delay relay 1 and 2
(0.00 .. 90 seconds)
Primary display
(pressure / switch point / peak value)
Display filter (slow / medium / fast)
Output signal (current / voltage)
Measuring range setting:
Number of decimal places
(0 .. 3; 4 digits in total)

Lower measuring range limit
(-995 .. 9995)

Upper measuring range limit
(-995 .. 9995)
Calibration options:
Zero point of internal sensor

Final value of internal sensor

Zero point voltage output
(approx. 0 .. 3 V)
Final value voltage output
(approx. 3.5 .. 10 V)
Zero point current output
(approx. 0 .. 7 mA)

Final value current output
(approx. 7.5 .. 24 mA)
Model code:
EDS 6 0 1 XXX 000
016; 040; 100; 250; 400; 600
Modification number
000 = Standard
Pin
1
+UB
0V
Analogue
Housing
DIN 43651 (relay outputs)
Note:
On instruments with a different
modification number, please read the
label or the technical amendment details
supplied with the instrument.
Accessories:
Female electrical connectors
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) and
DIN 43651 are supplied with the unit.
Additional accessories, such as
mechanical adapters, installation kits,
etc. can be found in the Accessories
brochure.
Pin
1
Relay 1 N/C
Relay 1 N/O
Centre relay 1
Relay 2 N/C
Relay 2 N/O
Centre relay 2
PE
Housing
Dimensions:
G1/4 DIN 3852 female

connector DIN 43650 3 pole+PE/ PG 9
connector DIN 43651 7 pole+PE/ PG 11
(without 7 pole female connector)
E 18.052.6/11.13
Note:
70


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 1700
With its integrated pressure

measurement cell, 4-digit display and
4 switching outputs, the EDS 1700
offers the user all the advantages of a
modern electronic pressure switch.
4 switching points and switch-back
points can be adjusted very simply and
independently of one another using the
keypad.
For optimum integration in monitoring
systems (e.g. with PLC), an analogue
output (4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10V) is also
available.
The main areas of application of the
EDS 1700 are in hydraulics and
pneumatics. The instrument is ideal for
use where frequent switching cycles
(several million), stable switching
point accuracy or simple and precise
adjustability are required.
Special features:
Integrated pressure sensor with

strain gauge on stainless steel
membrane

Accuracy 0.5 % or 1 % FS

Simple operation via key
programming
4 limit relays, switching points and
switch back points can be adjusted
independently
Optional mounting position
(pressure connection on the top/
bottom, keypad and display can be
turned through 180)
Can be set to display values in
any unit of measurement e.g.: kN, kg,
psi, ...
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
16; 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
Overload pressures
32; 80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
Burst pressures
200; 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
Threaded port G1/4 DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm
Output data
EDS 1700-P: 0.5 % FS max.
Max. setting
EDS 1700-N: 1 % FS max.
Repeatability
EDS 1700-P: 0.25 % FS max.

EDS 1700-N: 0.5 % FS max.
Temperature drift EDS 1700-P
0.02 % FS / C max. zero point & range
Temperature drift EDS 1700-N
0.03 % FS / C max. zero point & range
Analogue output
Signal (selectable)
4 .. 20 mA
ohmic resistance 400W

0 .. 10 V
ohmic resistance 2 kW
Switch outputs
Type
4 relays with change-over contacts
(2 groups, common supply of each group
connected)
Switching voltage
0.1 .. 250 V AC / DC
Switching current
0.009 .. 2 A per switch output
Switching capacity
max. 50 W / 400 VA

Switching cycles
20 million at minimum load

1 million at maximum load
Reaction time
approx. 20 ms
-10 .. +70 C
-25 .. +60 C
-40 .. +80 C
-25 .. +80 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
5g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
Shock resistance to
10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
IP 65
Other data
Supply voltage
22 .. 32 V DC
Current consumption
approx. 200 mA
10 %
Display

14-pole, terminal block
Housing material
aluminium, anodised
Weight
~ 800 g


E 18.055.5/11.13
Description:
71
Setting options:
The core of the unit is a microprocessor

which provides many useful extra functions
in addition to normal pressure switch
operation. It is possible, for example, to
activate switching delay times to prevent
fast pressure peaks from triggering an
unwanted switching cycle. All settings are
made using the keypad.
Setting ranges of the

switching points:
Switching point relay 1 to 4:

1.5 % .. 100 % FS
Switch-back relay 1 to 4:
1 % .. 99 % FS
or alternatively
switch-back hysteresis 1 to 4:
1 % .. 99 % FS
Note: FS (Full Scale) =
relative to the full measurement range
Additional setting options:
Switching direction of the relays 1 to 4

(N/C or N/O)
Switch-on delay relays 1 to 4 in the
range 0.00 .. 90 seconds
Switch-off delay relays 1 to 4 in the
range 0.00 .. 90 seconds
Switch-back mode (either switch-back
point or switch-back hysteresis)
Display of the actual pressure, a
switching point or of the peak value
Display filter (slow / medium / fast)
Display range scale individually
adaptable (bar, psi, user-selectable)
Measurement unit (bar, psi) is displayed
Analogue output (4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V)
Programming disable
Model code:
EDS 1 7 9 X X XXX 000
9 = Threaded port G1/4 DIN 3852
Display
1 = 4-digit bar
2 = 4-digit psi
Accuracy
P = 0.5 %
N = 1 %
016; 040; 100; 250; 400; 600
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as mechanical adapters etc. can be found in the
Dimensions:
Terminal assignment:
Cable gland PG 11
Pin
1
+UB
0V
Analogue output Signal +
Analogue output Signal - (0 V)
Relay 1 N/C
Relay 1 N/O
Relay 2 N/C
Relay 2 N/O
10
Relay 3 N/C
11
Relay 3 N/O
12
13
Relay 4 N/C
14
Relay 4 N/O
G1/4 DIN3852 female

countersink to DIN 74-KM5
E 18.055.5/11.13
Note:
72


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 4400
Programmable
The programmable electronic pressure

switch in the series EDS 4400 has been
specially developed to combine the
advantages of a compact, robust and
cost-effective device with the benefits of
a programmable pressure switch.
The EDS 4400 can be easily
programmed using the HPG 3000
programming unit.
Once the programming unit is
disconnected from the EDS 4400, the
pressure switch retains all the settings.
This prevents unauthorised or incorrect
adjustment of the settings.
The following parameters can be
changed:

Switching point

Hysteresis

Switching direction (N/O / N/C)
Switching delay times
The EDS 4400 is suitable for highpressure applications (starting at
40 bar) and has a pressure
In contrast to pressure switches
which are factory-set according to
customer requirements and are not
field-adjustable, the programmable
EDS 4400 is highly versatile and
replaces a wide range of models. This
is advantageous in respect of stock
management.
Special features:

Option of 1 or 2 switching outputs
Option of PNP or NPN switching

outputs

High switching output capacity

Accuracy 1 % FS
Flexible user-programming
Compact and robust design
Also available in ATEX version for
potentially explosive locations
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
Overload pressures
80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
Burst pressures
200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm

Seal: FPM
Output data
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
0.1 % FS max.
Repeatability
Temperature drift

Switch output
1 or 2 transistor switch outputs

PNP or NPN

N/C or N/O
Output load
PNP:

max. 1.2 A with 1 switching output

max. 1 A each with 2 switching outputs
NPN:


max. 0.3 A each with 2 switching outputs
Switching points / Hysteresis
user-programmable with HYDAC

Programming Unit HPG 3000
Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 8 ms to 2000 ms;

User-programmable with

HYDAC Programming Unit HPG 3000
Long-term drift
-25 .. +85 C
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C/ -25 .. +100 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark2)
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
100 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
IP 67 ( M12x1, when an
Other data
Supply voltage

8 .. 32 V DC
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption

1.225 A with 1 switching output

2.025 A with 2 switching outputs
5%
Life expectancy
Weight
~ 145 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and


1)

2)

E 18.067.2/11.13
Description:
73
Setting options:
In conjunction with the HYDAC

Programming Unit HPG 3000, all the
settings are combined in an easy-to-follow
menu.

outputs:
Measuring range
in bar
Increment
in bar
0 .. 40
0.1
0 .. 100
0.2
0 .. 250
0.5
0 .. 400
0 .. 600
The switch point (upper switch value)

on all instruments is between
5 % and 100 % of the measuring range
and the switch-back point (lower
switch value) is between 1 % and 96 %
of the measuring range.
Minimum
value
in ms
Maximum
value
in ms
Switch-on
delay
Ton1/Ton2
2040
Switch-off
delay
ToF1/ToF2
2040
Model code:
EDS 4 4 4 8 XXXX X P X 000
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Output technology
P = Programmable switching output
Output technology 2
P = PNP switching output
N = NPN switching output
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
The increment for all instruments is

8 ms.
Pin connections:
Dimensions:
M12x1, 5 pole
Programming Unit:
(must be ordered separately)
male electr. conn.

5 pole
4
HPG 3000 000

Portable Programming Unit
Part. No. 909422
3
5
Pin
Process
connection
HPG
connection
+UB
+UB
Out 2
n.c.
0V
0V
Out 1
n.c.
n.c.
Comport
hex. SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
female electr. conn.

5 pole
E 18.067.2/11.13
Note:
74


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 4300
Programmable

switch in the series EDS 4300 was
specially developed to combine the
advantages of a compact, robust and
cost-effective instrument with the
benefits of a programmable pressure
switch.
The EDS 4300 can be easily
programmed using the HPG 3000
programming unit.
Once the programming unit is
disconnected from the EDS 4300, the
pressure switch retains all the settings.
This prevents unauthorised or incorrect
adjustment of the settings.
changed:

Switching point

Hysteresis

Switching direction (N/O / N/C)
Switching delay times
The EDS 4300 is suitable for low
pressure applications (up to 16 bar) and
has a pressure measurement cell with
thick-film strain gauge on a ceramic
membrane.
In contrast to pressure switches which
are factory-set according to customer
requirements and not field-adjustable,
the programmable EDS 4300 is highly
versatile and replaces a wide range of
models. This is advantageous in respect
of stock management.
Special features:

Option of 1 or 2 switching outputs

Option of PNP or NPN switching
outputs

High switching output capacity

Accuracy 1 % FS
Flexible user-programming
Compact and robust design
Also available in ATEX version for
potentially explosive locations
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
1; 2.5; 6; 10; 16 bar

-1 .. 1; -1 .. 9 bar
Overload pressures
3; 8; 20; 32; 50 bar

3; 32 bar
Burst pressures
5; 12; 30; 48; 75 bar

5, 48 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
Torque value


Output data
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.1 % FS max.
Temperature drift

Switch output
1 or 2 transistor switch outputs

PNP or NPN

N/C or N/O
Output load
PNP:


max. 1 A each with 2 switching outputs
NPN:

max. 0.5 A on version with 1 switching output

max. 0.3 A each on version with 2 switching outputs
Switching points / Hysteresis

Rising switch point and falling switch point delay
8 ms to 2000 ms;

Freely programmable with

Long-term drift
-25 .. +85 C
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark2)
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz

Shock resistance to
100 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
IP 67 ( M12x1, when an IP 67 connector is
used)
Other data
Supply voltage

8 .. 32 V DC
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption


5%
Life expectancy
Weight
~ 145 g


1)

2)

E 18.070.0/11.13
Description:
75
Setting options:

menu.

outputs:
Measuring
range in bar
Increment
in bar
-1 .. 1
0.01
0 .. 1
0.002
0 .. 2.5
0.005
0 .. 6
0.01
-1 .. 9
0.02
0 .. 10
0.02
0 .. 16
0.05

Minimum value
in ms
Maximum value
in ms
Switch-on
delay
Ton1/Ton2
2040
Switch-off
delay
ToF1/ToF2
2040
The increment for all instruments is

8 ms.
Pin connections:
EDS 4 3 4 8 XXXX X P X 000 X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
01.0; 02.5; 06.0; 0010; 0016
0001(-1 .. 1); 0009(-1 .. 9)
Output technology
P = Programmable switching output
Output technology 2
P = PNP switching output
N = NPN switching output
Modification number
000 = Standard
E = EPDM seal (e.g.: for water or refrigerants)
1 = Stainless steel
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
M12x1, 5 pole
4
Model code:
Programming Unit:
male electr. conn.

5 pole
HPG 3000 000

Part. No. 909422
5
1
Pin
Process
connection
HPG
connection
+UB
+UB
Out 2
n.c.
0V
0V
Out 1
n.c.
n.c.
Comport
hex. SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
female electr. conn.

5 pole
E 18.070.0/11.13
Note:
76


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 820
EDS 820 with IO-Link communication

interface is a compact electronic
pressure switch for relative pressure
range.
The device has two PNP transistor
switch outputs, one of which can serve
as the IO communication output.
packaging industry.
Special features:
IO-Link interface or PNP transistor

switch output
1 additional PNP transistor switching
output
Accuracy 1.0 % FS
Status LED display for active switch
outputs
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload range
Burst pressures
Torque value
Output data
Output signals
Max. setting
Repeatability
Temperature drift
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles
Reaction time
Long term drift
Parameterisation
Operating temperature range 1)
Fluid temperature range 1)
- mark
Vibration resistance acc. to
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 0 .. 500 Hz
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
25; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar

50; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
100; 200; 300; 500; 1250; 2000; 2000 bar
G A DIN 3852 with 0.5 mm orifice
20 Nm
Seal: FPM
Pin 4: IO Link interface or

user-configurable switching output
Pin 2: user-configurable switching output
0.5 % FS typ.
1.0 % FS max.
0.1 % FS max.
> 100 million
< 10 ms
programming device HPG 3000
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +125 C / -25 .. +125 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
25 g
50 g
IP 67 (M12x1 male connection, for use with
an IP 67 connector)
10 .. 32 V DC
5%
Current consumption

0.275 A with 1 active switching output
0.525 A with 2 active switching outputs
Weight
~ 65 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage,

override and short circuit protection are provided.
1)
-25 C for EPM seal, -40 C on request

E 18.070.1.0/11.13
Description:
77
Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole
L+
2
1
3
IO-Link
C/Q
L-
Standard IO
Baud rate
38.4 kBaud *
Cycle time
2.5 ms
Process data width
16 Bit
Frame type
2.2
Specification
V1.1
*C
I/Q
Pin
1
2
Signal
L+
I/Q
3
4
LC/Q
Description
Supply voltage
analogue output
Gnd
Status LEDs:
The pressure switch has 3 status LEDs on

the electrical connection:
2 LEDs (yellow) for the switching statuses
of SP1 and SP2 and 1 LED (green) for the
operating status
M12x1
connection
SP 2
Model code:

EDS 8 2 4 XXXX L 000
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
0025; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Output
L
= IO Link Interface
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, can be found
Dimensions:
SP 1
25.9 0.30
male elect. conn. M12x1, 4 pole
Yellow
Switching output 2 active

(high)
LED 3
(Com)
Green,
Supply voltage OK
permanent switch in SIO mode
Supply voltage OK
switch in IO-Link mode
12
Green,
flashing
29.5
LED 2
(SP 2)
4.1
Switching output 1 active

(high)
2.5
Yellow
(max. 45 +0.3)
LED 1
(SP 1)
11.4
Com
seal ring DIN3869-14-FPM
hex. SW27
G1/4 A
orifice 0.5
18.9 -0.2
23.5 -0.1
29.4 -0.1
E 18.070.1.0/11.13
Note:
78


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.070.1.0/11.13
79
Pressure sensors with flush membranes

Depending on the application and the medium used, it is not always
possible to use standard pressure connections.
This is the case, for example, with media which can cause the standard
pressure connection to become blocked, clogged or frozen, or for
applications where the medium changes frequently and residues can
result in mixing or contamination of the media.
For such applications, HYDAC ELECTRONIC provides pressure sensors
with flush membranes. On these, the pressure connection is closed off at
the end with a flush-fitting, fully-welded stainless steel membrane and is
filled internally with a special pressure transfer fluid. The process pressure
being measured is transmitted hydrostatically to the sensor cell via the
transfer pressure fluid.
Electronic pressure transmitters with flush membrane:
Page
HDA 4700 81
HDA 4400 83
HDA 4300 85
HDA 7400 87
Electronic pressure switches with flush membrane:
Page
EDS 3400 89
EDS 3300 93
You can find more sensors with flush membranes for special applications
in the Section on "Sensors for potentially explosive atmospheres".
E 180.000.2/11.13
80
Electronic
HDA 4700
with Flush Membrane
Pressure transmitter HDA 4700 with

a flush membrane was designed
specifically for applications in which a
standard pressure connection could
become blocked, clogged or frozen by
the particular medium used. Further
applications include processes where
the medium changes regularly and
any residues could cause mixing or
contamination of the media.
Like the standard model, the HDA 4700
with flush membrane has a stainless
steel measurement cell with a thin
film strain gauge for relative pressure
measurement in the high pressure
range.
The pressure connection is achieved
with a fully-sealed stainless steel
front membrane filled internally with
a pressure transfer fluid. The process
pressure is transmitted hydrostatically
to the measurement cell via the
pressure transfer fluid.
The 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V enable
connection to all HYDAC measurement
and control devices as well as
connection to standard evaluation
systems (e.g PLC controls).
Special features:
Pressure connection has a flush

membrane
Small, compact design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
Overload pressures
80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 900 bar
200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
Burst pressures 1)
G1/2 A DIN 3852

G1/2 with add. front O-ring seal


and cooling section
Silicone-free oil
Pressure transfer fluid
45 Nm
Torque value
Parts in contact with medium 2)
Mech. conn.:
Stainless steel

Seal: FPM

O-ring:
FPM
Output data
RLmax.= (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [k]

0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor
RLmin.= 2 k
0.25 % FS typ.
Max. setting
0.5 % FS max.
0.15 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L)
0.25 % FS max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
Over range
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.05 % FS max.
Rise time
1 ms
Long-term drift
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C

-40 .. +150 C / -25 .. +150 C for G1/2

with cooling section
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark 4)
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for EN175301-803 (DIN 43650))


IP 67 female connector is used)
Other data
Supply voltage
8 .. 30 V DC
2 conductor

12 .. 30 V DC
3 conductor

9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
Current consumption
25 mA
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles (0 .. 100 % FS)
Weight
~ 150 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are provided.

FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range, B.F.S.L. = Best Fit Straight Line
1)
G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal max. 1500 bar

2)
Other seal materials on request

3)

4)

Environmental conditions according to 1.4.2 UL 61010-1; C22.2 No. 61010-1
E 18.374.1/11.13
Description:
81
Pin connections:
Model code:
HDA 4 7 Z X X XXXX XXX 000
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Mechanical process connection

Z = Flush membrane
(female connector supplied)
(female connector not supplied)
Signal
Pin
HDA 47Z5-A
Signal+
+UB

0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Housing
Housing
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
G02 = G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal
G12 = G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal and cooling section
HDA 47Z5-B
M12x1
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories such as female electrical connectors can be found in the
Pin
HDA 47Z6-A
HDA 47Z6-B
Signal+
+UB
n.c.
n.c.
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Dimensions:
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4p / 5p
hex-SW27
[G01]
elastomer profile
seal ring
DIN 3869
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN 3869
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN 3869
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
O-ring 15 x 2
E 18.374.1/11.13
O-ring 15 x 2
82
[G02]
[G12]
Note:

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 4400
with Flush Membrane

the medium changes frequently and
range.
0 .. 10 V enable connection to all
HYDAC measurement and control
devices as well as connection to
standard evaluation systems (e.g PLC
controls).
Special features:

membrane
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
Overload pressures
80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 900 bar
200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
Burst pressures 1)
G1/2 A DIN 3852

G1/2 with addit. front O-ring seal

G1/4 with addit. front O-ring seal

G1/2 with add. front O-ring seal and cooling section
Silicone-free oil
Torque value
45 Nm for G1/2, G1/2 A

20 Nm for G1/4
Mech. conn.:
Stainless steel

Seal: FPM

O-ring:
FPM
Output data
RLmax.= (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]

RLmin.= 2 kW
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L)
0.5 % FS max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
Over range
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.4 % FS max.
0.1 % FS max.
Repeatability
Rise time
1 ms
Long-term drift
Compensation temperature range
-25 .. +85 C
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C

-40 .. +150 C / -25 .. +150 C for G1/2

mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark 4)
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for EN175301-803 (DIN 43650))

IP 67 (for M12x1, providing an

Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
Current consumption
25 mA
Life expectancy
Weight
~ 150 g


1)

2)

3)

4)

E 18.375.1/11.13
Description:
83
Model code:

Z = Flush membrane
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories such as female electrical connectors can be found
Dimensions:
Pin connections:
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
HDA 44Z5-A
HDA 44Z5-B
Signal+
+UB
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Housing
Housing
M12x1
Pin
HDA 44Z6-A
HDA 44Z6-B
Signal+
+UB
n.c.
n.c.
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
profile seal
ring
male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4p / 5p
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN 3869
[G01]
[G02]
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN 3869
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
O-ring 15 x 2
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN 3869
11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5
19.5
8
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN 3869

18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
O-ring 15 x 2
Note:

E 18.375.1/11.13
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78
84
[G04]
18.9
29.5
10.9
G1/4A
[G12]

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 4300
with Flush Membrane

Like the standard model, the
HDA 4300 with a flush membrane has a
ceramic measurement cell with a thick
measurement in the low pressure
range.
The 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V enable
connection to all HYDAC measurement
systems (e.g PLC controls).
Special features:

membrane
Very compact design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
-1..1; -1..9; 1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25 bar
Overload pressures
3; 32; 3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80 bar
Burst pressures
5; 48; 5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852



Silicone-free oil
Torque value
45 Nm for G1/2, G1/2 A

20 Nm for G1/4
Mech. conn.:
Stainless steel

Seal: FPM

O-ring:
FPM
Output data
RLmax.= (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]

RLmin.= 2 kW
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L)
0.5 % FS max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.03 % FS / C max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
Over range
0.03 % FS / C max.
0.5 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.4 % FS max.
0.1 % FS max.
Repeatability
Rise time
1 ms
Long-term drift
-25 .. +85 C
-25 .. +85C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C

-40 .. +150 C / -25 .. +150 C for G1/2

mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark3)
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for EN175301-803 (DIN 43650))

IP 67 (for M12x1, providing an
Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
Current consumption
25 mA
Life expectancy
Weight
~ 150 g

1)

2)

3)

E 18.376.1/11.13
Description:
85
Pin connections:
Model code:

Z = Flush membrane
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025;
0001 (-1..1); 0009 (-1..9)
G01 = G1/2 A DIN 3852
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories such as female electrical connectors can be found
Dimensions:
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
HDA 43Z5-A
HDA 43Z5-B
Signal+
+UB
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Housing
Housing
M12x1
Pin
HDA 43Z6-A
HDA 43Z6-B
Signal+
+UB
n.c.
n.c.
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Profile seal ring
male electr. conn

3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4p / 5p
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
[G01]
10
20.5
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
18.1
[G02]
O-ring 15 x 2
G1/2 A
26 h14
29.5
hex-SW27
E 18.376.1/11.13
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869
11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5
86
seal ring DIN3869

18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
O-ring 15 x 2
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78
[G04]
hex-SW27
[G12]
Note:

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 7400
with Flush Membrane

steel measurement cell with a thinfilm strain gauge for relative pressure
range.
0 .. 10 V permit connection
to all HYDAC measuring and control
devices, as well as connection to
standard evaluation systems
(e.g. PLC controls).
Special features:

membrane
Very compact design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures

Torque value
Parts in contact with fluid1)
Output data
Output signals, permitted load resistance

max. setting
Accuracy at minimum setting
(B.F.S.L.)
zero point
over range
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long term drift

mark

mark3)
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Other data
Supply voltage
when applied according to UL specifications
Current consumption
Life expectancy
Weight
25; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar

50; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
125; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
G1/4 with additional front O-ring seal
Silicone-free oil
20 Nm
Connection part: Stainless steel
Seal: FPM
O-ring: FPM
RLmax = (UB 8 V) / 20 mA [k]
RLmin = 2 k
0.5 % FS typ.
1.0 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
0.4 % FS max.
0.1 % FS max.
2 ms
0.3 % FS / year typ.
-25 .. +85 C
- 25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Certificate No.: E318391
20 g
IP 67 (when an IP 67 female connector is used)
limited energy according to 9.3 UL 61010;
Class 2; UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
25 mA
~ 80 g
B.F.S.L. = Best Fit Straight Line
1)
2)
3)
E 18.376.1.0/11.13
Description:
87
Pin connections:
Model code:

HDA 7 4 Z 6 X XXXX XXX 000

Z = Flush membrane
6
Signal
0025; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
M12x1
Pin
1
2
3
4
G05 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
Modification number
000 = Standard
HDA 74Z6-A
Signal+
n.c.
Signaln.c.
HDA 74Z6-B
+UB
n.c.
0V
Signal
Notes:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical female connectors, can be found
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.
M12x1 4 pole
male electr. conn.

M12x1 4 pole
37.5
2 +0.3
37.5
52.6
18.5
52.6
18.5
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78
10.9
12
hex. SW19
seal ring DIN 3869
11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5
G1/4 A
[G05]
G1/4 A
[G04]
19.5
hex. SW19
seal ring DIN 3869
11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5
18.9
21
18.9
21
Note:
E 18.376.1.0/11.13

88

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3400
with Flush Membrane
The electronic pressure switch

EDS 3400 with a flush membrane was
designed specifically for applications in
which a standard pressure connection
could become blocked, clogged or
frozen by the particular medium used.
Further applications include processes
where the medium changes frequently
and any residues could cause mixing or
Like the standard model, the EDS 3400
range.
Depending on the type, the instrument
can have up to 2 switching outputs and
a switchable analogue output
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V).
Special features:

membrane
Accuracy 1 % FS
(4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V)
bar, psi or MPa
programming
independently
Option of Desina-compliant
pin configuration with diagnostic
function
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
80; 200; 500; 800; 900 bar
Overload pressures
Burst pressures1)
200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852



G1/4 A DIN 3852


and cooling section
Silicone-free oil
Torque value
45 Nm for G1/2, G1/2 A

20 Nm for G1/4
Parts in contact with medium2)
Mech. conn.:
Stainless steel

Seal: FPM

O-ring:
FPM
Output data
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.25 % FS max.
Temperature drift

4 .. 20 mA
Output signal (selectable)

0 .. 10 V
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
max. 1.2 A per output
Switching cycles
> 100 million
Reaction time
< 10 ms
Long-term drift
Function
Level
-10 .. +70 C, -10 .. +60 C for UL spec.
-25 .. +80 C, -25 .. +60 C for UL spec.
-40 .. +80 C
-40 .. +80 C / -25 .. +80 C

-40 .. +150 C / -25 .. +150 C for G1/2 with cooling section
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark4)
10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption
max. 2.455 A total

max. 35 mA with inactive switching output


and analogue output
Display

Weight
~ 120 g

1)

2)

3)

4)

E 18.377.1/11.13
Description:
89
Setting options:

lock can be set.

outputs:
Meas.
range
in bar
Switch
point
in bar
Hysteresis
in bar
Increment*
in bar
0 .. 40
0.6 .. 40
0.2 .. 39.6
0.1
0 .. 100
1.6 .. 100
0.6 .. 99.0
0.2
0 .. 250
4.0 .. 250
1.5 .. 247.5
0.5
0 .. 400
6.0 .. 400
2.0 .. 396
0 .. 600
9.0 .. 600
3.0 .. 594
Window function
Meas.
range
Upper
switch
value
in bar
Increment*
in bar
Lower
switch
value
in bar
0 .. 40
0.6 .. 39.2
0.9 .. 39.6
0.1
0 .. 100
1.6 .. 98.2
2.4 .. 99
0.2
0 .. 250
4.0 .. 245.5
6.0 .. 247.5
0.5
0 .. 400
6.0 .. 392
9.0 .. 396
0 .. 600
9.0 .. 589
14 .. 594
in bar

shown.

window function)
Choice of display (current pressure,
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
E 18.377.1/11.13

requirements.
EDS 3 4 Z X X XXXX XXX 000

Z = Flush membrane
Output
0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
G01 = G1/2 A DIN 3852
G05 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
G12 = G1/2 with add. front O-ring seal and cooling section
Modification number
000 = Standard
Model code:
DESINA-compliant or
EDS 3 4 Z 8 X XXXX XXX D00
90
Model code:

Z = flush membrane
8 = M12x1, 5 pole, male
Output
0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
G01 = G1/2 A DIN 3852
G05 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
Modification number
Note:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters,
splash guards, clamps for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
Pin connections:
Dimensions:
installation dimension 53.5
M12x1, 4 pole
male, electr. conn. M12x1

4 pole/5 pole
display
turns thru
270
housing
turns thru
340
Pin
EDS
34Z6-1
EDS
34Z6-2
EDS
34Z6-3
+UB
+UB
+UB
n.c.
SP 2
Analogue
0V
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
SP 1
M12x1, 5 pole
4
3
5
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
[G01]
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
seal ring DIN3869

11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78
O-ring 15 x 2
Pin
EDS
34Z8-5
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
SP 2
M12x1, 5 pole
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
Can be
connected to
DESINA
Pin
EDS
34Z8-1
EDS
34Z8-3
+UB
+UB
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
O-ring 15 x 2
DESINAcompliant
seal ring DIN3869

18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
[G05]
3
5
[G04]
[G02]
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
n.c.
Analogue
Note:
The information in this brochure relates to the operating conditions and

applications described. For applications and operating conditions not described, please
contact the relevant technical department.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.377.1/11.13
[G12]
91
E 18.377.1/11.13
92
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3300
with Flush Membrane

EDS 3300 with a flush membrane was
designed specifically for applications in
where the medium changes frequently
Like the standard model, the
EDS 3300 with flush membrane has a
ceramic measurement cell with a thick
measurement in a low pressure range.
Depending on the type, the instrument
can have up to 2 switching outputs and
a switchable analogue output
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V).
Special features:

membrane
Accuracy 1% FS
(4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V)
bar, psi or MPa
programming
independently
Optional Desina-compliant pin configuration with diagnostic function
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
-1..1; 1; 2.5; 6; 10; 16 bar
3; 3; 8; 18; 30; 48 bar
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
5; 5; 15; 30; 50; 80 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852



G1/4 A DIN 3852

Silicone-free oil
Torque value
45 Nm for G1/2, G1/2 A

20 Nm for G1/4
Mech. conn.:
Stainless steel

Seal: FPM

O-ring:
FPM
Output data
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.25 % FS max.
Temperature drift

Output signal (selectable)
4 .. 20 mA

0 .. 10 V
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles
> 100 million
Reaction time
< 10 ms
Long-term drift
Function
Level
-10 .. +70 C, -10 .. +60 C for UL spec.
-25 .. +80 C, -25 .. +60 C for UL spec.
-40 .. +80 C
-40 .. +80 C / -25 .. +80 C

-40 .. +150 C / -25 .. +150 C for G1/2

mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
3)
mark
10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption
max. 2,455 A total



and analogue output
Display

Weight
~ 120 g

1)

2)

3)

E 18.378.1/11.13
Description:
93
Setting options:

lock can be set.

outputs:
Meas.
range
in bar
Switch
point
in bar
Hysteresis
in bar
Increment*
in bar
-1 .. 1
-0.97 .. 1
-0.99 .. 0.98
0.01
0 .. 1
0.016 .. 1
0.006 .. 0.99
0.002
0 .. 2.5
0.04 .. 2.5
0.015 .. 2.475
0.005
0 .. 6
0.09 .. 6
0.3
0 .. 10
0.16 .. 10
0.06 .. 9.9
.. 5.94
0.02
0 .. 16
0.25 .. 16
0.1
0.05
.. 15.8
0.01
Window function
Meas.
range
in bar
Lower
switch value
in bar
Upper
switch value
in bar
Increment*
in bar
-1 .. 1
-0.97 .. 0.96
-0.95 .. 0.98
0.01
0 .. 1
0.016 .. 0.982
0.024.. 0.99
0.002
0 .. 2.5
0.04 .. 2.455
0.06 .. 2.475
0.005
0 .. 6
0.09 .. 5.89
0.14 .. 5.94
0.01
0 .. 10
0.16 .. 9.82
0.24 .. 9.9
0.02
0 .. 16
0.25 .. 15.7
0.4 .. 15.8
0.05

shown.
E 18.378.1/11.13
94
Model code:

Z = Flush membrane
Output
01.0; 02.5; 06.0; 0010; 0016
0001 (-1..1)
G01 = G1/2 A DIN 3852
G05 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
Modification number
000 = Standard
Model code:
DESINA-compliant or
EDS 3 3 Z 8 X XXXX XXX D00

window function)
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
measurement units bar, psi or MPa.
EDS 3 3 Z X X XXXX XXX 000

Z = Flush membrane
Output
01.0; 02.5; 06.0; 0010; 0016
0001 (-1 .. 1)
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
G05 = G1/4A DIN 3852
Modification number

requirements.
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole
male, electr. conn. M12x1

4 pole/5 pole
display
turns thru
270
housing
turns thru
340
Pin
EDS
33Z6-1
EDS
33Z6-2
EDS
33Z6-3
+UB
+UB
+UB
n.c.
SP 2
Analogue
0V
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
SP 1
M12x1, 5 pole
4
3
5
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
[G01]
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869
11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78
O-ring 15 x 2
Pin
EDS
33Z8-5
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
SP 2
M12x1, 5 pole
DESINA
compliant
Can be
connected to
DESINA
Pin
EDS
33Z8-1
EDS
33Z8-3
seal ring DIN3869

18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
+UB
+UB
O-ring 15 x 2
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
hex-SW27
[G05]
[G12]

applications described. For applications and operating conditions not described, please
contact the relevant technical department.
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
n.c.
Analogue

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.378.1/11.13
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
Note:
3
5
[G04]
[G02]
95
ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS

As with the pressure transmitters, HYDAC ELECTRONIC also has
temperature transmitters appropriate for every application.
The transmitters are available with a variety of output signals, connectors and
fluid port connection options.
Electronic temperature transmitters for general applications:
Page
ETS 7200 97
ETS 4100 99
ETS 4500 101
Other temperature transmitters for special applications can be found in the sections
"Service Instruments" and "OEM Products for Large Volume Production".
E 180.000.2 /11.13
96
Electronic
Temperature Transmitter
ETS 7200
The ETS 7200 is an electronic

temperature transmitter which, because
of its compact design, is particularly
suited to measuring temperature in
hydraulic applications in the industrial
and mobile sectors. Based on a
silicon semiconductor device and
corresponding evaluation electronics,
the temperature sensor is designed
to measure temperatures in the range
-25C to +100C.
The sensor has various analogue
output signals as standard,
e.g. 4 .. 20 mA or 0 ... 10V to enable
integration into modern control systems
through an M12x1 connector.
The pressure resistance up to
600 bar and excellent EMC
characteristics make the ETS 7200
ideal for use in harsh conditions.
Special features:
Accuracy 2 % FS
Ideal for OEM applications

Very compact design


Long-term stability
Standard protection class IP 67
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring principle
Silicon semiconductor device
Measuring range
-25 .. +100 C
Probe length
10 mm
Probe diameter
6.7 mm
Pressure resistance
600 bar
Overload pressure
900 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm

Seal: FPM
Output data
RLmax.= (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [k]

RLmin.= 2 k
Accuracy (at room temperature)
1.0 % FS typ.

2.0 % FS max.
0.02 % FS / C
Rise time to DIN EN 60751
t50: 4 s
t90: 8 s
Ambient temperature range
-25 .. +80 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark2)
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
Current consumption
25 mA
Weight
~ 50 g


1)

2)

E 18.315.3/11.13
Description:
97
Pin connections:
Model code:
ETS 7 2 4 6 X 010 000
M12x1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Signal
Probe length
010 = 10 mm
Modification number
000 = Standard
Pin
ETS 7246-A
ETS 7246-B
Signal+
+UB
n.c.
n.c.
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.
4 pole
hex.-SW19
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Note:
E 18.315.3/11.13

described.
98

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
ETS 4100
The ETS 4100 is a robust electronic

temperature transmitter which is
particularly suited to measuring
temperature in hydraulic applications in
industry.
The temperature sensor, based on a
PT 1000 and corresponding evaluation
electronics, is capable of measuring
temperatures in the range -25 C to
+100 C.
The sensor has analogue output
signals of 4 .. 20 mA and 0 ..10 V
available as standard for integration into
modern control systems. The pressure
resistance up to 600 bar and excellent
EMC characteristics make the
ETS 4100 ideal for use in harsh
conditions.
Special features:
Accuracy 0.8 % FS
Ideal for industrial applications

Robust design

Standard protection class
IP 65 / IP 67
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring principle
PT 1000
Measuring range
-25 .. +100 C
Probe length
6; 50; 100; 250; 350 mm
Probe diameter
4.5; 8; 8; 8; 8 mm
Pressure resistance
600 bar (probe length 6 mm)




G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm

Seal:
FPM
Output data
RLmax.= (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [k]

RLmin.= 2 k
0.4 % FS typ.

0.8 % FS max.
0.01 % FS / C
t50: ~ 4 s
t90: ~ 8 s
-40 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +125 C / -25 .. +125 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
25 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803


IP 67 ( for male M12x1, when an
Other data
Electrical connection M12x1, 4 pole,
Binder Series 714 M18, 4 pole,
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Supply voltage

5%
~ 25 mA
Weight
~ 200 g (probe length 6 mm)






1)

2)

E 18.302.1.0/11.13
Description:
99
Pin connections:
Model code:
ETS 4 1 4 X X XXX 000
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
Probe length
006 = 6 mm
050 = 50 mm
100 = 100 mm
250 = 250 mm
350 = 350 mm
Pin
ETS 4144-A
ETS 4144-B
n.c.
+UB
Signal+
Signal
Signal -
0V
n.c.
n.c.
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Pin
ETS 4145-A
ETS 4145-B
Signal+
+UB
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Housing
Housing
M12x1
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.
Binder series 714 -4pole
male electr. conn.3pole+PE

EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4 pole
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
E 18.302.1.0/11.13
ETS 4146-A
ETS 4146-B
Signal+
+UB
n.c.
n.c.
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Note:
hex.-SW27
100
Pin
Probe length
(Z)
[mm]
Probe diameter
4.5
50
100
250
350
[mm]

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
ETS 4500
The ETS 4500 is a robust electronic

temperature transmitter which is
particularly suited to measuring
temperature in hydraulic applications in
industry.
Based on a silicon semiconductor
device and corresponding evaluation
electronics, the temperature sensor is
designed to measure temperatures in
the range -25 to +100 C.
The sensor has analogue output signals
of 4 .. 20 mA and 0 ..10 V available
as standard for integration in modern
control systems.
The pressure resistance up to 600 bar
and excellent EMC characteristics make
the ETS4500 ideal for use in harsh
conditions.
Special features:
Accuracy 2 % FS

Ideal for industrial applications
Robust design

Standard protection class
IP 65 / IP 67
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring principle
Measuring range
-25 .. +100 C
Probe length
10.7; 50; 100; 250; 350 mm
Probe diameter
8 mm
Pressure resistance
600 bar (probe length 10.7 mm)




G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm

Seal: FPM
Output data
RLmax.= (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]

RLmin.= 2 kW
1.0 % FS typ.

2.0 % FS max.
0.02 % FS / C
t50: ~ 4 s
t90: ~ 8 s
-40 .. +85C / -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +125 C / -25 .. +125 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
25 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803
(DIN 43650))

IP 67 (for male M12x1 male, when an
Other data
M12x1, 4 pole

EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Supply voltage

5%
~ 25 mA
Weight
~ 200 g (probe length 10.7 mm)






1)

2)

E 18.302.2.0/11.13
Description:
101
Pin connections:
Model code:
ETS 4 5 4 X X XXX 000
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
Probe length
010 = 10 mm
050 = 50 mm
100 = 100 mm
250 = 250 mm
350 = 350 mm
Pin
ETS 4545-A
ETS 4545-B
Signal+
+UB
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Housing
Housing
M12x1
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Pin
ETS 4546-A
ETS 4546-B
Signal+
+UB
n.c.
n.c.
Signal-
0V
n.c.
Signal
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.
3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4 pole
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Note:
E 18.302.2.0/11.13
Probe length
Probe diameter
Probe length
Probe diameter
(Z)
[mm]
(Z)
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
102
10.7
10.7
50
50
100
100
250
250
350
350

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.302.2.0/11.13
103
ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SWITCHES

For measuring and monitoring the temperature of the medium, HYDAC
offers a wide variety of electronic temperature switches with an integrated
or separate temperature probe.
Page
ETS 3200 Pressure-resistant for inline installation
105
107
ETS 3200 Pressure-resistant for inline installation,
menu navigation to VDMA
109
ETS 3200 Pressure-resistant for inline installation, IO-Link
111
ETS 3200 for tank installation
113
ETS 3200 for tank installation, menu navigation to VDMA
115
ETS 3200 for tank installation, IO-Link
117
ETS 3800 for separate temperature probe
119
ETS 3800 for separate temperature probe,
menu navigation to VDMA
ETS 3800 for separate temperature probe, IO-Link
121
123
ETS 320 Pressure-resistant for inline installation
125
127
129
TFP 100 (separate temperature probe)
Pressure resistant to 600 bar

Integrated probe
ETS 320
ETS 380
ETS 1700
HTS 8000
ETS 3800
Electronic
Temperature Switches
ETS 3200
Other electronic temperature switches for special applications can be found in

the sections "Sensors for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres" and
"OEM Products for Large Volume Production"
1 C
1 C
1 C
1 C
1 C
3%
Separate probe
Analogue output
Digital display
Programmable
In-Tank
Factory-set
VDMA Menu Navigation
Available as individual unit
E 180.000.2/11.13
OEM product for large volume

production
104
IO Link Interface
UL Approval
Note:
Not all feature combinations are possible. For precise information, please consult the relevant
data sheet.
Electronic Temperature
Switch
ETS 3200 Pressure Resistant
for Inline Mounting
The ETS 3200 is a compact electronic

temperature switch with a 4-digit
display.
Pressure resistant to 600 bar, this
model has an integrated 18 mm
temperature probe and can be screwed
directly inline or into a hydraulic block.
Different output models with one or two
switching outputs, optionally with an
additional analogue output signal, offer
a variety of application possibilities.
hystereses can be adjusted very quickly
and easily using the keypad.
For optimum adaptation to the particular
application, the unit has many additional
adjustment parameters (e.g. switching
delay times, N/C / N/O function, etc.).
Special features:
2 switching outputs,
up to 1.2 A load per output
selectable (4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V)

4-digit display
Optimum alignment - display can be

Switching / switch-back points and
many useful additional functions can
be set using the keypad
Display of temperature and
unit of measurement in C or F
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring range
-25 .. 100 C (-13 ... 212 F)
Probe length
18 mm
Pressure resistance
600 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852
Torque value
45 Nm

Seal:
FPM
Output data
Accuracy (display, analogue output)
1.0 C ( 2.0 F)

Signal selectable:

4 .. 20 mA
ohmic resist. max. 500 W

0 .. 10 V
ohmic resistance min. 1 kW

corresponds in each case to -25 .. +100 C
Switch outputs
Type
PNP transistor switching outputs
Switching current
Switching cycles
> 100 million
t50: 3 s
t90: 9 s
-25 .. +80 C

(-25 ... +60C acc. to UL spec.)
-40 .. +80 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
-mark2)
10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
Shock resistance to
50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption
max. 2.455 A total


and analogue output
5%
Display

Weight
~ 135 g


1)

2)

E 18.327.2/11.13
Description:
105
All the settings available on the ETS 3200

are combined in 2 easy-to-navigate menus.
To prevent unauthorised adjustment of the
instrument, a programming lock can be
set.

switching points and
switch-back hystereses:
Unit
Switching
point
Hysteresis
Increment*
-23.0 .. 100.0
1.0 .. 123.5
0.5
-9 .. 212
2 .. 222
Window function
Unit
Lower
switch value
Upper
switch value
Increment*
-23.0 .. 97.5
-22.0 .. 98.5
0.5
-9 .. 208
-7 .. 209


window function)
Switching direction of the switching outputs
adjustable (N/C or N/O)
Choice of display (actual temperature,
peak temperature, switching point 1,
switching point 2, display off)
Model code:
ETS 3 2 2 X X 018 000
2 = G1/2 A DIN 3852 (male)
Output
Probe length in mm
018
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, splash guards, etc. can be
found in the Accessories brochure.
Dimensions:
display turns thru 270
Setting options:
Pin connections:
housing turns thru 340
M12x1, 4 pole
ETS 3226-3
+UB
+UB
SP 2
Analogue
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
M12x1, 5 pole
hex. SW27
ETS 3226-2
O-ring 20.35x1.78-NBR
Pin
3
5
E 18.327.2/11.13
electr. conn. male M12x1 4 pole/5 pole
106
Pin
ETS 3228-5
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
SP 2
Note:

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3200 Pressure Resistant
for Inline Installation

display.
Pressure resistant to 600 bar this model
has an integrated 18 mm temperature
probe and can be installed directly inline
or on the hydraulic block.
Different output versions with one or two
switching outputs, and with the possible
option of an additional analogue output
signal, offer a variety of application
possibilities.
switch-back points can be adjusted very
quickly and easily using the keypad.
Special features:

selectable (4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V)
4-digit display
optimal alignment
be set using keypad
Display of measured value and
units of measurement in C or F
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring range
Sensor length
Pressure resistance
Hydraulic connection
Torque value
Output data
Signal
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles

mark

- mark2)
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
for use acc. to UL specifications
Current consumption

Display
Weight (complete unit including probe)
-25 .. 100 C (-13 .. 212 F)

18 mm
600 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852
45 Nm
Seal: FPM
1.0 C ( 2.0 F)
selectable: 4 .. 20 mA load 500

0 .. 10 V load min. 1 k
corresp. in each case to -25 .. +100 C
> 100 million
t50: 3 s
t90: 9 s
-25 .. +80 C
(-25 .. +60 C acc. to UL spec.)
-40 .. +80 C
-40 .. +100C / -25 .. +100C
EN 61000-6-1 / -2 / -3 / -4
10 g
50 g
IP 67
9 .. 35 V DC (without analogue output)

18 .. 35 V DC (with analogue output)
Class 2; UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
2.455 A total
55 mA with analogue output and inactive
switching outputs
5%
~ 135 g
1)

2)

E 18.327.1.0/11.13
Description:
107

ETS 3200 as well as the menu structure
temperature switches.
The ETS 3200 can easily be adjusted via
three push-buttons.

outputs:
Measuring
range
Lower limit of
RP / FL
Upper limit of
SP / FH
-25 .. +100 C
-23.8 C
100.0 C
-13 .. +212 F
-11 F
212 F
Measuring
range
Min. difference
betw.
RP and SP
& FL and FH
Increment*
-25 .. +100 C
1.2 C
0.2 C
-13 .. + 212 F
2 F
1 F

shown.
SP = switch point
FL = temperature window lower value
FH = temperature window upper value
Model code:

ETS 3 2 2 6 X 018 V00
Type
= With integrated temperature sensor
2
2
= G1/2 A DIN 3852, (male)
6
Output
= 2 switching outputs
2
3
= 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
Probe length in mm
018
Modification number
V00 = Menu navigation in accordance with VDMA (Standard 24574-2)
Notes:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
42
25.2
M12x1
40.4
11
Pin connections:
6
7.5
M12x1, 4 pole
G1/2 A
26 h14
29.5
hex. SW27
18
5
14
3 +0.2
65
76
housing turns thru

340
92.5
16.1

window function)
Choice of display (current temperature,
display turns thru

270
Setting options:
16.1
male electr. conn. M12x1 4 pole
Pin
1
2
3
4
ETS 3226-2
+UB
SP2
0V
SP1
ETS 3226-3
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP1
E 18.327.1.0/11.13
Note:
108

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3200 Pressure-Resistant
The ETS 3200 with IO-Link

communication interface is a compact,
electronic temperature switch with
4-digit display. Pressure-resistant up
to 600 bar with an integrated 18 mm
temperature probe, this model can
be mounted directly inline or on the
hydraulic block.
The device has a switching output and
additional output that can be configured
as switching or analogue (4 .. 20 mA or
0 .. 10 V).
Compared with the standard
version, the IO-Link interface
enables bidirectional communication
between the device and the control.
The temperature switch series ETS 3200
according to specification V1.1 was
specially designed to connect sensors in
automation systems.
packaging industry.
Special features:
IO-Link interface
Additional signal output can be
configured as PNP transistor
4-digit display
optimal alignment
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring range
Sensor length
Pressure resistance
Torque value
Output data
Output signals
Analogue output
Signal
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles
Parameterisation

mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption

Display
-25 .. 100 C (-13 .. 212 F)

18 mm
600 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852
45 Nm
Seal: FPM
Output 2: c an be configured as PNP transistor
1.0 C ( 2.0 F)
selectable: 4 .. 20 mA load resist. 500

0 .. 10 V load resist. min. 1 k
> 100 million
t50: 3 s
t90: 9 s
programming device HPG 3000 or pushbuttons on the ETS 3200
-25 .. +80 C
-40 .. +80 C
-40 .. +100C / -25 .. +100C
EN 61000-6-1 / -2 / -3 / -4
10 g
50 g
IP 67
and analogue output
5%
~ 135 g
1)
E 18.327.2.0/11.13
Description:
109

VDMA Standard for temperature switches.

outputs:
Measuring
range
Lower limit of
RP / FL
Upper limit of
SP / FH
-25 .. +100 C
-23.8 C
100.0 C
-13 .. +212 F
-11 F
212 F
Measuring
range
Min. difference
betw.
RP and SP
& FL and FH
Increment*
-25 .. +100 C
1.2 C
0.2 C
-13 .. + 212 F
2 F
1 F

SP = switch point
window function)
Baud rate
38.4 kBaud *
Cycle time
2.5 ms
Process data width
16 Bit
Frame type
2.2
Specification
V1.1
*C
Model code:

ETS 3 2 2 6 L 018 000
Type
2
2
= G1/2 A DIN 3852, (male)
6
Output
= IO Link interface
L
Probe length in mm
018
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
42
25.2
M12x1
Pin connections:
40.4
11
L-
Standard IO
Signal
L+
I/Q
3
4
LC/Q
18
5
Pin
1
2
14
I/Q
92.5
C/Q
76
Description
Supply voltage
analogue output
Gnd
6
7.5
G1/2 A
26 h14
29.5
hex. SW27
65
3 +0.2
IO-Link
16.1
L+
housing turns thru

340
M12x1, 4 pole
display turns thru

270
Setting options:
16.1
E 18.327.2.0/11.13
Note:
110

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3200
for Tank Installation

temperature switch with digital display.
With its integrated temperature probe,
the ETS 3200 is particularly suitable for
direct tank installation and is available
in various lengths.
switching outputs, optionally with an
additional analogue output signal, offer
a variety of application possibilities.
additional adjustment parameters
(e.g. switching delay times, N/C / N/O
function, etc.).
Special features:
selectable (4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 10 V)

4-digit display
be set using the keypad.
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring range
-25 .. 100 C (-13 ... 212 F)
Probe lengths
100; 250; 350 mm
Pressure resistance
50 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852
Torque value
45 Nm

Seal:
FPM
Output data
1.0 C ( 2.0 F)

Signal selectable:

4 .. 20 mA
ohmic resist. max. 500 W

0 .. 10 V
ohmic resistance min. 1 kW

Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles
> 100 million
t50: 8 s
t90: 15 s
-25 .. +80 C

(-25 ... +60C acc. to UL spec.)
-40 .. +80 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
-mark2)
10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
Shock resistance to
50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption
max. 2.455 A total


and analogue output
Display

5%
Weight




1)

2)

E 18.319.3/11.13
Description:
111
Setting options:
All the settings available on the

ETS 3200 are combined in 2 easy-tonavigate menus.
set.

Switching
point
Hysteresis
-23.0 .. 100.0
1.0 .. 123.5
-9 .. 212
2 .. 222
Increment*
0.5
1
Window function
Unit
Lower
switch value
Upper
switch value
-23.0 .. 97.5
-22.0 .. 98.5
-9 .. 208
-7 .. 209
Increment*
0.5
2 = G1/2 A DIN 3852 (male)
Output
Probe length in mm
100; 250; 350
Modification number
000 = Standard

ETS 3 2 2 X X XXX 000

window function)
Note:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, protective sleeves for tank
mounting, splash guards, etc. can be found in the Accessories brochure.
Dimensions:
Unit
Model code:
Pin connections:
ETS 3226-2
ETS 3226-3
+UB
+UB
SP 2
Analogue
0V
0V
250
SP 1
SP 1
300
Probe
length
(dim. Z)
100
hex. SW27
Pin
M12x1, 4 pole
M12x1, 5 pole
4
3
5
E 18.319.3/11.13
male electr. conn. M12x1 4 pole/5 pole
112
Pin
ETS 3228-5
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
SP 2
Note:

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3200 for Tank Installation

display.
in various lengths. Different output
models with one or two switching
outputs, optionally with an additional
analogue output signal, offer a variety of
application possibilities.
Special features:

selectable (4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V)
4-digit display
optimal alignment
be set using keypad
Display of measured value and
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring range
Probe length
Pressure resistance
Torque value
Output data
Signal
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles

mark

mark2)
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption

Display
-25 .. 100 C (-13 .. 212 F)

100; 250; 350 mm
50 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852
45 Nm
Seal: FPM
1.0 C ( 2.0 F)

0 .. 10 V load min. 1 k
> 100 million
t50: 8 s
t90: 15 s
-25 .. +80 C
(-25 .. +60 C acc. to UL spec.)
-40 .. +80 C
-40 .. +100C / -25 C .. +100 C
EN 61000-6-1 / -2 / -3 / -4
10 g
50 g
IP 67
1
Class 2; UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
2.455 A total
switching outputs
5%

1)
2)
E 18.319.1.0/11.13
Description:
113

three push-buttons.
Setting ranges for the

switching outputs:
Measuring
range
Lower limit of
RP / FL
Upper limit of
SP / FH
-25 .. +100 C
-23.8 C
100.0 C
-13 .. +212 F
-11 F
212 F
Measuring
range
Min. difference
betw.
RP and SP
& FL and FH
Increment*
-25 .. +100 C
1.2 C
0.2 C
-13 .. + 212 F
2 F
1 F

shown.
SP = switch point
Model code:

ETS 3 2 2 6 X XXX V00
Type
2
2 = G1/2 A DIN 3852 (male)
Output
Probe length in mm
100; 250; 350
Modification number
Notes:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
42
25.2
M12
11
housing turns thru

340
92.5
76
65
3
+0.2
250
14
2
100
9.4
300
8
G1/2 A
26 h14
29.5
M12x1, 4 pole
hex. SW27
Pin connections:
Probe length
(dim. Z)

window function)
16.1
40.4
display turns thru

270
Setting options:
16.1

4 pole/5 pole
Pin
1
2
3
4
ETS 3226-2
+UB
SP2
0V
SP1
ETS 3226-3
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP1
E 18.319.1.0/11.13
Note:
114

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3200 for Tank Installation

4-digit display.
in various lengths.
The instrument has a switching output
and additional output that can be
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V).
The temperature switch series
ETS 3200 with communication interface
IO-Link according to specification V1.1
was specially designed to connect
packaging industry.
Special features:
IO-Link interface
4-digit display
optimum alignment
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring range
Probe length
Pressure resistance
Torque value
Output data
Output signals
Analogue output
Signal
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles
Parameterisation

mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption

Display
-25 .. 100 C (-13 .. 212 F)

100; 250; 350 mm
50 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852
45 Nm
Seal: FPM
Output 2: c an be configured as PNP transistor
1.0 C ( 2.0 F)
selectable:
4 .. 20 mA load 500
0 .. 10 V ohmic resist. min. 1 k
> 100 million
t50: 8 s
t90: 15 s
buttons on the ETS 3200
-25 .. +80 C
-40 .. +80 C
-40 .. +100C / -25C .. 100 C
EN 61000-6-1 / -2 / -3 / -4
10 g
50 g
IP 67
and analogue output
5%

1)
E 18.319.2.0/11.13
Description:
115


outputs:
Measuring
range
Lower limit of
RP / FL
Upper limit of
SP / FH
-25 .. +100 C
-23.8 C
100.0 C
-13 .. +212 F
-11 F
212 F
Measuring
range
Min. difference
betw.
RP and SP
& FL and FH
Increment*
-25 .. +100 C
1.2 C
0.2 C
-13 .. + 212 F
2 F
1 F

SP = switch point

window function)
Pin connections:
Baud rate
38.4 kBaud *
Cycle time
2.5 ms
Process data width
16 Bit
Frame type
2.2
Specification
V1.1
*C
Model code:

ETS 3 2 2 6 L XXX 000
Type
2
= With integrated temperature probe
2
= G1/2 A DIN 3852, (male)
6
Output
= IO Link interface
L
Probe length in mm
100; 250; 350
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
42
25.2
M12
11
I/Q
Probe length
(dim. Z)
100
250
Pin
1
2
Signal
L+
I/Q
3
4
LC/Q
Description
Supply voltage
analogue output
Gnd
housing turns thru

340
92.5
76
9.4
300
8
G1/2 A
26 h14
29.5
hex. SW27
Standard IO
L-
65
+0.2
IO-Link
C/Q
14
2
L+
16.1
M12x1, 4 pole
40.4
display turns thru

270
Setting options:
16.1
E 18.319.2.0/11.13
Note:
116

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3800
for Separate Temperature Probe

display.
The version for a separate temperature
probe has a measuring range of
-30 ... +150C and is used primarily
with the TFP 100 temperature probe
which was specially developed for tank
installation.
It is also possible, however, to
evaluate commonly-available PT 100
temperature probes.
Different output versions with one or two
possibilities.
additional adjustment parameters
(e.g. switching delay times,
N/C / N/O function, etc.).
Special features:
selectable (4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V)


be set using keypad
Technical data:
Input data
-30 .. +150 C (-22 .. 302 F)
Measuring range1)
Connection, separate temperature probe
Female cable connection M12x1, 4 pole
Output data
1.0 C (+ PT100 error)

Signal selectable:

4 .. 20 mA
load resist. max. 500 W

0 .. 10 V

Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
> 100 million
Switching cycles
-25 .. +80 C


mark
-mark2)
(-25 .. +60 C acc. to UL spec.)
-40 .. +80 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage


10 g
Current consumption

max. 2.455 A total

max. 35 mA with inactive switch outputs
max. 55 mA with inactive switch outputs
and analogue output
5%
~ 87 g

Display

Weight
50 g
IP 67
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950


1)

Depending on the temperature range of the connected temperature sensor, the indication

range of the ETS 3800 may be reduced.
2)

E 18.328.2/11.13
Description:
117
Setting options:

set.

Unit
Switching
point
Hysteresis
Increment*
-27.0 .. 150.0
1.0 .. 178.0
0.5
-17 .. 302
2 .. 320
Window function
Unit
Lower
switch value
Upper
switch value
Increment*
-27.0 .. 146.5
-25.5 .. 148.0
0.5
-17 .. 296
-14 .. 298


window function)
Model code:
ETS 3 8 6 X X 000 000
6 = Female cable connection M12x1, 4 pole
Output
Probe length in mm
000 = Separate temperature probe
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
A male cable connector M12x1, 4 pole, to connect the separate temperature probe
and a 3 m sensor cable, LIYCY 4 x 0.25 mm are supplied with the instrument.
Other accessories, such as electrical connectors, splash guards, clamps for wallmounting, etc. can be found in the Accessories brochure.
Separate temperature probe:
(not supplied with the instrument)

TFP 106 - 000 with electr. conn. 4-pol. M12x1
Tank installation sleeve for TFP 100
Part No.: 921330

Part No.: 906170
Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole
Pin
ETS 3866-2
+UB
+UB
SP 2
Analogue
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1

Dimensions:
ETS 3866-3
female electr. conn. 4 pole

M12x1, 5 pole
4
3
5
E 18.328.2/11.13
118
Pin
ETS 3868-5
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
SP 2
Note:

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3800

display.
The model for separate temperature
probe has a measuring range of
-30 .. +150C and is used primarily
installation.
It is also possible, however, to use
commercially available PT 100
temperature probes. Different output
outputs, and with the possible option
of an additional analogue output
possibilities.
Special features:

selectable
(4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V)
4-digit display
optimal alignment
be set using keypad
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring range1)
Output data
Signal
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles

mark
- mark2)
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption

Display
Weight
-30 .. 150 C (-22 .. 302 F)

1.0 % FS ( + PT100 error)

0 .. 10 V load min. 1 k
> 100 million
-25 .. +80 C
(-25 .. +60 C acc. to UL spec.)
-40 .. +80 C
EN 61000-6-1 / -2 / -3 / -4
10 g
50 g
IP 67
Class 2; UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
2.455 A total
switching outputs
5%
~ 87 g (excluding connector and probe)
1)
Depending on the temperature range of the connected
temperature sensor, the measurement range of the ETS 3800 may be reduced.
2)

Environmental conditions according to 1.4.2 UL 61010-1; C22.2 no. 61010-1
E 18.328.1.0/11.13
Description:
119

three push-buttons.

outputs:
Measurement Lower limit of
range
RP / FL
Upper limit of
SP / FH
-30 .. +150 C
-28.0 C
150.0 C
-22 .. +302 F
-19 F
302 F
Measurement Min. difference

range
betw.
RP and SP
& FL and FH
Increment*
-30 .. +150 C
2.0 C
0.5 C
-22 .. + 302 F
3 F
1 F

SP = switch point

window function)
Model code:

ETS 3 8 6 6 X 000 V00
Type
= For separate temperature probe
8
Output
2
3
Probe length in mm
000 = Separate temperature sensor
Modification number
Notes:
Accessories:
A male cable connector M12x1, 4 pole, to connect the separate temperature probe, and
a 3 m sensor cable, LIYCY 4 x 0.25 mm are supplied with the instrument.

TFP 106 - 000 with male electr. conn. 4 pole M12x1
Part No.: 921330

Part No.: 906170
Dimensions:
42
25.2
M12x1
40.4
11
electr. conn. female 4 pole
M12x1
housing turns thru

340
65.7
M12x1, 4 pole
76.7
93.2
16.1
Pin connections:
display turns thru

270
Setting options:
16.1
22
6
Pin
1
2
3
4
ETS 3866-2
+UB
SP2
0V
SP1
ETS 3866-3
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP1
E 18.328.1.0/11.13
Note:
120

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3800

4-digit display. The version for a
separate temperature probe has a
measuring range of -30 ... +150 C
and is used primarily with the TFP 100
temperature probe which was specially
developed for tank installation.
evaluate commonly-available PT 100
temperature probes. The instrument has
one switching output and an additional
output that can be configured as either
switching or analogue (4 .. 20 mA or
0 .. 10 V).
ETS 3800 with communication interface
IO-Link according to specification V1.1
was specially designed to connect
packaging industry.
Special features:
IO-Link interface
Optimum alignment of the display
can be rotated in two axes
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring range1)
Output data
Signal
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles
Parameterisation

mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption

Display
Weight
-30 .. 150 C (-22 .. 302 F)

1.0 % FS ( + PT100 error)
selectable:
4 .. 20 mA load resist. 500
0 .. 10 V load resist. min. 1 k
> 100 million
buttons on the ETS 3800
-25 .. +80 C
-40 .. +80 C
EN 61000-6-1 / -2 / -3 / -4
10 g
50 g
IP 67

and analogue output
5%
~ 87 g (excluding connector and probe)
1)
Depending on the temperature range of the connected temperature sensor, the
measurement range of the ETS 3800 may be reduced.
E 18.328.2.0/11.13
Description:
121
Setting options:


outputs:
Measurement Lower limit of
range
RP / FL
Upper limit of
SP / FH
-30 .. +150 C
-28.0 C
150.0 C
-22 .. +302 F
-19 F
302 F
Measuring
range
Min. difference
betw.
RP and SP
& FL and FH
Increment*
-30 .. +150 C
2.0 C
0.5 C
-22 .. + 302 F
3 F
1 F

SP = switch point

window function)
Baud rate
38.4 kBaud *
Cycle time
2.5 ms
Process data width
16 Bit
Frame type
2.2
Specification
V1.1
*C
Model code:

ETS 3 8 6 6 L 000 000
Type
8
= For separate temperature probe
6
Output
L
= IO Link interface
Sensor length in mm
000 = Separate temperature probe
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
A male cable connector M12x1, 4 pole, to connect the separate temperature sensor
Dimensions:
42
25.2
M12x1
M12x1, 4 pole
L+
Standard IO
I/Q
Pin
1
2
Signal
L+
I/Q
3
4
LC/Q
Description
Supply voltage
analogue output
Gnd
electr. conn. female 4 pole
M12x1
housing turns thru

340
L-
76.7
93.2
16.1
IO-Link
C/Q
65.7
40.4
11
display turns thru

270
Pin connections:
16.1
22
E 18.328.2.0/11.13
Separate temperature sensor:
122
(not supplied with instrument)

TFP 106 - 000
Part. No.: 921330
with male electr. conn.
4 pole M12x1
Tank install. sleeve
Part No.: 906170
for TFP 100
Note:

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 320 Pressure-Resistant

display.
Pressure-resistant to 600 bar with an
integrated 18 mm temperature probe,
this model can be installed directly
inline or on the hydraulic block and has
a measuring range of -25 .. +100 C.
signal of 4 .. 20 mA offer a variety of
application opportunities.
Special features:
Compact temperature switch with

integral temperature probe
2 transistor switching outputs,
4 .. 20 mA

3-digit display

Switching point or window function
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring range
-25 .. 100 C (-13 .. 212 F)
Probe length
18 mm
600 bar
Pressure resistance
G1/2 A DIN 3852
Torque value
45 Nm

Seal:
FPM
Output data
1.0 C ( 2.0 F)

Signal
4 .. 20 mA

corresponds to -25 .. +100 C
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles
> 100 million
t50: 3 s
t90: 9 s
-25 .. +80 C
-40 .. +80 C
-40 .. +100 C/ -25 .. +100 C
(for the probe)
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
Shock resistance to
50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
IP 65
Other data
Supply voltage
20 .. 32 V DC
Current consumption
approx. 100 mA without switch output
5%
Display

Weight
~ 300 g


1)

E 18.310.5/11.13
Description:
123
Setting options:

set.

Unit
Switching
point
Hysteresis
Increment*
-22.0 .. 100.0
1.0 .. 178.0
1.0
-10.0 .. 212.0
2.0 .. 320.0
2.0
Window function
Unit
Lower
switch value
Upper
switch value
Increment*
-23.0 .. 99.0
-22.0 .. 100.0
1.0
-12.0 .. 210.0
-10.0 .. 212.0 2.0


window function)
adjustable from 0 .. 750 seconds
Model code:
ETS 3 2 X X 100 X00
= G1/2 A DIN 3852 (male)
2
6
8
Output
Measuring range
-25 .. +100 C (-13 .. +212 F)
Modification number
000 = Display in C
400 = Display in F
Note:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, clamps for wall-mounting, etc.
can be found in the Accessories brochure.
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.
4pole/5pole
Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole
Pin
ETS 326-2
ETS 326-3
+UB
+UB
SP 2
Analogue
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
hex. SW27
M12x1, 5 pole
4
3
5
E 18.310.5/11.13
124
Pin
ETS 328-5
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
SP 2
Note:

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 380

display.
The version for a separate temperature
probe has a measuring range
of -30 .. +150 C and is used primarily
installation.

evaluate commonly available PT 100
temperature probes. Different output
outputs, and with the possible option of
an additional analogue output signal of
4 .. 20 mA open up a multitude of
application opportunities.
The switching points and the
associated hystereses can be
adjusted very quickly and easily using
the keypad.
For optimum adaptation to the
particular application, the instrument
has many additional adjustment
parameters (e.g. switching delay
times, N/C / N/O function, etc.).
Special features:
2 transistor switching outputs,

4 .. 20 mA

3-digit display

Switching point or window function
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring range1)
Output data

Signal

Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching cycles
mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption
Display

Weight
-30 .. +150 C (-22 .. 302 F)

1.0 C ( 2.0 F)
4 .. 20 mA ohmic resistance max. 400 W
corresponds to -30 .. +150 C
> 100 million
-25 .. +80 C
-40 .. +80 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
10 g
50 g
IP 65
20 .. 32 V DC
approx. 100 mA without switch output
5%
~ 300 g


1)

E 18.329.2/11.13
Description:
125
Setting options:

ETS 380 are combined in 2 easy-tonavigate menus.
device, a programming lock can be set.

Unit
Switching
point
Hysteresis
Increment*
-27.0 .. 150.0
1.0 .. 178.0
1.0
-16.0 .. 302.0
2.0 .. 320.0
2.0
Window function
Unit
Lower
switch value
Upper
switch value
Increment*
-28.0 .. 149.0
-27.0 .. 150.0
1.0
-18.0 .. 300.0
-16.0 .. 302.0 2.0


window function)
adjustable from 0 .. 750 seconds
Model code:
ETS 3 8 X X 150 X00
8 = Electrical connection for separate temperature probe

Output
Measuring range
-30 .. +150 C (-22 .. +302 F)
Modification number
000 = Display in C
400 = Display in F
Note:
Accessories:
A male cable connection M12x1, 4 pole, to connect the separate temperature probe
Other accessories, such as electrical connectors, clamps for wall-mounting, etc. can

TFP 104 - 000 with male electr. conn. 4 pole Binder series 714 M18
Part no. 904969

Part no. 921330
Part no. 906170
Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.
4pole/5pole
Pin
ETS 386-2
ETS 386-3
+UB
+UB
SP 2
Analogue
0V
0V
SP 1
SP 1
M12x1, 5 pole
4
3
5
E 18.329.2/11.13
126
M12x1
2
Pin
ETS 388-5
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
SP 2
Note:

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 1700
The electronic temperature switch

ETS 1700 is used mainly together
with the temperature probe TFP 100,
mounting.
The 4-digit display can indicate the
actual temperature, one of the switching
points or the maximum temperature
value.
The maximum temperature indicates
the highest temperature which has
occurred since the unit was switched on
or was last reset.
The 4 switching outputs can be used to
control heating and cooling processes
in hydraulic systems, for example.
Four switching and switch-back points
which are independent of each other
can be adjusted very simply via the
keypad.
An analogue output (4 .. 20 mA or
0 .. 10 V) is also available for integration
into monitoring systems (e.g. with PLC).
Special features:
4-digit display
Simple operation due to
key programming
4 limit relays, switching points and
switch back points can be adjusted
independently
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V)
Optional mounting position
(sensor connection on the top/
bottom, keypad and display
can be turned through 180)
Technical data:
Input data
0 .. +100 C, (+32 .. 212 F)
Measuring range1)
Output data
1.0 C ( 2.0F)
0.25 % FS
Repeatability

Signal selectable:

4 .. 20 mA

0 .. 10 V

corresponds in each case to 0 .. +100 C
Switch outputs
Type
4 relays with change-over contacts in

2 groups

(common supply of each group
connected)
Switching voltage
0.1 .. 250 V AC / DC
Switching current
0.009 .. 2 A per output
Switching capacity
400 VA, 50 W

> 20 million at minimum load
Switching cycles

> 1 million at maximum load
-25 .. +60 C
-40 .. +80 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
5g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
Shock resistance to
10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
IP 65
Other data
Supply voltage
22 .. 32 V DC
Current consumption
approx. 200 mA
10 %
Display

Weight
~ 800 g
Note:


1)
E 18.303.4/11.13
Description:
127
Setting options:
The microprocessor integrated into the

ETS 1700 enables many useful extra
functions in addition to the switching
functions, when compared with a normal
mechanical temperature switch.
It is possible, for example, to activate
switching delay times or to change the
relay switching direction.
All settings are made via the keypad.

Switching point relays 1 to 4:

1.5 .. 100 % of the measuring range
Switching point relays 1 to 4:
1 .. 99 % of the measuring range
or alternatively
Switch-back hystereses 1 to 4:
1.. 99 % of the measuring range
Switching direction of the relays 1 to 4

(N/C or N/O function)
Switch-on delay relays 1 to 4 in the
range from 0.0 .. 900.0 seconds
Switch-off delay relays 1 to 4 in the
range from 0.0 .. 900.0 seconds
Switch-back mode
(alternatively switch-back point or
switch-back hysteresis)
Display of the actual temperature, a
switching point or of the peak value
Display range individually selectable
in C or F
Measurement unit (C, F) is displayed
Analogue output (4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V)
Programming lock
Model code:
ETS 1 7 0 X 100 000
Type of sensor
0 = For PT 100 sensors
Display
1 = 4-digit display C
2 = 4-digit display F
Measuring range
0 .. 100 C, (+32 .. 212 F)
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
PG cable glands, mounting bolts, a 5 pole female connector (Binder series 681) for
connecting the separate temperature probe and a 3 m sensor cable
(LIYCY 4 x 0.25 mm) are supplied with the instrument.
Other accessories, such as vibration mounts etc. can be found in the Accessories
brochure.

TFP 104 - 000 with male electr. conn. 4 pole Binder series 714 M18 Part No.: 904696
Part No.: 921330
Part. No.: 906170
Dimensions:
cable gland PG11
countersunk to DIN74-KM5
Device connection
Pin
+UB
0V
Analogue output Signal +
Analogue output Signal - (0 V)
Relay 1 N/C
Relay 1 N/O
Relay 2 N/C
Relay 2 N/O
10
Relay 3 N/C
11
Relay 3 N/O
12
13
Relay 4 N/C
14
Relay 4 N/O
connector female
Probe connection
E 18.303.4/11.13
Pin
128
+UB
Signal +
n.c.
Signal -
0V
Note:

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Temperature Probe
TFP 100
Description:
The TFP 100 temperature probe was

developed primarily for tank installation.
The PT 100 precision resistor in
4-conductor design can be connected
directly to HYDAC temperature
switches ETS 3800, ETS 380 and
ETS 1700.
The standardised electrical connection
also means that other evaluation or
control systems (e.g. PLC) can easily
be connected.
For adaptation to different applications
and fluids, a nickel-plated brass
installation sleeve which is pressure
resistant up to 10 bar is available as an
accessory.
Special features:
Measurement circuit configured as

four-conductor circuit
Simple to install
For universal application
Technical data:
Temperature probe TFP 100

Temperature range
-40 .. +125 C (-40 .. +257 F)
Male Binder series 714 M18, 4 pole

Male M12x1, 4 pole
Brass
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
0.3 .. 1.0 mA
Sensor current
Tank installation sleeve for TFP 100 (Accessory, not supplied)
Pressure resistance
10 bar
CuZn39Pb3 (brass), nickel-plated
Model code:
Separate temperature probe
4 = Male, 4 pole Binder series 714 M18m (connector supplied)
6 = Male, 4 pole M12x1 (connector not supplied)
Modification number
000 = Standard
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

Binder S714, 4 pole
Pin connections:
Binder series
714 M18
TFP 10X 000
M12x1
male electr. conn.

M12x1 - 4 pole
Tank installation
sleeve for TFP100
(to be ordered separately)
Part No.: 906 170
hex. SW27
Sensor resistance
Note:

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.330.2/11.13
Male connection
4 pole
Binder, Series 714
or M12x1
129
Sensors for distance and position

7
Using various measuring techniques, HYDAC offers different distance and

position sensors for a wide array of mobile and stationary applications.
Linear position sensors operate on the physical principle of
magnetostriction.
This measuring principle determines with high accuracy the position,
distance and/or speed signal, if required, and is based on elapsed time
measurement.
Utilizing this non-contact and wear-free measuring technique, HYDAC
offers different versions in a pressure-resistant stainless steel housing for
part or full integration in hydraulic cylinders.
Linear position transducers for mobile applications:
Page
HLT 1000-R2 131
Linear position transducers for stationary applications:
Page
HLT 2100-R1 133
HLT 2500-F1 137
HLT 2500-L2 141
The ultrasonic distance sensor is a non-contact, highly compact sensor
for measuring the distance to fluids and objects.
By definition, its functional principle (measurement of sound transmission
time) means that it operates with an extremely high resolution and
measurement rate.
Electronic ultrasonic distance sensor:
Page
HLS 528 145
50 to
4,000
up to
6,000

Analogue output
CANopen Version
Device Net
Profibus
EtherCAT
SSI
E 180.000.2 /11.13
130
1 (PWM)
OEM product for large

volume production
Enhanced functional safety
HLS 200
50 to
4,000
HLS 100
50 to
4,000
IWE 40
HLS 528
50 to
2,500
IES 2010 /
2015 / 2020
HLT 2500-L2
For cylinder installation
HLT 2500-F1
Measurement range in mm
HLT 2100-R1
Sensors for
distance and position
HLT 1000-R2
Further distance and position sensors for special applications can be

found in the Chapter "OEM Products for High Volume Production".
Note:
Linear Position Transducer

HLT 1000-R2
The sensor works on the principle of

magnetostriction.
This measuring principle determines
with high accuracy the position,
distance and/or speed and is based
on elapsed time measurement.
On the basis of this non-contact and
wear-free measurement system,
HYDAC offers a version in pressureresistant stainless steel housing for
complete integration in hydraulic
cylinders.
The different output signals
(analogue/CANopen) facilitate
the connection of all HYDAC
ELECTRONIC GMBH measurement
systems (e.g. also to PLC controls).
The main areas of application are in
mobile hydraulics.
Special features:
High accuracy,
e.g. 0.05 % FS for CANopen
Very robust housing
High resistance to shock and
vibration
Non-contact and wear-free
Persuasive price /
performance ratio
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
50 .. 2500 mm
Measured variable
Distance, position, speed
Cylinder-integrated
Housing
Stainl. steel: pressure resistance 450 bar
Output data
Signal output
Current: 4 .. 20 mA or

20 .. 4 mA

Voltage: 0 .. 10 V or

10 .. 0 V

0.25 .. 4.75 V or

4.75 .. 0.25 V
CANopen
Measuring accuracy
Analogue CANopen
Resolution
12 bit
0.1 mm

min. 0.1 mm
0.05 % FS
0.05 % FS
Non-linearity
Hysteresis
0.1 mm
0.1 mm
Repeatability
0.1 mm
0.1 mm
Temperature coefficient
0.01 % FS / C 0.003 % FS / C
Installation position and travel speed Optional
-40 .. +85 C
Relative humidity
90 %, non-condensing
-40 .. +85 C, dry
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
20 g
15 g
at 5 kHz
Shock resistance to
50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-2 (11 ms)
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EMC
- Emitted interference
DIN EN 61000-6-3
- Interference resistance
DIN EN 61000-6-2
Housing /
Stainless steel, pressure-resistant
IP 67
Protection class to IEC 60529 1)
Other data
Flying leads
Electrical connection 1)
Separate male panel mount connection
M12x1
Supply voltage
12 .. 30 V DC
Current consumption without load
max. 100 mA
Weight
Depends on length
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage and excess voltage protection are
provided.

FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measuring range
1)

Other versions are possible.
E 18.372.3/11.13
Description:
131
Model code:
HLT 1 1 0 0 R2 XXX XXX XXXX 000
Mobile
Pin connections:
Cable outlet
Design/Geometry type
= Rod
1
R2 = Cylinder-integrated
Cable output
K01 = Flying lead, length 1 m
Separate male panel mount connection M12x1
(4 pole for signal output analogue
5 pole for signal output CANopen)
L06 = 60 mm cable length
Core
Analogue
CANopen
brown
+UB
+UB
white
0V
0V
green
Analogue
CAN_L
yellow
n.c.
CAN_H
M12x1, 4 pole
Signal output
C01 = Analogue 4 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor
B01 = Analogue 0 .. 10 V
G01 = Analogue 0.25 .. 4.75 V
G02 = Analogue 4.75 .. 0.25 V
CAN = CANopen
Pin
Measuring range in mm (50 to 2500 mm)

Example
0150 = 150 mm
Modification
000 = Standard
Notes:
Special models on request. On instruments with a different modification number,
please read the label or the technical amendment details supplied with the
instrument.
+UB
n.c.
0V
Signal
M12x1, 5 pole
4
3
5
Items supplied:
HLT 1100-R2
Installation instructions German/English
HLT 1100 CD incl. case
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as position magnets, etc. can be found in the
Accessories section of the Electronics brochure.
The recommended position magnet ZBL MR33, part no. 6084207, must be
ordered separately.
Dimensions:
Pin
Signal
n.c.
Description
+UB
0V
supply-
CAN_H
CAN_L
supply+
Note:
E 18.372.3/11.13
Damping zone
132
Measuring length
Zero position

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726

Rod Version
HLT 2100-R1

magnetostriction.
The measuring principle determines
with high accuracy the position,
distance and/or speed, and is based
on elapsed time measurement.
Utilizing this non-contact and wearfree measuring system, HYDAC
offers a version in a pressureresistant, tubular casing in stainless
steel, for direct installation into
hydraulic cylinders.
(analogue/digital) facilitate
The HLT 2100-R1 is primarily used
in stationary applications as a semiintegrated solution in hydraulic
cylinders.
Special features:

Very robust housing
vibration
Persuasive
price / performance ratio
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
50 .. 4000 mm
Measured variable
Threaded flange M18x1.5
Housing Aluminium
Hydraulic tube
Stainless steel

Pressure resist. 450 bar, 750 bar peak
Output data
Signal output analogue
Current: 4 .. 20 mA or 20 ... 4 mA

Voltage: 0 .. 10 V or 10 .. 0 V
Profibus, CANopen, Device Net, SSI,
Signal output digital
EtherCAT
Measuring accuracy
Resolution
max. 0.005 mm, 16 bit
Non-linearity
0.1 mm to 1,500 mm

0.15 mm > 1,500 mm
Repeatability
0.005 mm - 0.05 mm (length-dependent)
< 0.004 % FS / C (analogue)

< 0.0015 % FS / C (digital)
Installation position and travel speed
No restrictions
0 .. +70 C
Relative humidity
-30 .. +85 C, dry
Vibration resistance to DIN EN 60068-2-6
10 g
at 50 .. 2000 Hz
Shock resistance to DIN EN 60068-2-27
100 g / 11 ms / half sine
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EMC
DIN EN 61000-6-3
DIN EN 61000-6-2
Housing / Protection class to IEC 60529
Aluminium / IP 651)
Other data
- Analogue
- Flying lead, length 1 m1)

- Male M16, 6 pole

- Male M16, 8 pole
- CANopen, Device Net
Female M12x1, 5 pole

+ male M12x1, 5 pole
- Profibus
Female M12x1, 5 pole + male M12x1,

5 pole + male M8, 4 pole
- Synchronous Serial Interface
CONTACT male, 12 pole
- EtherCAT
2 female M12x1, 4 pole

+ male M8, 4 pole
Supply voltage
24 V DC 10 %
< 250 mA
Weight
Depends on length
provided.

1)

E 18.373.2/11.13
Description:
133
Model code:
HLT 2 1 0 0 R1 XXX XXX XXXX 000
Stationary
1
= Rod
R1 = Threaded flange M18x1.5
M06 = Male M16, 6 pole
Signal output CANopen, Device Net
C61 = Female M12x1, 5 pole + male M12x1, 5 pole
Signal output Profibus
P61 = Female M12x1, 5 pole + male M12x1, 5 pole
+ male M8, 4 pole
Signal output Synchronous Serial Interface
S01 = CONTACT male, 12 pole
Signal output EtherCAT
E51 = 2 female M12x1, 4 pole + male M8, 4 pole
Signal output
ETC = EtherCAT
SSI = Synchronous Serial Interface
CAN = CANopen
PRO = Profibus
DVN = Device Net
Example
0150 = 150 mm
Modification
000 = Standard
Notes:
instrument.
Items supplied:
HLT 2100-R1
E 18.373.2/11.13
Accessories:
Accessories section of the Electronics brochure. The recommended position
magnet ZBL MR33, part no. 6084207, must be ordered separately.
134
Dimensions:
Signal output: analogue (K01)
Damping zone = 62
Rod length
Measuring
range
Zero pos.
= 28
SW46
Flying leads
Magnet
Measuring rod in Cr/Ni alloy
Signal output: analogue (M06, M08)
6/8 pole Binder male
Signal output: CANopen

Device Net (C61)
5 pole male panel mount series M12 A-coded
5 pole female panel mount series M12

A-coded
Signal output: Profibus (P61)

B-coded
(PROFIBUS-OUT)
5 pole male panel mount series M12 B-coded
(PROFIBUS-IN)
4 pole male panel mount series M8
Signal output: Synchronous Serial

Interface (S01):
12 pole CONTACT
Signal output: EtherCAT (E51)

D-coded
Note:

For applications and operating conditions not described, please contact the relevant
technical department. Subject to technical modifications.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.373.2/11.13
4 pole male panel mount series M8
135
E 18.373.2/11.13
136

Flat Housing Design
HLT 2500-F1

magnetostriction.
with a high degree of accuracy the
position, distance and/or a velocity
signal based on elapsed time.
offers a flat housing version in
aluminium.
The HLT 2500-F1 is primarily used
in stationary applications, especially
when a semi-integrated solution in
hydraulic cylinders is not possible.
Special features:

Very robust housing
vibration
Persuasive
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
50 .. 4000 mm
Measured variable
Flat housing
Housing Aluminium
Output data
Current: 4 .. 20 mA or 20 ... 4 mA

Voltage: 0 .. 10 V or 10 .. 0 V
EtherCAT
Measuring accuracy
Resolution
max. 0.005 mm, 16 bit
0.1 mm
to 1,500 mm
Non-linearity

0.15 mm
> 1,500 mm
Repeatability
0.005 mm - 0.05 mm (length dependent)

< 0.0015 % FS / C (digital)
No restrictions
0 .. +70 C
Relative humidity
-30 .. +85 C, dry
10 g
at 50 .. 2000 Hz
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark
EMC
DIN EN 61000-6-3
DIN EN 61000-6-2
Other data
- Analogue


- Profibus

- EtherCAT

Supply voltage
Weight
Aluminium / IP 651)

- Male M16, 6 pole
- Male M16, 8 pole
+ male M8, 4 pole.
24 V DC 10 %
< 250 mA
Depends on length
provided.

1)

E 18.396.1/11.13
Description:
137
Model code:
HLT 2 5 0 0 F1 XXX XXX XXXX 000
Stationary
= Profile
5
F1
= Flat housing
+ male M8, 4 pole
Signal output
ETC = EtherCAT
CAN = CANopen
PRO = Profibus
DVN = Device Net
Example
0150 = 150 mm
Modification
000 = Standard
Notes:
instrument.
Items supplied:
HLT 2500-F1
E 18.396.1/11.13
Accessories:
Accessories section of the Electronics brochure. The recommended position
magnet ZBL MF 38-18, part no. 6084456, must be ordered separately.
138
Dimensions:
Rod length
Damping zone = 65
Measuring range
Zero pos. = 75
Flying leads
adjustable
Optional


Interface (S01):
12 pole CONTACT male

Device Net (C61)
Rod length
Damping zone = 65
Measuring range
Zero pos. = 56
5 pole male panel mount

series M12 A-coded
5 pole female panel mount

series M12 A-coded
adjustable
Optional

series M8
series M12 B-coded
(PROFIBUS-IN)
series M12 B-coded
(PROFIBUS-OUT)
4 pole male panel

mount
series M8
Note:


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.396.1/11.13

series M12 D-coded
139
E 18.396.1/11.13
140

Profile Design
HLT 2500-L2

magnetostriction.
with a high degree of accuracy the
position, distance and/or a velocity
signal based on elapsed time.
offers a version in an aluminium
profile housing with external
measuring slides or with a sliding
magnet for positioning by the
operator.
The HLT 2500-L2 is primarily used
in stationary applications, especially
when a semi-integrated solution in
hydraulic cylinders is not possible.
Special features:

Very robust housing
vibration
Contact-free and wear-free
Persuasive
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
50 .. 4000 mm
Measured variable
With magnet in position slide V
Housing Aluminium
Output data
Current: 4 .. 20 mA or 20 .. 4 mA

Voltage: 0 .. 10 V or 10 .. 0 V
EtherCAT
Measuring accuracy
Resolution
max. 0.005 mm, 16 bit
0.1 mm
to 1,500 mm
Non-linearity

0.15 mm
> 1,500 mm
0.005 mm - 0.05 mm (lengthRepeatability
dependent)

< 0.0015 % FS / C (digital)
No restrictions
0 .. +70 C
Relative humidity
-30 .. +85 C, dry
10 g
at 50 .. 2000 Hz
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark
EMC
DIN EN 61000-6-3
DIN EN 61000-6-2
Other data
- Analogue


- Profibus

- EtherCAT

Supply voltage
Weight
Aluminium / IP 651)

- Male M16, 6 pole
- Male M16, 8 pole
+ male M8, 4 pole
24 V DC 10 %
< 250 mA
Depends on length
provided.

1)
E 18.397.1/11.13
Description:
141
Model code:
HLT 2 5 0 0 L2 XXX XXX XXXX 000
Stationary
= Profile
5
L2
= With magnet in position slide V
+ male M8, 4 pole
Signal output
ETC = EtherCAT
CAN = CANopen
PRO = Profibus
DVN = Device Net
Example
0150 = 150 mm
Modification
000 = Standard
Notes:
instrument.
Items supplied:
HLT 2500-L2
ZBL MS35-39, position magnet
E 18.397.1/11.13
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as position magnets and mounting material can be
found in the Accessories section of the Electronics brochure.
142
Dimensions:
7
Rod length
Damping zone = 62
Measuring range
Zero pos. = 27
Flying leads
adjustable
M5x20 DIN912 (4x)

Device Net (C61)
5 pole male panel mount series

M12 A-coded

series M12 A-coded

series M12 B-coded
(PROFIBUS-IN)
series M8

series M12 B-coded
(PROFIBUS-OUT)

Interface (S01):
12 pole Contact male

series M12 D-coded
Note:


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.397.1/11.13

series M8
143
E 18.397.1/11.13
144
Electronic
Distance Sensor
HLS 528
The distance sensor HLS 528 is a

non-contact, highly compact sensor
for measuring distances to fluids and
objects.
By definition, its functional principle
(measurement of sound transmission
time) means that it operates with
an extremely high resolution and
measurement rate.
The HLS 528 is available for measuring
ranges up to 6000 mm and is available
in three signal output versions
(2 switching outputs; 1 analogue output,
either 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V, plus 1 or
2 switching outputs).
The sensor can be adjusted simply and
conveniently using two push-buttons
and a self-explanatory menu structure.
A 3-digit display indicates the latest
distance and 2 three-colour LEDs also
show the operating condition.
Special features:
Contact-free distance measurement

Measurement range up to 6000 mm
Various signal output
versions available
Very high resolution and
measurement rate
Integrated temperature compensation
3-digit display to show the latest
distance
2 three-colour LEDs to display
the operating status
Switching and switch-back points
can be adjusted independently
Selectable analogue output (optional)
Only for use in depressurised
applications
Technical data:
Input data
Operating range
Blind zone
Maximum range
Resolution
Output data
Accuracy
Repeatability
Versions
250;
350;
0 .. 30;
0 .. 85;
350;
600;
0.18 mm
Switching direction
Reaction time
Operating temperature
mark
Protection class to EN 60529
Other data
Supply voltage
Time delay before availability
Residual ripple
No-load current consumption
Housing
Controls
Display
Weight
3400;
0 .. 350;
5000;
6000 mm
0 .. 600 mm
8000 mm
1 % of the latest measured value

0.15 % of the latest measured value
2 switch outputs
1 switch outp. +1 analog. outp. /
2 switch outputs +
1 analogue output

Signal; selectable
(short-circuit resistant, invertible)
Switch outputs
Switching output
(short-circuit resistant)
1300;
0 ..200;
2000;
4 .. 20 mA,
RLmax = 100 (UB 20 V)
RLmax = 500 (UB > 20 V)
0 .. 10 V,
RLmin = 100 k (UB 18 V)
2 x PNP
Imax = 2 x 200 mA
1 x PNP
Imax = 200 mA
2 x PNP
Imax = 2 x 200 mA
N/O or N/C, adjustable

50;
70;
110;
180;
240 ms
-25 C .. +70 C
-40 C .. +85 C
DIN EN 60947-5-2
DIN EN 60947-5-7
IP 67
< 300 ms
10%
80 mA
Male M12x1, 5 pole
Brass, nickel-plated;
Ultrasonic transducer with PEEK film
2 push-buttons
3-digit, LED-display, 2 three-colour-LEDs
150;
150;
150;
210;
270 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage and short circuit protection are
provided.
E 18.383.1/11.13
Description:
145
Setting options:
7
Operational scanning range 350 mm:

HLS 528 are grouped in two easy-tonavigate menus.
adjustment of the instrument, a key-lock
can be set.
Plate
Round bar
10 mm

Switching
point*
M12x1, 5 pole
Hysteresis*
4
250 mm
30 .. 350 mm
1 .. 320 mm
350 mm
85 .. 600 mm
1 .. 515 mm
1300 mm
200 .. 999 mm
100 .. 200 cm
1 .. 999 mm
100 .. 180 cm
3400 mm
350 .. 999 mm
100 .. 500 cm
1 .. 999 mm
100 .. 465 cm
6000 mm
600 .. 999 mm
100 .. 800 cm
1 .. 999 mm
100 .. 740 cm
Plate
Window function distance

Oper.
scanning
range
Lower
switch value*
Upper
switch value*
250 mm
30 .. 348 mm
32 .. 350 mm
350 mm
85 .. 598 mm
87 .. 600 mm
1300 mm
200 .. 999 mm
100 .. 198 cm
202 .. 999 mm
100 .. 200 cm
3400 mm
350 .. 999 mm
100 .. 498 cm
352 .. 999 mm
100 .. 500 cm
6000 mm
600 .. 999 mm
100 .. 798 cm
602 .. 999 mm
100 .. 800 cm
* The increment for all units is 1 mm or cm.
Recording ranges
Round bar
27 mm
The dark-grey areas specify the range in

which the normal reflector (round bar) is
detected safely. This is the typical working
range of the sensors. The light grey areas
illustrate the range in which a very large
reflector, e.g. a very large plate, is still
detected, provided it is aligned optimally
to the sensor. Ultrasonic reflections cannot
be evaluated outside the light grey area.
Round bar
10 mm
E 18.383.1/11.13
Plate
Plate
Pin
HLS 528-2
+UB
D1 (switching output 1)
-UB (0 V)
Synchronisation
Pin
HLS 528-3
+UB
Analogue
-UB (0 V)
D (switching output)
Synchronisation
Pin
HLS 528-5
+UB
Analogue
-UB (0 V)
Plate
(for different objects):
3
5
Round bar
27 mm
146
Switching mode of the switching

outputs adjustable (switching point
function or window function)
outputs adjustable (N/C or
N/O function)
Switch-on delay adjustable from
0 to 20 seconds
Energy saving mode
Pin connections:
Switching point function distance

Oper.
scanning
range
Round bar
27 mm
Model code:
2 =
M30x1.5
Note:
HLS 5 2 8 - X - XXXX - 000 - F

described.
Output

Operational scanning range in mm
0250; 0350; 1300, 3400, 6000
Modification number
000 = Standard
Type of protection, front face of sensor
F = Foil
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
Operational scanning range:
250 mm 350 mm,1300mm
Buttons
Buttons

3400 mm 6000 mm
Buttons

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.383.1/11.13
Buttons
147
Electronic level sensors

In industry, level sensors are used for the most diverse tasks. In the main,
sensors which are based on capacitive, magnetostrictive or ultrasonic
measurement are used.
HYDAC ELECTRONIC has level sensors for each of these measurement
principles in its product range.
8
Electronic level switches for general applications:

Page
ENS 3000 (capacitive) 149
ENS 3000 IO-Link (capacitive) 153
HNS 3000 (magnetostrictive) 155
HNS 526 (based on ultrasound)
157
Electronic level measuring transmitter for general applications:
E 180.000.2 /11.13
Page
HNT 1000 (magnetostrictive) 161
148
Electronic
Level Switch
ENS 3000
Description:
The ENS 3000 is an electronic level

switch with integrated display. The
instrument has 1, 2 or 4 switching
outputs and an analogue output signal
is available as an option.
In addition to the standard minimum
and maximum switching signals,
with the 4 switching output version it
is possible to set additional warning
signals to prevent problems such as
tank overflow or aeration of the pump.
The ENS 3000 can be used for oil as
well as water. The fluid type can be
selected for specific applications via the
menu.
The main applications of the ENS 3000
are primarily in hydraulics, e.g. for fluid
level monitoring of a tank.
The ENS 3000 is available in standard
probe lengths of 250 mm, 410 mm,
520 mm and 730 mm.
The instrument is also available with
or without an integrated temperature
sensor.
Technical data:
Input data
Sensor type
Capacitive fluid level sensor
Probe lengths
250; 410; 520; 730 mm
Active zone
170; 290; 390; 590 mm
Max. speed of change

in fluid level
40; 60; 80; 100 mm/s
Repeatability1)
2 % FS
Switching point accuracy
2 % FS
Temperature (optional)
Sensor type
Semiconductor sensor
Measuring range
-25 .. +100 C
Accuracy
1.5 C
Reaction time (t90)
180 s
Output data

With 1 or 2 SP selectable

4 .. 20 mA ohmic resistance 500

0 .. 10 V ohmic resistance 1 k
corresponds to measuring range selected
With 4 SP (only with temperature sensor)

0 .. 10 V ohmic resistance 1 k
Switch outputs
Type


programmable as N/O / N/C
Assignment On version with temperature measurement,

user can select temperature or fluid level
Switching current

1 or 2 SP: max. 1.2 A per output

4 SP:
Switching cycles
> 100 million
1, 2 or 4 independent PNP
transistor switching outputs
Selectable for use with oil or water
User-selectable switch outputs
based on the measured value
4-digit display
Simple to operate due to
menu-based key operation

mark
mark2)
0 .. +60 C
0 .. +60 C
-40 .. +80 C
0 .. +60 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
5g
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
25 g
IP 67
Other data
Max. tank pressure
0.5 bar (short-term 3 bar, t < 1 min)
Supply voltage



9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption

max. 2.47 A total

and 2 analogue outputs
5%
Fluids3)

Hydraulic oils (mineral based),

synth. oils, fluids containing water
Ceramic
Display


Weight
Note:

~ 180; 220; 250; 300 g

Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are provided.
1)
Specified for calm, non-turbulent fluid,
2)
3)
Other fluids on request
E 18.061.4/11.13
Special features:
149
Setting options:
All settings available on the ENS 3000 are

combined in 2 easy-to-navigate menus.
set.

Fluid level switching point function
Probe
length
in cm
Meas.
range
in cm
Switching
point
in cm *
Hysteresis
25.0
17.0
0.3 .. 17.0
0.1 .. 16.8
41.0
29.0
0.5 .. 29.0
0.2 .. 28.7
52.0
39.0
0.6 .. 39.0
0.2 .. 38.6
73.0
59.0
0.9 .. 59.0
0.3 .. 58.4

window function)

Switching outputs can be assigned to
fluid level or temperature, as required
adjustable from 0.00 .. 9999
seconds
Display can be adjusted (actual fluid
level, actual temperature, peak values,
switching point 1, 2, 3, 4 or display
off)
Analogue output can be assigned to
fluid level or temperature as required
(depending on model)
Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole
Pin
ENS
3X16-2
ENS
3X16-3
+UB
+UB
SP 2
Analogue
0V
0V
The increment for all units is 0.1 cm.
SP 1
SP 1
Fluid level window function
M12x1, 5 pole
Probe
length
in cm *
Upper
switch value
in cm
Lower
switch
value
in cm *
25.0
0.3 .. 16.7
0.4 .. 16.8
41.0
0.5 .. 28.4
0.7 .. 28.7
52.0
0.6 . 38.3
0.9 .. 38.6
73.0
0.9 .. 57.9
1.4 .. 58.4
in cm *
3
5

Fluid level offset function
Pin
ENS
3X18-5
+UB
Probe
length
in cm
Meas.
range
in cm *
Offset
Analogue
in cm *
0V
25.0
17.0
0 .. 68.0
SP 1
41.0
29.0
0 .. 116.0
52.0
39.0
0 .. 156.0
SP 2
73.0
59.0
0 .. 177.0
M12x1, 8 pole

6
Temperature switching point function

Unit
Meas.
range
Switching
point
Hysteresis
-25 .. +100
-23.0 .. +100.0
1.0 .. 123.5
3
8
1
The increment for all units is 0.5 C.
Temperature window function

Lower
switch value
Upper
switch value
-23.5 .. +97.5
-22.0 .. +98.5
+UB
SP 2
0V
SP 1
SP 3
SP 4
Analogue fluid level
Analogue temperature

shown.
E 18.061.4/11.13
ENS
3X1P-8
Unit
The increment for all units is 0.5 C.
150
Pin
Note:
Model code:
ENS 3 X 1 X X XXXX 000 K
Temperature sensor
1 = With temperature sensor
2 = Without temperature sensor
1 = 22 mm collar
to fit cutting ring coupling G22L
P = Male M12x1, 8 pole
Output
8 = 4 switching outputs and 2 analogue outputs
only in conjunction with electrical connection type "P"
Probe length (physical) in mm
0250; 0410; 0520; 0730
Modification number
000 = Standard
Probe material
K = Ceramic
Note:
Accessories:

described.
Dimensions:
dimension of contact M3 (earth screw M3
and lock washer M3 supplied)
Rear view
15 0.4
Installation
dimension
54
Installation
dimension
54
Designation
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
Inactive zone
(lower end)
approx.
22
approx.
28
approx.
34
approx.
50
Measuring
range
170
290
390
590
Probe length
250
410
520
730
Total length
340
500
610
820
Inactive zone
(upper end)
approx.
33
approx.
67
approx.
71
approx.
65
Installation
dimension
54

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.061.4/11.13
22 -0.2
Inactive zone
(lower end)
hex. SW27
29
Inactive zone
Measuring range (upper end) 25.1
Probe length
Total length
M12x1
151
E 18.061.4/11.13
152
Electronic
Level Switch
ENS 3000
The ENS 3000 with IO-Link

communication interface is an electronic
level switch with integrated display.
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V). The ENS 3000
can be used not only for oil but also for
water and is available with or without
temperature sensor.
The level switch series ENS 3000
been specially designed to connect
packaging industry.
Special features:
IO-Link interface
1 PNP transistor output
Selectable for use with oil or water
4-digit display
Display rotates in two axes for optimal
alignment
Technical data:
Input data
Sensor type
Probe length
Measuring range
Max. speed of change in the fluid level
Repeatability1)
Sensor type
Measuring range
Accuracy
Reaction time (t90)
Output data
Output signals
Analogue output
Signal
Switch outputs
Type
Assignment
Switching current
Switching cycles
Parameterisation

- mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Max. tank pressure
Supply voltage
Current consumption

Fluids2)
Display
Weight
Capacitive level sensor

250; 410; 520; 730 mm
170; 290; 390; 590 mm
40; 60; 80; 100 mm/s
2 % FS
2 % FS
Semi-conductor sensor
-25 .. +100 C
1.5 C
180 s
selectable:

4 .. 20 mA load resistance max. 500

0 .. 10 V
load resist. min. 1 k

On version with temperature measurement
user-selectable temperature or fluid level
> 100 million
Via IO-Link interface,
with HYDAC programming device HPG 3000 or
push buttons on the ENS 3000
0 .. +60 C
0 .. +60 C
-40 .. +80 C
0 .. +60 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
5g
25 g
IP 67
0.5 bar (short-term 3 bar, t < 1 min)

and analogue output
5%
Hydraulic oils (mineral based),
synth. oils, fluids containing water
Ceramic
180 .. 300 g, dependent on the probe length
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are
provided.

1)

Specified for calm, non-turbulent fluid
2)

E 18.061.1.0/11.13
Description:
153
Upper limit of
SP / FH
17.0 / 25.0
0.2 / 0.3
17.0 / 16.8
29.0 / 41.0
0.3 / 0.5
29.0 / 28.7
39.0 / 52.0
0.4 / 0.6
39.0 / 38.6
59.0 / 73.0
0.6 / 0.9
59.0 / 58.4
Measuring
range
Increment*
in cm
Min. difference
betw. RP & SP
and FL & FH
in cm
17.0 / 25.0
0.1 / 0.1
0.1
29.0 / 41.0
0.2 / 0.2
0.1
39.0 / 52.0
0.2 / 0.3
0.1
59.0 / 73.0
0.3 / 0.5
0.1
in cm
in cm

shown.
SP = switch point
FL = level window lower value
FH = level window upper value

window function)
Switching outputs can be assigned to the
fluid level or temperature
Optional analogue output signal to
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
Analogue output can be assigned to fluid
level or temperature as required
(depending on version)
Pin connections:
1
3
Dimensions:
M12x1
22 -0.2
IO-Link
C/Q
L-
Standard IO
E 18.061.1.0/11.13
I/Q
154
Pin
1
2
Signal
L+
I/Q
3
4
LC/Q
Description
Supply voltage
analogue output
Gnd
ENS 3 X 1 6 L XXXX 000 K
Temperature sensor
1 = With temperature sensor
2 = Without temperature sensor
1
= Collar 22
6
Output
= IO-Link interface
L
Probe length, physical
0250; 0410; 0520; 0730 mm
Modification number
000 = Standard
Probe material
K = Ceramic
Notes:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical connection
adaptors, splash guards, etc. can be found in the Accessories brochure.
hex. SW27
29
M12x1, 4 pole
L+
Model code:

Rear view
15 0.4
Dimension of contact M3 (earth

screw M3 and lock washer
M3 supplied)
Lower
limit of
RP / FL
in cm
42
installation
dimension
54
Total length
Measuring
range/
probe length
in cm
Measuring range
Probe length
Baud rate
38.4 kBaud *
Cycle time
2.5 ms
Process data width
16 Bit
Frame type
2.2
Specification
V1.1
*C
25.1

outputs:
Inactive zone
(upper end)

ENS 3000 as well as the menu structure
VDMA Standard for level switches.
Inactive zone
(lower end)
Setting options:
Designation
Inactive zone
(lower end)
Measuring
range
Probe length
Total length
Inactive zone
(upper end)
[mm]
approx.
22
[mm]
approx.
28
[mm]
approx.
34
[mm]
approx.
50
170
290
390
590
250
340
approx.
33
410
500
approx.
67
520
610
approx.
71
730
820
approx.
65
Note:

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Level Switch
HNS 3000
technical data:
The HNS 3000 is an electronic level

switch with integrated display.
The float-based sensor for highprecision analogue monitoring of
the fluid level has 1, 2 or 4 switching
outputs and an analogue output signal
is available as an option.
In addition to the conventional minimum
and maximum switching signal, with
the 4 output version it is possible to set
additional warning signals to prevent
problems such as tank overflow or
aeration of the pump.
The main applications of this HNS 3000
are primarily in hydraulics, e.g. for fluid
level monitoring of a tank.
The sensor is available in probe lengths
from 250 to 2500 mm. The instrument
is also available with or without
temperature sensor.
Depending on the application, several
different floats are available, e.g.
stainless steel for aggressive media or
plastic.
Input data
Sensor type
Measuring ranges
Probe length1)
Max. speed of change in fluid level
Repeatability2)
Sensor type
Measuring range
Accuracy
Reaction time (t90)
Output data
With 1 or 2 SP selectable
Special features:
Switching cycles
Max. tank pressure
- mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-27
other data
Supply voltage (UB)
z 1, 2 or 4 independent PNP transistor

switching outputs
z User-selectable switch outputs
based on the measured value
z Switching and switch-back points
z Selectable analogue output available
as an option
z 4-digit display
z Various types of float available
With 4 SP (only with temperature sensor)

Switch outputs
Type
Assignment
Switching current
Current consumption (without output)

Fluids
Float
Display
Weight (dependent on the probe length)
Note:
1)
2)
Magnetostrictive
178; 208; 298; 338; 448; 658 mm
250; 280; 370; 410; 520; 730 mm
Optional
1 % FS
1 % FS
Semi-conductor sensor
-25 C .. +100 C
1.5 C
< 100 s
4 .. 20 mA load resistance 500

0 .. 10 V
load resistance 1 k
corresponds to measurement range selected
0 .. 10 V
load resistance 1k
corresponds to measurement range selected
programmable as N/O / N/C
On version with temperature measurement
user-selectable temperature or fluid level
1 or 2 SP:
4 SP:
> 100 million
3 bar (short-term 10 bar, t < 1 min)
-40 .. +85C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +120 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
7.5 mm (5 .. 8.2 Hz)
2.0 g (8.2 .. 150 Hz)
20 g (11ms)
IP67
150 mA
250 mV
Hydraulic oils, cooling lubricants
Stainless steel (1.4301 / 1.4571)
PP (polypropylene); 0.6 kg/dm3
~ 1000 g
Other probe lengths on request
E 18.061.2.0/11.13
Description:
155
Pin connections:
Model code:

M12x1, 4 pole
8
Pin
1
2
3
4
HNS 3X26-2
+UB
SP 2
0V
SP 1
HNS 3X26-3
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
M12x1, 5 pole
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
HNS 3X28-5
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
SP 2
HNS 3 X X X X XXXX 000
Temperature sensor
= With temperature sensor
1
= Without temperature sensor
2
2
= G3/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
6
only for output models "2" and "3"
8
possible only for output model "5"
P = Male M12x1, 8 pole
only for output model "8"
Output
2
3
= 2 switching outputs and 1 analogue output
5
only in conjunction with electrical connection code type "8"
= 4 switching outputs and 2 analogue outputs
8
only in conjunction with electrical connection type "P"
0250; 0280; 0370; 0410; 0520; 0730
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
M12x1
M12x1, 8 pole
6
44
3
8
1
38
16
SW 32
G 3/4 A
100 %
Probe length
HNS 3X2P-8
+UB
SP 2
0V
SP 1
SP 3
SP 4
Analogue level
Analogue temperature
0%
50
Immersion depth
at density 1
34
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
23.5
E 18.061.2.0/11.13
Note:
156

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Level Switch
HNS 526
The level switch HNS 526 is a noncontact, highly compact sensor for
fluid level measurement in stationary
applications.
By definition, its functional principle
(measurement of sound transmission
time) means that it operates with
an extremely high resolution and
measurement rate.
The HNS 526 is available for
measurement ranges up to 6400 mm
and is obtainable in different signal
output variants (2 switching outputs;
1 switching output and 1 analogue
output, either 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V).
The sensor can be adjusted simply
and conveniently via two push-buttons
and a self-explanatory menu structure
according to VDMA.
The actual fluid level can be displayed in
a 3-digit digital display either in absolute
value or in percent (selectable);
2 three-colour LEDs also indicate the
operating status.
Technical data:
Input data
Operating range
Blind zone
Maximum range
Resolution
Output data
Accuracy
Repeatability
Signal
(short-circuit resistant)
Non-contact distance measurement

Measurement range up to 6400 mm
Various signal output
versions available
Very high resolution and
measurement rate
Integrated temperature compensation
3-digit digital display to show
the actual distance
2 three-colour LEDs to display
the operating status
Only for use in depressurised
applications
Must be installed vertically to the fluid
surface
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (10 .. 55 Hz)
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-27 (11 ms)
Protection class to EN 60529
Other data
Supply voltage
Time delay before availability
Residual ripple
No-load current consumption
Housing
Controls
Display
Weight
1600;
4000;
0 .. 200; 0 .. 350;
2000;
5000;
6400 mm
0 .. 600 mm
8000 mm
1 % of the actual measured value

0.15 % of the actual measured value
selectable:
4 .. 20 mA,
0 .. 10 V,
Switch outputs
Type
Switching current
Switching direction
Switching cycles
Reaction time
mark
Special features:
280;
480;
0 .. 30;
0 .. 85;
350;
600;
0.18 mm
RLmax = 100 (UB 20 V)

RLmax = 500 (UB > 20 V)
RLmin = 100 k (UB 20 V)
PNP transistor output (short-circuit resistant)

max. 200 mA per switching output
N/O or N/C, adjustable
> 100 million
32; 64; 92; 172; 240 ms
-25 C .. +70 C
-40 C .. +85 C
DIN EN 60947-5-2
DIN EN 60947-5-7
2g
30 g
IP 67
< 300 ms
10%
80 mA
Male M12x1, 4 pole
Brass, nickel-plated;
Ultrasonic transducer with PEEK film
2 push-buttons
3-digit, LED-display, 2 three-colour-LEDs
150;
150;
150;
210;
270 g
Note:
Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage and short circuit protection are
provided.
E 18.604.0/11.13
Description:
157
Setting options:
All the terms and symbols used for

setting the HNS 526 as well as the menu
structure comply with the specifications
of the German Engineering Federation
Standard (VDMA 24574-4) for level
switches.
adjustment of the device, a key-lock can
be set.
8
Plate
Round bar
27 mm

switching points
or switch-back points:
SP1, SP2,
FH1, FH2 *
RP1, RP2,
FL1, FL2*
280 mm
2 .. 32 cm
2 .. 13 inch
1 .. 31 cm
1 .. 12 inch
480 mm
2 .. 59 cm
2 .. 23 inch
1 .. 58 cm
1 .. 22 inch
1600 mm
2 .. 180 cm
2 .. 71 inch
1 .. 179 cm
1 .. 70 inch
4000 mm
2 .. 465 cm
2 .. 183 inch
1 .. 464 cm
1 .. 182 inch
2 .. 740 cm
2 .. 291 inch
1 .. 739 cm
1 .. 290 inch
6400 mm
Plate
Round bar
27 mm
Window function.
FH1, FH2 = upper switch values 1 or 2
FL1, FL2 = lower switch values 1 or 2
Plate
Round bar
27 mm
Recording ranges
(for different objects):
The grey areas show the detection range

for a very large reflector, e.g. a fluid
surface, providing the sensor is ideally
positioned. Outside the grey area, it is
not possible to evaluate the ultrasonic
reflections.
Plate
E 18.604.0/11.13
158
Plate
Round bar
11 mm
Switching mode of the switching

outputs adjustable (switching
point function or window function)
outputs adjustable
(N/C or N/O function)
Switch-on delay adjustable from
0 to 20 seconds
Energy saving mode
M12x4, 4 pole
Switching point function:

SP1, SP2 = switching points 1 or 2
RP1, RP2 = switch-back points 1 or 2
* The increment for all devices is 1 cm or

1 inch.
Pin connections:
Switching point function distance and

window function distance
Oper.
scanning
range
Round bar
27 mm
Pin
HNS 526-2
HNS 526-3
+UB
+UB
SP2
I/U
0V
0V
SP1
SP1
Model code:
2 = M30x1.5
Note:
HNS 5 2 6 - X - XXXX - 000 - F

described.
8
Output

Operational scanning range in mm
0280; 0480; 1600, 4000, 6400
Modification number
000 = Standard
Design, front face of sensor
F = Foil
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
280 mm 480 mm,1600 mm
Buttons
Buttons
51
84
Buttons
6400 mm
Buttons

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.604.0/11.13

4000 mm
159
E 18.604.0/11.13
160
Electronic
Level Transmitter
HNT 1000
The level transmitter HNT 1000 is a

float-based sensor for highly accurate
analogue recording of fluid levels.
The sensor is available in probe lengths
from 250 to 2500 mm. HYDAC offers
the HNT 1000 in a pressure-resistant
stainless steel housing for in-tank
installation.
Depending on the application, a variety
of different floats are available, e.g.
stainless steel for aggressive media or
plastic.
The output signals enable connection
to all HYDAC ELECTRONIC GMBH
as well as connection to standard
evaluation systems (e.g. PLC controls).
Special features:
Probe lengths from 200 to 2500 mm

Process connection:
G3/4 A threaded connection
High degree of accuracy
Very robust housing
Highly resistant to shock and
vibration
Various float variants available
Technical data:
Input data
Sensor type
Measuring ranges
Probe length1)
Max. speed of change in fluid level
Output data
Output signal
Accuracy to DIN 16086 2)
to DIN 16086
Repeatability
Hysteresis
Rise time
Max. tank pressure

mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-27
Other data
Supply voltage (UB)
Fluids
Float
Weight (dependent on probe and cable lengths)
magnetostrictive
178; 208; 298; 338; 448; 658 mm
250; 280; 370; 410; 520; 730 mm
No orientation restrictions
4 .. 20 mA load 500
0 .. 10 V load 1 k
1 % FS
1 % FS
1 % FS
1 % FS
30 ms
3 bar (short-term 10 bar, t < 1 min)
-40 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +120 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
7.5 mm (5 .. 8.2 Hz)
2.0 g (8.2 .. 150 Hz)
20 g (11ms)
IP67
9 .. 36 V DC
100 mA
250 mV
Hydraulic oils, cooling lubricants
PP (polypropylene); 0.6 kg/dm3
~ 1000 g
1)
Other probe lengths on request
2)
E 18.604.1.0/11.13
Description:
161
Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole
8
Pin
1
2
3
4
HNT 1226
+UB
n.c.
0V
Signal
M12x1, 5 pole
Model code:

HNT 1 2 2 X X XXXX 000
Temperature sensor
= Without temperature sensor
2
2
= G 3/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
1
= Flying lead, 2 m
6
8
Output
C = 4 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor
0250; 0280; 0370; 0410; 0520; 0730
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
in the Accessories section of the Electronics brochure.
Dimensions:
44
HNT 1228
+UB
n.c.
0V
Signal
n.c.
Male connector
M12x1, 4 pole
44
SW 32
M12x1
38
16
SW 32
16
38
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
G 3/4 A
100 %
G 3/4 A
100 %
Core
brown
white
green
yellow
HNT 1221
+UB
0V
Signal
n.c.
Probe length
Immersion depth
at density 1
0%
34
34
0%
50
Immersion depth
at density 1
50
Probe length
Cable outlet
23.5
23.5
E 18.604.1.0/11.13
Note:
162


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.604.1.0/11.13
163
FLOw RATE TRANSMITTERS

FLOw SwITCHES
To measure the flow rate in machines and systems HYDAC ELECTRONIC
offers various flow rate transmitters and flow switches.
The flow rate transmitter of the EVS 3000 series operates according to
the turbine principle (measuring the rpm of an impeller rotating in the fluid
flow). Depending on the model, additional connection ports are available for
pressure and/or temperature transmitters.
The HYDAC flow switches and transmitters in the HFS 2000 and
HFT 2000 series are based on the variable area float principle. The
test medium deflects a spring-loaded float in the direction of the flow,
depending on the flow rate. A reed contact is attached to the outside of the
instrument. When the magnet inside the float reaches the preset position,
the reed contact will switch.
Electronic flow rate transmitters for general
applications:
Page
165
167
EVS 3110
EVS 3100
Electromechanical flow switches and transmitters for general applications:

Page
169
173
177
181
HFS 2100
HFS 2500
HFT 2100
HFT 2500
Further flow rate transmitters for special applications can be found in the
section "Service Instruments".
EVS 3110
EVS 3100
HFS 2100
HFS 2500
HFT 2100
HFT 2500
Flow rate
sensors,
flow
switches
10
10
Pressure-resistant
Water-based media
Oil / viscous fluids
Direction of flow optional
Installation position optional
Max. number of switching

contacts
E 180.000.2 /11.13
Analogue output
164
Display
ATEX Intrinsically safe
note:
Not all feature combinations are possible. For precise information, please consult the relevant data
sheet.
Electronic
Flow Rate Transmitter
EVS 3110
for Water-Based Fluids
9
The flow rate transmitters in the

EVS 3110 series (stainless steel
series) are specially designed for use
in hydraulic and other fluid technology
systems.
They operate according to the turbine
principle, i.e. the speed of an impeller
turning in the fluid flow is measured
and converted into a 4 ... 20 mA
analogue signal.
On the EVS 3110 stainless steel
range, the impeller has a carbide
bearing and the resulting increased
robustness also makes it suitable
for use in pulsating, dynamic
applications.
Two further G1/4 threaded holes
in the turbine housing allow
additional devices to be connected,
e.g. temperature and pressure
transmitters.
Special features:
Suitable for pressures up to 400 bar

Viscosities of 1 .. 100 cSt
Output signal 4 .. 20 mA
Additional connection of
temperature and / or
pressure transmitters possible
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges1) and operating pressure
EVS 311X-A-0020
1.2 .. 20.0 l/min
400 bar
EVS 311X-A-0060
6.0 .. 60.0 l/min
400 bar
15.0 .. 300.0 l/min
400 bar
EVS 311X-A-0300
EVS 311X-A-0600
40.0 .. 600.0 l/min
400 bar
Additional connection options
2 x G1/4 female threads for pressure and/
or temperature sensors

Output data

RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
2 % of the actual value
Accuracy
-20 .. +70 C
-20 .. +70 C
-40 .. +100 C
-20 .. +90 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
IP 65 (Binder 714 M18)

IP 67 (M12x1, when an IP 67 connector
is used)
Other data
Housing material
Stainless steel
Water-based fluids
Test medium2)
Viscosity range
1 .. 100 cSt
Calibration viscosity
5 cSt
10 .. 32 V DC
Supply voltage
5%
Weight ~ 1790 g ( 1.2 .. 20.0 l/min)
~ 2100 g ( 6.0 .. 60.0 l/min)
~ 3320 g (15.0 .. 300.0 l/min)
~ 3500 g (40.0 .. 600.0 l/min)
Note:

1)
2)

E 18.313.3/11.13
Description:
165
Model code:
EVS 3 1 1 X A XXXX 000
Housing material
1 = Stainless steel
Signal
Measuring range
0020 = 1.2 .. 20 l/min
0060 = 6.0 .. 60 l/min
0300 = 15.0 .. 300 l/min
0600 = 40.0 .. 600 l/min
Modification number
000 = Standard
Pin connections:
Pin
EVS 3114-A
reserved
Signal +
Signal -
reserved
M12x1
Note:
Accessories:
Pin
EVS 3116-A
Signal +
reserved
Signal -
reserved
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

4 pole
male electr. conn.

Binder series 714 4 pole
Note:
E 18.313.3/11.13
Model
166
Meas.
range
[l/min]
D / SW
Torque
value
[Nm]
DN
[mm] [mm]
[mm]
EVS 311X-A-0020 1.2 .. 20
117
135
47 / 46
G"
60
EVS 311X-A-0060
144
135
48.5 / 46
G"
130
11
EVS 311X-A-0300 15 .. 300 155
150
63.5 / 60
G1"
500
22
EVS 311X-A-0600 40 .. 600 181
150
63.5 / 60
G1"
600
30
6 .. 60
[mm]

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
EVS 3100
for Oils / Viscous Fluids
9
The flow rate transmitters of the

EVS 3100 series (aluminium series)
are specially designed for use in
hydraulic and other fluid technology
systems.
They operate according to the turbine
principle, i.e. the speed of an impeller
turning in the fluid flow is measured
and converted into a 4 ... 20 mA
analogue signal.
Two further G1/4 threaded holes
in the turbine housing allow
additional units to be connected,
e.g. temperature and pressure
transmitters.
Special features:

Technical data:
Input data
EVS 310X-A-0020
1.2 .. 20.0 l/min
400 bar
EVS 310X-A-0060
6.0 .. 60.0 l/min
400 bar
15.0 .. 300.0 l/min
400 bar
EVS 310X-A-0300
EVS 310X-A-0600
40.0 .. 600.0 l/min
315 bar
2 x G1/4 female threads for pressure and/
or temperature sensors

Output data

RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
Accuracy
-20 .. +70 C
-20 .. +70 C
-40 .. +100 C
-20 .. +90 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
IP 65 (Binder 714 M18)

is used)
Other data
Housing material
Aluminium
Hydraulic oils
Measuring medium2)
Viscosity range
1 .. 100 cSt
30 cSt
10 .. 32 V DC
Supply voltage
5%
Weight ~ 730 g ( 1.2 .. 20.0 l/min)
~ 860 g ( 6.0 .. 60.0 l/min)
~ 1410 g (15.0 .. 300.0 l/min)
~ 1530 g (40.0 .. 600.0 l/min)
Note:

1)
2)

E 18.331.2/11.13
Description:
167
Model code:
EVS 3 1 0 X A XXXX 000
Housing material
0 = Aluminium
Signal
Measuring range
0020 = 1.2 .. 20 l/min
0060 = 6.0 .. 60 l/min
0300 = 15.0 .. 300 l/min
0600 = 40.0 .. 600 l/min
Modification number
000 = Standard
Pin connections:
Pin
EVS 3104-A
reserved
Signal +
Signal -
reserved
M12x1
Note:
Accessories:
Pin
EVS 3106-A
Signal +
reserved
Signal -
reserved
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

4 pole
male electr. conn.

Binder series 714
4 pole
Note:
E 18.331.2/11.13
Model
168
Meas.
range
[l/min]
D / SW
[mm] [mm] [mm]
Torque
value
[Nm]
DN
[mm]
EVS 310X-A-0020 1.2 .. 20
117
135
47 / 46
G"
60
EVS 310X-A-0060
144
135
48.5 / 46
G"
130
11
EVS 310X-A-0300 15 .. 300 155
150
63.5 / 60
G1"
500
22
EVS 310X-A-0600 40 .. 600 181
150
63.5 / 60
G1"
600
30
6 .. 60

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electro-mechanical
Flow Switch
HFS 2100
9
The HYDAC flow switches of the

HFS 2100 series are based on a variable
area float principle and are positionindependent. The test medium deflects
a spring-loaded float in the direction of
flow, depending on the flow rate. A reed
contact is fitted to the outside of the
device and is therefore separate from
the flow circuit. When the magnet inside
the float reaches the preset position, the
reed contact will switch.
To protect it from external influences,
the switch is encapsulated in a casing
designed to allow steplessly variable
adjustment.
The instruments are designed to be
capable of monitoring threshold values
reliably, even when the viscosity
fluctuates. The kinematic viscosity may
vary between 30 and 600 cSt.
The main areas of application are:
- Central lubrication systems
- Oil circuit lubrication systems
- Transformers
- Cooling systems and circuits
- Lubrication circuits
- Hydraulic systems
- Pumps
- Welding machines and laser systems
- Chemical industry
- Research & development
Medium:
Oils / viscous fluids
Special features:
Accuracy 10 % FS
Viscosity compensation from
30 .. 600 cSt
Any mounting position
High level of functional reliability
High level of switching accuracy
Stepless switch point setting by user
High pressure resistance
Threaded connection
ATEX version also available for
potentially explosive areas.
Technical data:
Input data
Switching ranges [l/min]
Size 1
Size 2

0.5 .. 1.6
0.5 .. 1.5

0.8 .. 3.0
1 .. 4

2.0 .. 7.0
2 .. 8

3 .. 10

5 .. 15

8 .. 24
10 .. 30
15 .. 45
20 .. 60
30 .. 90
35 .. 110
Operating pressure
Brass version
300 bar
250 bar
350 bar
300 bar
Stainless steel version
Pressure drop [bar]
0.02 .. 0.2
0.02 .. 0.4
See dimensions
Brass version
Stainl. st. 1.4571; FPM 1); Brass,

(nickel-pl.); Brass; Hard ferrite
Stainl. st. 1.4571; FPM 1); Hard ferrite
Output data
Switching outputs2)
1 or 2 reed contacts

Change-over or N/O type
10 % FS
Accuracy3)
Repeatability
2 % FS max.
Switching capacity
Change-over contact 4)
max.
max.
Male connection EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) 250 V / 1.5 A / 50 VA 250 V / 1.5 A / 50 VA
Male connection M12x1
125 V / 1.5 A / 50 VA 250 V / 1.5 A / 50 VA
N/O contact
max.
max.
Male connection EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) 230 V / 3 A / 60 VA 250 V / 3 A / 100 VA
125 V / 3 A / 60 VA 250 V / 3 A / 100 VA
-20 .. +70 C
Male connection EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) -20 .. +120 C (optional -20 .. +160 C)
-20 .. +85 C
Viscosity range
30 .. 600 cSt
mark
Directive 2006 / 95 / EC

IP 65
Other data
Housing material
Brass (nickel-pl.) or stainl. steel 1.4571
Male connection EN175301-803

(DIN 43650)

Note: FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measuring range
1)
Other seal materials available on request

2)
The contact opens / switches when the flow falls below the pre-set switching point.

3)
3% possible when calibrated to a certain viscosity
4)
Minimum load 3 VA

E 18.379.1/11.13
Description:
169
Model code:
HFS 2 1 X X XX XXXXXXXX 7 X X 000
Measuring principle
2 = Variable area float
Measuring medium
1 = Oils / viscous fluids
Mechanical
connection 4) 5)
1 = 1/4
2 = 3/8
3 = 1/2
4 = 3/4
5 = 1
5 = Male EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
3 pole + PE,
6 = Male M12x1, 4-pole
Switching contacts 6)
1S = 1 N/O contact
2S = 2 N/O contacts
1W = 1 Change-over contact
2W = 2 Change-over contacts
Switching ranges in l/min 5)
Oil 10 % -Size 100.5-01.6; 00.8-03.0; 02.0-07.0
Oil 10 % -Size 200.5-01.5; 0001-0004; 0002-0008; 0003-0010;
0005-0015; 0008-0024; 0010-0030; 0015-0045;
0020-0060; 0030-0090; 0035-0110
Accuracy
7 = 10.0 % FS
Housing material
B = Brass, nickel-plated
S = Stainless steel
Mechanical indicator
0 = Without indicator
1 = With indicator
Modification number
000 = Standard
4) Mechanical connection options depend on housing type
(see Dimensions)
5) Other models available on request.
6) When the model with 2 switching contacts is selected, the second contact is fitted
on the side of the instrument, at 90 to the first contact.
Note:
E 18.379.1/11.13
Accessories:
170
Pin connections:
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
HFS 21X5-XS
HFS 21X5-XW
Centre
Centre
N/O contact
N/C contact
n.c.
N/O contact
Housing
Housing
M12x1
Pin
HFS 21X6-XS
HFS 21X6-XW
Centre
Centre
n.c.
N/C contact
n.c.
n.c.
N/O contact
N/O contact
Notes on installation:
The medium must not contain

solid particles! We recommend
using contamination strainers.
External magnetic fields can affect the
switching contact.
Ensure sufficient distance from
magnetic fields (e.g. from electric
motors)!
Dimensions without indicator:

G
OIL -Size 1- without indicator

Installation dimensions
[l/min]
[mm]
0.5 .. 1.6
0.8 .. 3.0
2.0 .. 7.0
*)
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
DN
SW
8
10
15
24
24
27
1/4
3/8
1/2 *)
98
108
90
400
450
350
15
27
1/2
90
350
Type
Standard
SW

Type
Installation
dimensions
[mm]
[l/min]
0.5 .. 1.5
1 ..
2 ..
3 .. 10
5 .. 15
8 .. 24
10 .. 30
15 .. 45
20 .. 60
30 .. 90
35 .. 110
DN
SW
8
15
20
25
34
34
34
40
1/4
1/2
3/4
1 *)
152
152
152
130
10
14
15
17
1500
1425
1340
1160
15
20
25
34
34
40
1/2
3/4
1 *)
152
152
130
14
15
17
1425
1340
1160
20
25
34
40
3/4
1 *)
152
130
15
17
1340
1160
25
40
130
17
1160
Standard
E 18.379.1/11.13
*)
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
171
Dimensions with indicator:

OIL -Size 1- with indicator
[l/min]
[mm]
DN
SW
15
30
1/2
90
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
L
Type
0.5 .. 1.6
0.8 .. 3.0
570
2.0 .. 7.0

Type
Installation
dimensions
[mm]
[l/min]
0.5 .. 1.5
1 ..
2 ..
3 .. 10
5 .. 15
8 .. 24
10 .. 30
15 .. 45
20 .. 60
30 .. 90
35 .. 110
E 18.379.1/11.13
*)
172
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
DN
SW
8
15
20
25
34
34
34
40
1/4
1/2
3/4
1 *)
152
152
152
130
10
14
15
17
1590
1515
1430
1250
15
20
25
34
34
40
1/2
3/4
1 *)
152
152
130
14
15
17
1515
1430
1250
20
25
34
40
3/4
1 *)
152
130
15
17
1430
1250
25
40
130
17
1250
Standard
Note:

For applications and operating conditions not described, please contact the
relevant technical department.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electro-Mechanical
Flow Switch
HFS 2500
for Water or Water-Based Media
9
The HYDAC Flow Switch in the series

HFS 2500 is based on the variable area
float principle. The test medium deflects
a spring-loaded float in the direction of
flow, depending on the flow rate. A reed
contact is fitted to the outside of the
instrument and is therefore separate
from the flow circuit. When the magnet
inside the float reaches the pre-set
position, the reed contact will switch.
To protect it from external influences,
the switch is encapsulated in a casing
designed to allow steplessly variable
adjustment.
The instruments in the HFS 2500 series
are available in two versions, with 5%
accuracy and with 10% accuracy.
Areas of application are to monitor flow
rate in fluids (water / water-based) in the
following areas, amongst others:
- Hydraulic systems
- Pumps
- Medical technology
- Pharmaceutical industry
- Chemical industry
Fluid:
Water / water-based media
Special features:
Accuracy 5 % or 10 % FS
High level of function reliability
Threaded connection
ATEX version also available
for potentially explosive atmospheres
Note:

FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring

range
1) Other seal materials available on request
2) The contact opens / switches when the flow falls
below the pre-set switching point.
3) Minimum load 3 VA
Technical data:
Input data
Operating pressure
Brass version
Pressure drop [bar]
Brass version
Output data
Switching outputs 2)
Accuracy
Repeatability
Switching capacity
Change-over contact 3)
Male connection
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
N/O contact
Male connection
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Environmental Conditions
Male connection
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
mark
Other data
Housing material
5 % accuracy
0.2 .. 4.0
0.6 .. 5.0
0.5 .. 8.0
10 % accuracy
Size 1
Size 2
8 .. 90 0.005..0.06 0.02 .. 0.2
5 .. 110 0.04 .. 0.13 0.2 .. 0.6
10 .. 150 0.1 .. 0.6
0.4 .. 1.8
1 .. 14
1 .. 28
2 .. 40
4 .. 55
35 .. 220 0.2 ..
35 .. 250 0.4 ..
0.5 ..
1.0 ..
1.2
2.0
3.0
5.0
1 .. 70
200 bar
300 bar
0.02 .. 0.8
See dimensions
0.8 .. 3.2
2 .. 7
3 .. 13
4 .. 20
Size 3
10 .. 30
15 .. 45
20 .. 60
30 .. 90
60 .. 150
8 .. 30
300 bar
350 bar
0.02 .. 0.2
300 bar
350 bar
0.02 .. 0.3
250 bar
300 bar
0.02 .. 0.4
Stainless steel 1.4571; NBR 1); Brass; nickel-plated; Brass;

Hard ferrite
Stainless steel 1.4571; FPM 1); Hard ferrite
Change-over or N/O type 2)
5 % or 10 % FS
2 % FS max.
max.
- 250 V
- 1.5 A
- 50 VA
max.
- 250 V
- 1.5 A
- 50 VA
max.
- 250 V
-3A
- 100 VA
max.
- 250 V
-3A
- 100 VA
max.
- 200 V
-1A
- 20 VA
max.
- 125 V
-1A
- 20 VA
max.
- 200 V
-1A
- 20 VA
max.
- 125 V
-1A
- 20 VA
max.
- 250 V
- 1.5 A
- 50 VA
max.
- 125 V
- 1.5 A
- 50 VA
max.
- 230 V
-3A
- 60 VA
max.
- 125 V
-3A
- 60 VA
max.
- 250 V
- 1.5 A
- 50 VA
max.
- 250 V
- 1.5 A
- 50 VA
max.
- 250 V
-3A
- 100 VA
max.
- 250 V
-3A
- 100 VA
-20 .. + 70 C
-20 .. +100 C (optional -20 .. +160 C)
-20 .. +85 C
IP 65
Brass (nickel-plated) or stainless steel 1.4571
Male connection EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
E 18.384.1/11.13
Description:
173
Model code:
HFS 2 5 X X XX XXXXXXXX X X X 000
Measuring principle
Test medium
5 = Water or
water-based
Mechanical
connection 4)5)
1 = 1/4 "
2 = 3/8 "
3 = 1/2 "
4 = 3/4 "
5 = 1 "
6 = 1 1/4 "
7 = 1 1/2 "
5 = Male EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
3 pole + PE
6 = Male M12x1, 4-pole
1S = 1 N/O contact
2S = 2 N/O contacts
Water 5 %
00.2-04.0; 00.6-05.0; 00.5-08.0;
01.0-0014; 01.0-0028; 02.0-0040; 04.0-0055;
01.0-0070; 08.0-0090; 0005-0110; 0010-0150;
0035-0220; 0035-0250;
====================================
Water 10 % - Size 1 - (only available without mech. indicator)
.005-0.06; 0.04-0.13; 00.1-00.6; 00.2-01.2;
00.4-02.0; 00.5-03.0; 01.0-05.0
Water 10 % - Size 2 0.02-00.2; 00.2-00.6; 00.4-01.8; 00.8-03.2;
02.0-07.0; 03.0-0013; 04.0-0020; 08.0-0030
Water 10 % - Size 3 0010-0030; 0015-0045; 0020-0060;
0030-0090; 0060-0150
Accuracy
6 = 5.0 % FS
7 = 10.0 % FS
Housing material
B = Brass (nickel-plated)
S = Stainless steel
1 = With indicator
Modification number
000 = Standard
(see Dimensions)
6) When the model with 2 switching contacts is selected, the second contact is fitted
on the side of the instrument at 90 to the first contact.
E 18.384.1/11.13
Note:
174
Accessories:
Pin connections:
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
HFS 25X5-XS
HFS 25X5-XW
Centre
Centre
N/O contact
N/C contact
n.c.
N/O contact
Housing
Housing
M12x1
Pin
HFS 25X6-XS
HFS 25X6-XW
Centre
Centre
n.c.
N/C contact
n.c.
n.c.
N/O contact
N/O contact
The medium must not contain solid

particles! We recommend using
contamination strainers.
External magnetic fields can affect
the switching contact.
motors)!

Type
[l/min]
[mm]
SW
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
DN
1/4
3/8
1/2
8
10
15
14
130
850
Water 5 % Accuracy
0.2 .. 4.0
0.6 .. 5.0
0.5 .. 8.0
27
30
86
27
30
86
1/2
3/4
15
20
14
16
148
174
900
34
40
40
40
96
96
3/4
1
20
25
18
19
152
156
1400
1100
10 .. 150
50
50
101
1 1/4
32
21
200
2750
35 .. 220
50
50
106
1 1/4
32
21
200
3000
35 .. 250
60
50
107
1 1/2
40
24
200
3800
1 .. 14
1 .. 28
2 .. 40
4 .. 55
1 .. 70
8 .. 90
5 .. 110
Water 10 % Accuracy - Size 1-
0.005..0.06
0.04..0.13
0.1..0.6
0.2..1.2
17
18
56
1/4
10
65
140
15
15
90
350
0.4..2.0
0.5..3.0
1.0..5.0
Water 10 % Accuracy - Size 2 0.02 .. 0.2

0.2 .. 0.6
0.4 .. 1.8
0.8 .. 3.2
2.0 .. 7.0
27
31
67
1/2
3.0 .. 13.0
4.0 .. 20.0
8.0 .. 30.0
Water 10 % Accuracy - Size 3 10 .. 30

15 .. 45
20 .. 60
41
47
93
3/4
1 *)
20
25
21
17
152
130
1200
1050
41
47
93
25
17
130
1050
60 .. 150
*)
Standard
E 18.384.1/11.13
30 .. 90
175

G
Type
[l/min]
[mm]
SW
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
DN
1/4
3/8
1/2
8
10
15
Water 5 % Accuracy
0.2 .. 4.0
0.6 .. 5.0
0.5 .. 8.0
27
30
86
1 .. 14
14
130
940
B
1 .. 28
27
30
86
1/2
3/4
15
20
14
16
148
174
990
34
40
40
40
96
96
3/4
1
20
25
18
19
152
156
1490
1190
10 .. 150
50
50
101
1 1/4
32
21
200
2840
35 .. 220
50
50
106
1 1/4
32
21
200
3090
35 .. 250
60
50
107
1 1/2
40
24
200
3890
4 .. 55
1 .. 70
8 .. 90
5 .. 110
D +17
2 .. 40
Water 10 % Accuracy - Size 20.02 .. 0.2

0.2 .. 0.6
0.4 .. 1.8
0.8 .. 3.2
2.0 .. 7.0
30
30
70
1/2
15
15
90
570
3.0 .. 13.0
4.0 .. 20.0
8.0 .. 30.0
Water 10 % Accuracy - Size 3 10 .. 30

15 .. 45
20 .. 60
41
47
93
3/4
1 *)
20
25
21
17
152
130
1430
1250
41
47
93
25
17
130
1250
30 .. 90
60 .. 150
E 18.384.1/11.13
*)
176
Standard
Note:

For applications or operating conditions not described, please contact the

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Flow Transmitter
HFT 2100
9
The HFT 2100 series of HYDAC flow

transmitters is based on the variable
area float principle.
Irrespective of the installation position,
the test medium deflects a spring-loaded
float in the direction of flow, depending
on the flow rate.
A Hall sensor which detects the position
of the float, is fitted to the outside of the
instrument and is therefore separate to
the flow circuit.
In proportion to the deflection of the float,
the sensor produces an analogue signal
which corresponds to the particular
measuring range.
The device is calibrated for vertical
installation and for an upwards flow
direction. The transmitter is designed
to give reliable measurements within its
accuracy range, even with changes in
viscosity. The kinematic viscosity may
vary between 30 and 600 cSt.
The areas of application include:
- Central lubrication systems
- Oil circuit lubrication systems
- Transformers
- Lubrication circuits
- Hydraulic systems
- Pumps
- Chemical industry
Medium:
Special features:
Accuracy 10 % FS
30 .. 600 cSt
Threaded connection
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges [l/min]
Size 1
Size 2

0.5 .. 1.6
0.5 .. 1.5

0.8 .. 3.0
1 .. 4

2.0 .. 7.0
2 .. 8

3 .. 10

5 .. 15

8 .. 24
10 .. 30
15 .. 45
20 .. 60
30 .. 90
35 .. 110
Operating pressure
Brass version
300 bar
250 bar
350 bar
300 bar
Pressure drop [bar]
0.02 .. 0.2
0.02 .. 0.4
See dimensions
Brass version
Stainl. st. 1.4571; FPM 1); Brass,

nickel-plated; Brass; Hard ferrite
Stainl. st. 1.4571; FPM 1); Hard ferrite
Output data
Output signal

10 % FS
Accuracy2)
Repeatability
1 % FS max.
-20 .. +70 C
-20 .. +70C
Viscosity range
30 .. 600 cSt
mark
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage
18 .. 30 V
Power consumption
<1W
Housing material
Measuring body
Brass (nickel-plated) or st. steel 1.4571
Transmitter
Brass (nickel-plated)
1)

2)
3 % possible with calibration to a certain viscosity

E 18.395.1/11.13
Description:
177
Model code:
HFT 2 1 X 6 X XXXXXXXX 7 X 0 000
Measuring principle
Measuring medium
Mechanical
connection 2) 3)
1 = 1/4
2 = 3/8
3 = 1/2
4 = 3/4
5 = 1
Output signal
Measuring ranges in l/min 3)
Oil 10 % - Size 1 00.5-01.6; 00.8-03.0; 02.0-07.0
Oil 10 % -Size 200.5-01.5; 0001-0004; 0002-0008; 0003-0010;
0005-0015; 0008-0024; 0010-0030; 0015-0045;
0020-0060; 0030-0090; 0035-0110
Accuracy
7 = 10.0 % FS
Housing material
S = Stainless steel
Modification number
000 = Standard
(see Dimensions)
Note:
E 18.395.1/11.13
Accessories:
178
Pin connections:
M12x1
Pin
HFT 21X6-C
HFT 21X6-B
+UB
+UB
reserved
reserved
GND
GND
4 .. 20 mA
0 .. 10 V

External magnetic fields can
affect the switching contact.
motors)!
Dimensions:
Size 1
Installation
dimensions
[mm]
[l/min]
0.5 .. 1.6
0.8 .. 3.0
2.0 .. 7.0
*)
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
DN
SW
8
10
15
24
24
30
1/4
3/8
1/2 *)
98
119
90
610
660
560
15
30
1/2
90
560
Type
Standard
SW
SW
Size 2
[l/min]
[mm]
0.5 .. 1.5
1 ..
2 ..
3 .. 10
5 .. 15
8 .. 24
10 .. 30
15 .. 45
20 .. 60
30 .. 90
35 .. 110
DN
SW
8
15
20
25
34
34
34
40
1/4
1/2
3/4
1 *)
152
152
152
130
10
14
15
17
1510
1435
1350
1170
15
20
25
34
34
40
1/2
3/4
1 *)
152
152
130
14
15
17
1435
1350
1170
20
25
34
40
3/4
1 *)
152
130
15
17
1350
1170
25
40
130
17
1170
T
G
SW
Standard
Note:


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.395.1/11.13
*)
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
SW
Type
179
E 18.395.1/11.13
180
Electronic
Flow Transmitter
HFT 2500
for water / water-based media
9
The HFT 2500 series of HYDAC flow

transmitters is based on the variable
area float principle and is positionindependent.
The test medium deflects a springloaded float in the direction of flow,
depending on the flow rate but
irrespective of the installation position.
A Hall sensor is fitted to the outside of
the device and is therefore also outside
the flow circuit. It determines the position
of the float.
The sensor emits an analogue signal
proportional to the deflection of the
float which corresponds to the relevant
measurement range.
The device is calibrated for vertical
installation and for a flow direction from
bottom to top.
Areas of application are to monitor flow
rate in fluids (water / water-based) in the
following areas, amongst others:
- Hydraulic systems
- Pumps
- Medical technology
- Pharmaceutical industry
- Chemical industry
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges [l/min]
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
0.005..0.06
0.02 .. 0.2
10 .. 30
0.2 .. 4.0
8 .. 90
0.04 .. 0.13
0.2 .. 0.6
15 .. 45
0.6 .. 5.0
5 .. 110
0.1 .. 0.6
0.4 .. 1.8
20 .. 60
0.5 .. 8.0
10 .. 150
0.2 .. 1.2
0.8 .. 3.2
30 .. 90
1 .. 14
35 .. 220
0.4 .. 2.0
2 .. 7
60 .. 150
1 .. 28
35 .. 250
0.5 .. 3.0
3 .. 13
1.0 .. 5.0
4 .. 20
4 .. 55
8 .. 30
1 .. 70
Brass version
300 bar
300 bar
250 bar
200 bar
350 bar
350 bar
300 bar
300 bar
Pressure drop [bar]
0.02 .. 0.2
0.02 .. 0.3
0.02 .. 0.4
0.02 .. 0.8
See dimensions

Brass version
Stainl. steel 1.4571; NBR 1); Brass (nickel-pl.); Brass; Hard ferrite
Output data
Output signal
4 .. 20 mA, 3-conductor
0 .. 10 V, 3-conductor
Accuracy
3 % FS
Repeatability
1 % FS
-20 .. +70 C
Water or water-based media
-20 .. +70 C
Special features:
Protection class to
IEC 60529
Accuracy 3 % FS
Threaded connection
2 .. 40
Operating pressure
Medium:
Size 4
mark

IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage
18 .. 30 V DC
Power consumption
<1W
Housing material
Measuring body
Transmitter

Brass (nickel-plated)

1) Other seal materials available on request
E 18.601.0/11.13
Description:
181
Model code:
HFT 2 5 X 6 X XXXXXXXX 5 X 0 000
Measuring principle
Test medium
5 = Water /
water-based
Mechanical
connection 2)
1 = 1/4
2 = 3/8
3 = 1/2
4 = 3/4
5 = 1
6 = 1 1/4
7 = 1 1/2
Output signal
Measuring ranges in l/min
Size 1
.005-0.06; 0.04-0.13; 00.1-00.6; 00.2-01.2; 00.4-02.0;
00.5-03.0; 01.0-05.0
Size 2
0.02-00.2; 00.2-00.6; 00.4-01.8; 00.8-03.2; 02.0-07.0;
03.0-0013; 04.0-0020; 08.0-0030
Size 3
0010-0030; 0015-0045; 0020-0060; 0030-0090; 0060-0150
=============================================
Size 4
00.2-04.0; 00.6-05.0; 00.5-08.0; 01.0-0014; 01.0-0028;
02.0-0040; 04.0-0055;
01.0-0070; 08.0-0090; 0005-0110; 0010-0150;
0035-0220; 0035-0250
Accuracy
5 = 3.0 % FS
Housing material
S = Stainless steel
Modification number
000 = Standard
(see Dimensions)
Note:
E 18.601.0/11.13
Accessories:
182
Pin connections:
M12x1
Pin
HFT 25X6-C
HFT 25X6-B
+UB
+UB
reserved
reserved
GND
GND
4 ..20 mA
0 ..10 V
The medium must not contain

solid particles! We recommend
using contamination strainers.
switching contact.
motors)!
Dimensions:
Type
[l/min]
[mm]
SW
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
DN
Size 1
SW
0.005..0.06
0.04..0.13
G
T
D
B
0.2..1.2
0.1..0.6
17
18
39
1/4
10
65
210
0.4..2.0
T
G
0.5..3.0
1.0..5.0
Size 2
SW
0.02 .. 0.2
0.2 .. 0.6
2.0 .. 7.0
B
L
0.4 .. 1.8
0.8 .. 3.2
30
30
62
1/2
15
14
90
560
3.0 .. 13.0
4.0 .. 20.0
8.0 .. 30.0
Size 3
10 .. 30
15 .. 45
20 .. 60
SW
34
40
40
40
40
62
3/4
1 *)
20
25
15
17
152
130
1200
1050
25
17
130
1050
G
T
30 .. 90
62
60 .. 150
T
G
Size 4
0.2 .. 4.0
0.6 .. 5.0
0.5 .. 8.0
1/4
3/8
1/2
8
10
15
1/2
3/4
14
131
900
15
20
14
16
146
174
950
20
25
18
19
152
156
1420
1120
1 1/4
32
21
200
2770
72
1 1/4
32
21
200
3020
72
1 1/2
40
24
200
3820
27
40
52
27
32
40
52
34
40
40
40
62
62
10 .. 150
50
50
72
35 .. 220
50
50
35 .. 250
60
50
1 .. 14
SW
G
D
T
B
2 .. 40
4 .. 55
1 .. 70
8 .. 90
5 .. 110
1 .. 28
3/4
1
T
G
SW
Note:

applications described. For applications and operating conditions not
described, please contact the relevant technical department. Subject to
technical modifications.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.601.0/11.13
*) Standard
183
speed sensors
The contact-free speed sensors of the HSS series detect the movement
of ferromagnetic structures, such as gear wheels, gear rims or perforated
discs, using the changes in magnetic flux.
Speed sensors for general applications:
Page
Electronic Speed Sensor HSS 110
185
187
189
191
193
E 180.000.2/11.13
10
184
Electronic
Speed Sensor
HSS 110
The contact-free speed sensors of the

HSS 110 series detect the movement of
ferromagnetic structures, such as gear
wheels, gear rims or perforated discs,
using the changes in magnetic flux.
So each sensor has two Hall elements
and the differential between the two
signals is detected, evaluated and then
converted into an output signal suitable
for processing.
For integration into standard controls,
standard output signals are available.
Due to their extremely compact design,
the robust housing and protection
class IP 6K9K, the devices can be
used in almost any application and any
mounting position.
The main fields of application are
detection of speed and rotation direction
on gear wheels with small module and
high resolution, especially in vehicles
and mobile machines with electrical and
hydraulic drives.
Special features:
z
1-channel Hall differential sensor
z Different signal outputs available
z Extremely compact design
z Wide frequency range
z Alignment required on installation
z Large air gap
technical data:
Input data
Frequency range
Probe length
Probe diameter
Max. pressure on sensing surface
Air gap / installation distance
Type of installation
Torque value
Housing material
Seal
Output data
Variants
Types
Switching capacity / current rating
Direction of rotation
Signal level
Media resistance of housing
mark
EN 60068-2-64
Shock resistance to
EN 60068-2-27
to ISO 20653
other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption
Average life expectancy
Weight
Note:
NPN: 0.1 .. 20,000 Hz

PWM: 1.0 .. 5,000 Hz
18.4 mm
10.2 / 9.4 mm
25 bar, static
Module 1:
0.2 .. 0.8 mm
Module 1.25: 0.2 .. 1.4 mm
Module 1.5: 0.2 .. 1.8 mm
Module 2:
0.2 .. 2.4 mm
Module 3:
0.2 .. 2.9 mm
Flange, single, asymmetrical,
cable outlet 90
Dependent on direction
(with asymmetrical flange)
max. 8 Nm
Brass
FPM
10
1-channel frequency
or
1-channel frequency / direction of rotation
(PWM)
1 NPN frequency output
or
1 PWM output, 4 .. 20 mA
NPN: 40 mA
PWM: 200 mA
Flange on left, gear turns to right,
for duration of PWM signal pulse
LOW: 0.6 V / 4 .. 9 mA PWM
HIGH: +UB / 12 ..17 mA PWM
-40 .. +140 C
Salt water; various hydraulic oils; diesel oils;
cleaning agent; salt spray
DIN EN 60947-5-2
0.05 g2 / Hz, 20 .. 2,000 Hz
100 g, 6 ms, 3x in each direction
IP 67
IP 6K9K
Flying leads, 3-core, cable length 1 m
NPN: 12.5 .. 32 V DC
PWM: 4.5 .. 20 V DC
5%
< 30 mA at 30 V DC
200,000 h (MTTF)
~ 50 g
Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage and short circuit protection (max. 50 mA)
are provided.
E 18.606.0/11.13
Description:
185
Pin connections:
Core
red
black
blue
HSS 110-1
+UB
0V
Frequency
HSS 110-4
+UB
PWM
Mounting position tolerance:
Model code:

HSS 1 1 0 X 018 000
Signal type
= Output 1: Frequency
1
= Output 1: Frequency and direction of rotation PWM
4
Probe length
018 = 18.4 mm
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Dimensions:
(18.6)
3.7
0
18.4 -0.25
0
10.2 -0.2
10
10.31 +0.025
0
(9)
15
1.8
M6
9.4 0.1
13.7 +0.10
0
Specification for installation

cavity:
5.2
10.31
13 +0.2
0
6.1 +0.2
0
13 +0.2
0
R
7
7.1 0.2
E 18.606.0/11.13
Note:
186

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Speed Sensor
HSS 120

for processing.
The instruments are available
for different insertion depths. For
integration into standard controls,
class IP 69K, the instruments can be
mounting position.
on gear wheels with a small module and
and mobile machines with hydraulic
drives.
Special features:
z 2-channel Hall differential sensor

z Alignment required when installing
z Large air gap
technical data:
Input data
Frequency range
Probe length
probe diameter
Torque value
Housing material
Seal
Output data
Variant
Type
Switching capacity
Signal level
mark
EN 60068-2-64
Shock resistance to
EN 60068-2-27 / -29
to ISO 20653
other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption
Weight
Note:
0.1 .. 20,000 Hz
30; 35; 45 mm
15 / 12 mm
15 bar, dynamic
Probe length: 30 mm
35 / 45 mm
Module 1:
0.2 .. 1.0 mm
0.2 .. 1.3 mm
Module 1.25: 0.2 .. 1.5 mm
0.2 .. 1.8 mm
Module 1.5:
0.2 .. 1.7 mm
0.2 .. 2.0 mm
Module 2:
0.2 .. 2.2 mm
0.2 .. 2.5 mm
Module 2.5:
0.2 .. 3.2 mm
0.2 .. 3.5 mm
Flange, single, asymmetrical,
cable outlet 90 (30 mm) / axial (35, 45 mm)
10 Nm
Brass
FPM
10
2-channel speed
(90 / 270 phase shift for module 2)
2 NPN frequency outputs
50 mA
10 k ohmic load
2.2 nF capacitive load
Flange on left, gear turns to right:
channel A lagging; channel B leading
LOW: 0.5 V
HIGH: +UB
-40 .. +140 C
(-40 .. +160 C for max. 500 operating hours)
Salt water; various hydraulic oils; diesel oils;
cleaning agent; salt spray
DIN EN 60947-5-2
30 g, 10 .. 500 Hz,
100 min in each direction

IP 67
IP 69K
Flying leads, 4-core, cable length 1 m

7 .. 30 V DC
5%
< 30 mA at 30 V DC
200,000 h (MTTF)
~ 80 g
Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage and short circuit protection
(max. 50 mA) are provided
E 18.607.0/11.13
Description:
187
Pin connections:
Core
brown
blue
black
white
Model code:

HSS 120-2
+UB
Frequency 1 (A)
0V
Frequency 2 (B)
Adjustment angle for other

modules:
It is possible to achieve a 90 phase shift
of the two frequency signals by turning the
sensor through the angle indicated in the
table below.
HSS 1 2 0 2 XXX 000
Signal technology
= Outputs 1 and 2: Frequency (90 phase shift)
2
Probe length
030 = 30 mm
035 = 35 mm
045 = 45 mm
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Dimensions:
15
6.
.
R5
R
10

cavity:
10
2.4
.5
M6
min. 9
min. 1.5
A
35
90.25
O-ring 11.8 x 1.8

FPM V80
.4
R0
R0.4
15 HB
1.6*
12
20
15
4
12
0
+15
15.1
16.5
10
Probe length (A): 35 mm, 45 mm
Module 1
Module 1.25
Module 1.5
Module 2
Module 2.5
4.50.25
-20
-15
-10
0
Probe length: 30 mm
1,000 +50
0
12
* For sealing function RA 1.6,

otherwise 3.2
4.50.25
90.25
4.70.15
150.1
0
15 -0.10
O-ring 11.8 x 1.8

FPM V80
30
19.5
0
12 -0.10
E 18.607.0/11.13
Note:
188


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Speed Sensor
HSS 130

for processing.
The instruments are available
in different insertion depths. For
integration into standard controls,
class IP 69K, the devices can be used
in almost any application and any
mounting position.
These devices are mainly used for
on rotary sensors, also under extreme
environmental conditions.
Special features:

z Single-core seal
z Very high EMC resistance
z Large air gap
technical data:
Input data
Frequency range
Probe length
probe diameter
Torque value
Housing material
Seal
Output data
Variants
Types
Switching capacity
Signal level
mark
EN 60068-2-36
Shock resistance to
EN 60068-2-27
to ISO 20653
other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption
Weight
Note:
0.1 .. 20,000 Hz
16; 32 mm
18 mm
10 bar, dynamic
Module 1:
0.2 .. 1.3 mm
Module 1.25: 0.2 .. 1.8 mm
Module 1.5:
0.2 .. 2.0 mm
Module 2:
0.2 .. 2.5 mm
Module 2.5:
0.2 .. 3.5 mm
Double flange, asymmetrical,
cable outlet at 90
10 Nm
Brass / plastic (PA6 GF30)
FPM
10
2-channel speed (90 phase shift)

or
2-channel speed / direction of rotation
or
1 NPN frequency output +
1 NPN direction of rotation output
500 mA
Cable outlet at 90, gear rotation to right:
channel A leading; channel B lagging
or
rotational direction signal
(right: HIGH / left: LOW)
LOW: 2 V
HIGH: UB - 2 V
-40 .. +125 C
Saltwater, various hydraulic oils
DIN EN 60947-5-2
5 .. 57 Hz (1.5 mm p-p)
57 .. 2000 Hz (10 g)
15 g, 11 ms, in each direction
25 g, 6 ms, in each direction
IP 67
IP 6K9K
Flying leads, 4-core, 43 cm cable length
8 .. 32 V DC
5%
< 33 mA at 24 V, both outputs LOW
< 23 mA at 24 V, both outputs HIGH
120,000 h (MTTF)
~ 110 g
provided.
E 18.608.0/11.13
Description:
189
Pin connections:
HSS 130-2
+UB
0V
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
HSS 130-3
+UB
0V
Frequency
Direction of
rotation
Adjustment angle
for other modules:
table below.
Signal technology
= Outputs 1 and 2: Frequency
2
(90 phase shift)
3
Output 2: Direction of rotation
Probe length
016 = 16 mm
032 = 32 mm
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Dimensions:
Module 1
Module 1.25
Module 1.5
Module 1.75
Module 2
Module 2.25
Module 2.5
Module 2.75
Module 3
10
HSS 1 3 0 X XXX 000
24.5
27
0
+4
+8
+13
+17

cavity:
30
-12
-9
-7
-3
0
Model code:

A + 38.3
Core
brown
blue
black
white
O-ring 17.3 x 2.2 FPM

18-0.05
22.1 +0.10
0
18.2
+0.10
0
A = Probe length, 16 or 32 mm
Cheese-head screw DIN912

internal hexagon M6 x 16
M6
(9)
22
R
8
90
45
2.4 +0.40
0
.2
R0
20
0.2 A
0.1 A
24.5
R15

General tolerances for chipping
processes: ISO 2768-mH
Tolerance: ISO 8015

Surface quality: ISO 1302
E 18.608.0/11.13
Note:
190


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Speed Sensor
HSS 210

for processing.
class IP 67, the instruments can be
mounting position.
on gear wheels with a small module and
and mobile machines with hydraulic
drives.
technical data:
Input data
Frequency range
Installation depth
Torque value
Housing material
Output data
Variants
Types
Switching capacity
Special features:

z Large air gap
z Simple installation
Signal level
mark
EN 60068-2-64
Shock resistance to
EN 60068-2-27
other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption
Weight
Note:
0.1 .. 20,000 Hz
0 .. 50 mm adjustable
5 bar, static / dynamic
Module 1:
0.2 .. 1.0 mm
Module 1.25: 0.2 .. 1.5 mm
Module 1.5: 0.2 .. 1.7 mm
Module 2:
0.2 .. 2.2 mm
Module 2.5: 0.2 .. 3.2 mm
Screw-in thread M12x1
13 Nm
Brass
10

or
2 push-pull frequency outputs
or
1 push-pull frequency output +
1 push-pull direction of rotation output
50 mA
Marking on housing in direction of rotation,
gear rotation to right: channel A leading;
channel B lagging
or
direction of rotation signal
LOW: 2 V
HIGH: UB - 2 V
-40 .. +125 C
Oils: HETG; HEES, HFD; HVLP; HLP
DIN EN 60947-5-2
0.05 g2/Hz, 20 .. 2,000 Hz
30 g, 11 ms
IP 67
(when an IP 67 female connector is used)
Male M12x1, 4 pole
8 .. 30 V DC
5%
< 30 mA at 30 V DC
200,000 h (MTTF)
~ 40 g
provided.
E 18.609.0/11.13
Description:
191
Pin connections:
Model code:

M12x1, 4 pole
HSS 2 1 0 X 050 000
Signal technology
2
(90 phase shift)
3
Installation depth
050 = 50 mm max.
Modification number
000 = Standard
Pin
1
2
3
4
HSS 210-2
+UB
Frequency 1 (A)
0V
Frequency 2 (B)
HSS 210-3
+UB
Frequency
0V
Direction of
rotation
Notes:
Dimensions:
10
1.85
Module 2
50
7.5
Module 1
15
30
10.4
M12x1

table below.
M12x1
Adjustment angle
for other modules:
68
Key for
alignment
Module 1
Module 1.25
Module 1.5
Module 2
Module 2.5
+15
+18
+23
+30
+38
E 18.609.0/11.13
Note:
192


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Speed Sensor
HSS 220

for processing.
class IP 68, the instruments can be
mounting position.
on gear wheels with a small module
and high resolution, especially in rail
vehicles and mobile machines.
technical data:
Input data
Frequency range
Installation depth
Torque value
Housing material
Output data
Variants
Types
Switching capacity
Special features:

z Large air gap
z Simple installation
Signal level
mark
EN 60068-2-6
Shock resistance to
EN 60068-2-27
other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption
Weight
Note:
0.1 .. 20,000 Hz
0 .. 46 mm adjustable
10 bar, static
Module 1:
0.2 .. 1.3 mm
Module 1.25: 0.2 .. 1.8 mm
Module 1.5: 0.2 .. 2.0 mm
Module 2:
0.2 .. 2.5 mm
Module 2.5: 0.2 .. 3.5 mm
Screw-in thread M18x1
12 Nm
X12CrNiS18 8
10

or
or
1 NPN frequency output +
1 NPN direction of rotation output
50 mA (36 V, 125 C, 50 % duty cycle)
500 mA (24 V, 25 C, 50 % duty cycle)
Marking on housing at 90 to rotational
direction, gear rotation to right: channel A
leading, channel B lagging
or
direction of rotation signal
LOW: 2 V
HIGH: +UB - 2 V
-40 .. +125 C
Saltwater, various hydraulic oils
DIN EN 60947-5-2
15 g / 1 .. 2000 Hz
30 g, 11 ms
IP 68 (when female connector is fitted)
Male M12x1, 4 pole
8 .. 32 V DC
5%
< 33 mA at 24 V, both outputs LOW
< 23 mA at 24 V, both outputs HIGH
200,000 h (MTTF)
~ 80 g
provided.
E 18.610.0/11.13
Description:
193
Pin connections:
Model code:

M12x1, 4 pole
HSS 2 2 0 X 046 000
Signal technology
2
(90 phase shift)
3
Installation depth
046 = 46 mm max.
Modification number
000 = Standard
Pin
1
2
HSS 220-2
+UB
Frequency 2
3
4
0V
Frequency 1
HSS 220-3
+UB
Direction of
rotation
0V
Frequency
Notes:
Dimensions:
Adjustment angle for other

modules:

table below.
22
0
+4
+8
+13
+17
46
Module 1
Module 1.25
Module 1.5
Module 1.75
Module 2
Module 2.25
Module 2.5
Module 2.75
Module 3
-12
-9
-7
-3
0
70
10
M12x1
16.8
M18x1
E 18.610.0/11.13
Note:
194


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.610.0/11.13
10
195
Electronic pressure transmitters

and linear position TRANSDUCERS for
applications with increased functional
safety
"Failsafe" is the keyword for vehicle designers of mobile machinery.
No single error is allowed to cause a breakdown or malfunction of part or
all of the system in safety-critical applications.
For use in safety-critical applications, these pressure transmitters are
certified for Performance Level "d" (PLd) according to DIN EN ISO 13849.
The linear position transducers PLd comply with DIN EN 13849-1 and also
with the comparable safety level SIL 2 in accordance with the
standard applicable worldwide for electronic products IEC 61508.
Pressure transmitters for applications with increased functional safety
Page
HDA 4700 197
Linear position transducer for applications with increased functional safety
Page
HLT 1100 - R2
199
Further sensors for applications with increased functional safety can be
found in the Chapter "OEM Products for High Volume Production" .
11
E 180.000.2/11.13
12
196
Electronic
HDA 4700
for Applications with Increased
Functional Safety
Functional Safety
PL d
This version of the pressure

transmitter series HDA 4700 has been
specially developed for use in safety
circuits / safety functions as part of
the functional safety of machinery
and equipment up to PL d - Cat 3 (in
accordance with ISO 13849).
The pressure transmitters are
designed with two channels. Each
channel consists of a sensor element
and evaluation electronics. As a
result, the pressure transmitter
develops two separate and
independent output signals in
proportion to the pressure.
The safety function is tested by
evaluating and comparing the two
analogue output signals in a higherlevel system.
The main areas of application are as
sensor elements in mobile, safetyoriented systems such as load torque
displays or load torque limitation in
truck-mounted cranes or working
platforms.
Special features:
z Two-channel, redundant
pressure measurement
z Two separate, independent
output signals
z Accuracy 0.25 % FS typ.
z Highly robust sensor cell
z Outstanding performance in terms
of temperature effect and EMC
z Small, compact design
z PL d, Cat. 3 certification
technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges signal 1 in bar
25
40
60
100
Measuring ranges signal 2 in bar
25 / 40
40 / 60
60 / 100
100 / 160
160
250
400
600
160 / 250
250 / 400
400 / 600
600 / 1000
80
80
120
200
320
500
800
1200
200
200
300
500
800
1250
2000
2000
Overload pressures in bar

Burst pressures in bar
(Torque value)
G A DIN 3852 with 0.5 mm orifice

(20 Nm)
Mech. conn.: Stainl. steel (2 x thin-film strain gauge)

Seal: FPM
11
Output data
Output signal 12)
Output signal 22)

Max. setting
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.

(B.F.S.L.)
0.15 % FS typ
0.25 % FS max.
Zero point
0.008 % / C typ.
0.015 % / C max.
Over range
0.008 % / C typ.
0.015 % / C max.
Non-linearity at max. setting to DIN 16086
0.3 % FS max.
Hysteresis
0.1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.05 % FS.
Rise time
2 ms
Long term stability
-25 .. +85 C
Operating temperature range (fail safe)3)
-40 .. +85 C/ -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +85 C
-40 .. +85 C/ -25 .. +85 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4

DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 5 .. 2000 Hz
20 g

to ISO 20653
IP 67 (when female connector is fitted)

IP 69K (when female connector is fitted)
other data
M12x1, 4 pole; DT04, 4 pole
Supply voltage
7 .. 35 V DC (max. load resistance 250 )

12 .. 35 V DC (max. load resistance 500 )
Life expectancy
> 10 million load cycles (0 .. 100 %)
Weight
~ 180 g
Safety-related data
Performance level
Based on
DIN EN ISO 13849-1:2008
PL
Architecture
Category 3
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are provided
1)
2)
Other output signals on request
3)
E 18.381.1/11.13
Description:
197
Pin connections:
Model code:

HDA 4 7 4 X - C C - XXXX - XXXX - Pd- 000
4 =
G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
V = Male Deutsch DT04, 4 pole
Signal 1
Signal 2
Pressure ranges for Signal 1 in bar
(max. oper. pressure)
0025; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0160; 0250; 0400; 0600
M12x1
Pin
HDA 4746-CC
+UB
Signal 2
0V
Signal 1
DT04
Pressure ranges for Signal 2 in bar

0025; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0160; 0250; 0400; 0600; 1000
Press. range for signal 2 = Pressure range for signal 1
or max. 1 pressure level higher
Functional safety
Pd = PL d Cat 3 according to DIN EN 13849-1
Modification number
000 = Standard
11
12
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

M12x1 - 4 pole
male electr. conn.
DT04 - 4p
Pin
HDA 474V-CC
+UB
0V
Signal 2
Signal 1
Block circuit diagram:
output
signal 1
output
signal 2
input
signal 1
input
signal 2
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
orifice
Note:
E 18.381.1/11.13

198

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726

HLT 1100-R2
Functional Safety
Functional Safety
PL d
SIL 2
This version of the linear position

sensor series HLT 1100 has been
specially developed for use in safety
circuits / safety functions as part of
the functional safety of machinery and
equipment up to SIL 2 (IEC 61508) or
PL d (ISO 13849).
magnetostriction.
This measuring principle determines
with high-precision the position, the
distance and/or the velocity and is
based on elapsed time measurement.
Based on this non-contact and wearfree measuring system, HYDAC
offers this version in a pressureresistant stainless steel housing for
full integration in hydraulic cylinders.
Special features:
Very robust housing

vibration
SIL 2 / PL d certification
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
200 .. 2500 mm
Measured variable
Distance
Pressure resistance
450 bar
Peak pressure
630 bar
Output data
Output signal
4 .. 20 mA, CANopen
Resolution
12 bit
Load resistance to GND
200 .. 500 Ohm
0.5 % FS
Repeatability
0.1 % FS
Hysteresis
0.1 % FS
Non-linearity
0.1 % FS
Dynamics
30 ms (10 .. 90 %)
-40 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
Media temperature range
-40 .. +120 C
IP67
7.5 mm (5 .. 8.2 Hz)

2.0 g (8.2 .. 150 Hz)
20 g (11ms)
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Other data
Supply voltage (Vin) nominal
9 ... 36 VDC
250 mV
100 mA
PUR cable, 3-core; flying leads

Separate panel mount connection M12x1
Measurement principle
magnetostrictive
No restrictions
Weight
~ 1000 g
(dependent on measurement and cable lengths)
Safety-related data
Performance level
Based on
DIN EN ISO 13849-1:2008
PL d
Architecture
Category 2
Safety Integrity Level
Based on
DIN EN 61508:2002
SIL 2
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage and short circuit protection

are provided.

11
E 18.372.1.0/11.13
Description:
199
Model code:
Mobile HLT1100R2 XXX XXX XXXX S2PD000
Pin connections:
Cable outlet
Design/
Geometry type
1
= Rod
R2 = Cylinder-integrated
Cable output
Separate panel mount connection M12x1
(4 pole for signal output analogue
5 pole for signal output CANopen)
Core
Analogue
CANopen
brown
+UB
+UB
white
0V
0V
green
Analogue
CAN_L
yellow
n.c.
CAN_H
M12x1, 4 pole
Signal output
CAN = CANopen
Example
0250 = 250 mm
11
Pin
Functional safety
S2PD = SIL 2 acc. to IEC 61508
and PLd Cat 2 acc. to DIN EN 13849-1
Modification
000 = Standard
12
Notes:
instrument.
+UB
n.c.
0V
Signal
M12x1, 5 pole
4
Accessories:
Accessories section of the Electronics brochure.
The recommended position magnet ZBL MR33, part no. 6084207, must be
ordered separately.
Dimensions:
Pin
Signal
n.c.
Description
+UB
0V
supply-
CAN_H
CAN_L
supply+
E 18.372.1.0/11.13
Note:
200
Damping zone
Measuring length
Zero position

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.372.1.0/11.13
11
201
Sensors for potentially explosive atmospheres

Sensors for Potentially Explosive Locations:
Page
HDA 4700 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure
203
EDS 4400 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure, programmable
207
211
ETS 4500 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure
HDA 4700 ATEX Intrinsically safe 215
EDS 4400 ATEX Intrinsically safe, programmable
231
235
239
HDA 4700 CSA Intrinsically Safe 243
HDA 4700 IECEx Intrinsically safe 259
275
HDA 4700 Flush membrane ATEX Intrinsically safe
279
283
HDA 4700 Flush membrane IECEx Intrinsically safe
287
291
295
HDA 4700 Flush membrane ATEX, CSA, IECEx flameproof enclosure
299
HFS 2100 ATEX Intrinsically safe 303
HFS 2500 ATEX Intrinsically safe 307
EDS 4100
Flow rate
Flush membrane IECEx Intrinsically safe
ATEX, IECEx, CSA,

flameproof enclosure
Flush membrane ATEX,

IECEx, CSA, flameproof enclosure
OEM product for large volume production

Flush membrane
ATEX-Intrinsically safe
Flush membrane ATEX-Intrinsically safe
CSA Intrinsically safe
E 180.000.2/11.13
IECEx Intrinsically safe
202
Temperature
HFS 2100
EDS 4300
HFS 2500
EDS 4400
ETS 4500
HDA 4100
Pressure
HDA 4300
Sensors
for potentially
HDA 4400
Further sensors for potentially explosive locations can be found in the section "OEM
Products for Large Volume Production" .
HDA 4700
12
For several years

HYDAC ELECTRONIC has been
systematically stepping up the
expansion of its range of sensors for
potentially explosive locations.
The sensors for potentially explosive
locations can be supplied with a variety
of output signals, connectors and fluid
port connection options.
This versatility, combined with
certification to ATEX, CSA and IECEx,
ensures worldwide acceptance
of our products.
Note:
Electronic
HDA 4700
ATEX, CSA, IECEx
Flameproof Enclosure
The HDA 4700 electronic pressure

transmitter series with flameproof
enclosure has triple approval according
to ATEX, CSA and IECEx which ensures
the instrument is universally suitable for
use in potentially explosive environments
around the world.
Each instrument is certified by the three
approvals organizations and is labelled
accordingly. Therefore there is no longer
any need to stock multiple devices with
separate individual approvals.
As with the industrial version of the
HDA 4700, those with triple approval
have a proven, fully-welded stainless
steel measurement cell with thin film
strain gauge without internal seals.
mining and the oil & gas industry, e.g. in
underground vehicles, hydraulic power
units, blow-out preventers (BOPs), drill
drives or valve actuation stations as
well as in areas with high levels of dust
contamination.
Protection types and applications:
CCSAUS Explosion Proof - Seal Not Required
Class I Group A, B, C, D, T6, T5
Class II Group E, F, G
Class III
Type 4
ATEX Flame Proof
I M2 Ex d I Mb
II 2G Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
II 2D Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 C Db
IECEx Flame Proof
Ex d I Mb
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 C Db
Special features:

Certificates:
ATEX KEMA 10ATEX0100 X
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
Robust design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges1)
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
Mechanical connection1)2)
(torque value)
6; 16; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar

15; 32; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
100; 200; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852 (40 Nm)
G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
1.4404; 1.4301
Seal:
FPM
1.4404; 1.4435 (316L)

Conduit and housing material
Output data
Output signal, permitted load resistance 3)
RLmax.= (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0.25 % FS typ.
Max. setting
0.5 % FS max.
0.15 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.25 % FS max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
Over range

0.015 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.05 % FS
Rise time
1.5 ms
Long-term drift
T5, T130 C: -25 .. +80 C

T6, T110 C: -25 .. +60 C
T5, T130 C: -40 .. +80 C / -20 .. +80 C

T6, T110 C: -40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
T5, T130 C: -40 .. +80 C / -20 .. +80 C
T6, T110 C: -40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4

EN 60079-0 / 1 / 31
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (Vented Gauge)
to ISO 20653
IP 69K (Sealed Gauge)
Other data
Voltage supply
8 .. 30 V DC
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 300 g
Note:

Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit
1)
1000 bar only with mechanical connection G 1/2 DIN 3852 and vice versa
2)
Other mechanical connections on request
3)
4)
12
E 18.385.1/11.13
Description:
203
Pin connections:
Conduit (single cores)
Areas of application:
Approvals
Certificate
Applications /
Protection types
Core
HDA 47X9-A
red
Signal +
black
Signal -
greenyellow
Housing
ATEX:
I M2
Ex d I Mb
II 2G
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
IECEx:
Ex d I Mb
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
Conduit (flying leads)
Model code:
12
Core
HDA 47XG-A
white
Signal +
brown
Signal -
green
n.c.
yellow
n.c.
CCSAUS: Explosion Proof - Seal not required

ATEX: Flame Proof
IECEx: Flame Proof
ATEX KEMA 10ATEX100X
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
CCSAUS:
Class I Group A, B, C, D, T6; T5
Class III
Type 4
HDA47XXAXXXX D X 000 (2m)
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852

(only for "1000 bar" press. range)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
9 = 1/2-14 NPT Conduit (male thread),
single cores
G = 1/2-14 NPT Conduit (male thread),
flying leads
Signal
0006; 0016; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
(only in conjunction with mechanical connection type "4")
1000
(only in conjunction with mechanical connection type "2")
Approval
D = CSA Explosion Proof - Seal not required
ATEX Flame Proof
IECEx Flame Proof
Type of measurement cell
S = Sealed Gauge (sealed to atmosphere)
40 bar
V = Vented Gauge (vented to atmosphere)
16 bar
Modification number
000 = Standard
Cable length in m
Standard = 2 m
Notes:
please read the label or the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
E 18.385.1/11.13
Accessories:
204
Dimensions:
Venting
Venting
hex SW27
hex SW27
hex SW27
hex SW27
12
elastomer
profile
seal ring
Note:
The information in this brochure relates to the operating conditions and applications
described.
For applications or operating conditions not described, please contact the relevant

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.385.1/11.13
*) optional, depending on gauge type "Sealed Gauge" / "Vented Gauge"
205
E 18.385.1/11.13
12
206
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 4400 Programmable
ATEX, CSA, IECEx

switch EDS 4400 with flameproof
the instrument is universally suitable for
around the world.
Each instrument is certified by the three
approval organizations and is labelled
accordingly. Therefore there is no longer
any need to stock multiple devices with
EDS 4400, those with triple approval
have a proven, fully-welded stainless
The instrument is programmed
conveniently and simply using the
HPG 3000 HYDAC programming unit.
mining and the oil & gas industry, e.g. in
drives or valve actuation stations as well
as in areas with high dust loads.
Class III
Type 4
ATEX Flame Proof
I M2 Ex d I Mb
IECEx Flame Proof
Ex d I Mb
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
Special features:
Accuracy 1.0 % FS
Certificates:
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
Robust design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
6; 16; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
Overload pressures
15; 32; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
Burst pressure
100; 200; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852 (40 Nm)
(torque value)
G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;

1.4404; 1.4301

Seal: FPM
1.4404; 1.4435 (316L)
Output data
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1.0 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.1 % FS max.
Temperature drift

1 or 2 PNP transistor switch outputs
Switch output 2)
max. 1.2 A on version with 1 switch output
Output load

max. 1 A each on version with 2 switch
outputs
Switch points / hysteresis / N/C or
N/O function
Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 8 .. 2000 ms; User-programmable with

Long-term drift
T5, T130 C: -25 .. +80 C

T6, T110 C: -25 .. +60 C
T5, T130 C: -40 .. +80 C/-20 .. +80 C

T6, T110 C: -40 .. +60 C/-20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
T5, T130 C: -40 .. +80 C/-20 .. +80 C

T6, T110 C: -40 .. +60 C/-20 .. +60 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4

EN 60079-0 / 1 / 31
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
to ISO 20653
Other data
Voltage supply
12 .. 30 V DC
Current consumption
~ 25 mA (plus switching current)
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 300 g


1)
Other mechanical connection options available on request
2)
NPN switching outputs upon request

3)

12
E 18.386.1/11.13
Description:
207

outputs:
-

-

Switch point or upper switch value

5% .. 100% of the measurement range
Hysteresis or lower switch value
1% .. 96% of the measurement range
Pin connections:
Core
EDS 44x9-*-1P
EDS 44x9-*-2P
red
+UB
+UB
white
Switch output 1
Switch output 1
brown
---------
Switch output 2
black
0V
0V
green
SDA1)
SDA1)
Core
EDS 44xG-*-1P
EDS 44xG-*-2P
white
Switch output 1
Switch output 1
brown
n.c.
Switch output 2
green
SDA1)
SDA1)
yellow
0V
0V
grey
+UB
+UB
1) Programming line
Programming Unit:

HPG 3000 000
Part. No. 909 422
E 18.386.1/11.13
electr. conn.
female 5 pole
208
Approvals
Certificate
Applications /
Protection types
12
The pressure switch can be connected to

the HPG 3000 very simply by using the
UVM 3000 Connection Adapter (see
Accessories Brochure).
CAUTION!
The HPG 3000 Programming Unit may
only be used outside the potentially
explosive area.

ATEX: Flame Proof
IECEx: Flame Proof
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
CCSAUS:
Class III
Type 4
ATEX:
I M2
Ex d I Mb
II 2G
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
IECEx:
Ex d I Mb
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
Model code:
EDS44XXXXXX X P D X 000 (2m)
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852

4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
single cores
flying leads
0006; 0016; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
(only in conjunction with mech. connection type "4")
1000
(only in conjunction with mech. connection type "2")
Number of switch outputs
1 = 1 switch output
2 = 2 switch outputs
Output type
P = Programmable
Approval
ATEX Flame Proof
IECEx Flame Proof
40 bar
16 bar
Modification number
000 = Standard
Cable length in m
Standard = 2 m
Notes:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
Venting
Venting
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
12
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Note:


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.386.1/11.13
209
E 18.386.1/11.13
12
210
Electronic
ETS 4500
ATEX, CSA, IECEx
The electronic temperature transmitter

series ETS 4500 with flameproof
that the device is universally suitable for
around the world.
Each device is certified by the three
accordingly. Therefore it is no longer
necessary to stock multiple devices with
Based on a silicon semiconductor
device and corresponding evaluation
designed to measure temperatures in the
range -25 to +100 C.
Its main applications are in mining
and the oil and gas industry, e.g. in
Class III
Type 4
ATEX Flame Proof
I M2 Ex d I Mb
IECEx Flame Proof
Ex d I Mb
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
Special features:

Certificates:
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
Robust design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring principle
Measuring range
-25 .. +100 C
10.7; 100; 250; 350 mm
Probe length
Pressure resistance
600 bar (probe length 10.7 mm)



G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
(torque value)
Stainless steel: 1.4571; 1.4301 (316Ti; 304)

Seal: FPM
1.4404; 1.4435 (316L)
Output data
Output signal1)
RLmax = (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]
1.5 % FS typ.
Accuracy

3.0 % FS max.
t : ~ 10 s
: ~ 15 s

t50
90


mark

DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Protection class to ISO 20653
Other data
Voltage supply
Life expectancy

Weight

12
T5, T130 C: -40 .. +80 C/-20 .. +80 C

T6, T110 C: -40 .. +60 C/-20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
T5, T130 C: -40 .. +80 C/-20 .. +80 C
T6, T110 C: -40 .. +60 C/-20 .. +60 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 1 / 31
20 g
IP 69K
8 .. 30 V DC
5%
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 280 g (probe length 10.7 mm)
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage and override short circuit


1)

2)

E 18.387.1/11.13
Description:
211
Pin connections:
Approvals
Certificate
Applications /
Protection types
Core
ETS 4549-A
red
Signal +
black
Signal -
greenyellow
Housing
ATEX:
I M2
Ex d I Mb
II 2G
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
IECEx:
Ex d I Mb
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
Model code:
12
Core
ETS 454G-A
white
Signal +
brown
Signal -
green
n.c.
yellow
n.c.

ATEX: Flame Proof
IECEx: Flame Proof
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
CCSAUS:
Class III
Type 4
ETS454XADXXX 000 (2m)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
single cores
flying leads
Signal
Approval
ATEX Flame Proof
IECEx Flame Proof
Probe length
010 = 10.7 mm
100 = 100 mm
250 = 250 mm
350 = 350 mm
Modification number
000 = Standard
Cable length in m
Standard = 2 m
E 18.387.1/11.13
Accessories:
212
Dimensions:
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
12
Note:


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.387.1/11.13
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
213
E 18.387.1/11.13
12
214
Electronic
HDA 4700
ATEX Intrinsically Safe
ATEX Dustproof Enclosure
ATEX Non-sparking
The pressure transmitter HDA 4700

in ATEX version has been specially
developed for use in potentially
explosive atmospheres and is based
on the HDA 4000 series.
As with the industry model, the
HDA 4700 in ATEX version has a
stainless steel measurement cell with
thin-film strain gauge.
Intended areas of application are, for
example, in the oil and gas industry, in
mining, on gas turbines or in locations
with high levels of dust contamination,
e.g. in mills.
I M1 Ex ia I Ma
II 1G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb
II 2G Ex ia IIC T6 Gb
II 3G Ex nA llC T6,T5,T4 Gc
II 3G Ex ic llC T6,T5,T4 Gc
II 1D Ex ia lIIC T85C Da
II 1D Ex ta lllC T80/90/100C Da
T500T90/T100/T110C Da
II 2D Ex tb lllC T80/90/100C Db
II 3D Ex tc lllC T80/T90/T100C Dc
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80/T90/T100C Dc
Special features:

Certificates:
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X
KEMA 05ATEX1021
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges1)
Overload pressures
Burst pressures

Torque value
-1 .. 9; 6; 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar

20; 15; 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
100; 100; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
G1/2 DIN 3852
20 Nm
Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
1.4404; 1.4301
Seal:
FPM

Output data
Output signal permitted load resistance
RLmax = (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0.25 % FS typ.
Max. setting
0.5 % FS max.
0.15 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.3 % FS max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
Over range

0.015 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.05 % FS
Rise time
1.5 ms
Long-term drift
-20 .. +85 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 ... +60 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4

EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 31

EN 50303
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
and Binder 714 M18)

IP 67 (for M12x1 male when an
Relevant data for Ex applications
Ex ia, ic
Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
Supply voltage
Ui = 12 .. 28 V
12 .. 28 V
Max. input current
Ii = 100 mA
Max. input power
Pi = 1 W
max. power consuption
1W
Connection capacitance of the sensor
Ci = 22 nF
Inductance of the sensor
Li = 0 mH
Insulation voltage 3)
50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage protection
EN 61000-6-2
Other data
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
FS (Full Scale) = relative to the full measuring range, B.F.S.L.= Best Fit Straight Line
1)
2)
3)
500 V AC on request
12
E 18.335.2/11.13
Description:
215
Code No.for use
in Model code
Protection type
II 1D Ex ta lllC T80C
T500T90C Da
Group I
Category M1
Group II, lll

Category 1G, 1/2G, 1D
Group II
Category 2G
Group II
Category 3G
Group IIl
Category 1D, 2D
Group II, lll

Category 3G, 3D
Mining
Gases/conductive dust
Gases
Gases
Conductive dust
Protection
class:
intrinsically
safe ia
with barrier
Protection class:
intrinsically safe ia
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
Non-sparking nA
Protection class:
Dustproof enclosure
Protection class:
Intrinsically safe ic
with barrier
I M1 Ex ia I Ma
Certificate
Zones /
Categories
II 3G Ex nA llC T6 Gc
II 3G Ex ic llC T6 Gc
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80C Dc
II 2D Ex tb lllC T80C Db
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X / KEMA 05ATEX1021
Electrical
Connection
(see model
code)
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4,5,6
Devices in ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types II 1D Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 C Da T500T90/T100/T110C Da, II 2D Ex tb lllC T80/90/100C Db
and ll 3D Ex tc lllC T80/90/100C Dc are available with flying leads on request.
Devices in the ignition protection class "Non-sparking" for the protection type II 3G Ex nA llC T6, T5, T4 Gc are available with flying leads on request.
Pin connections:
12
Pin
HDA 47X4-A
n.c.
Signal +
Signal -
n.c.
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
HDA 47X5-A
Signal +
Signal -
n.c.
Housing
M12x1
Model code:
HDA47XXAXXXX A N X 000
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
6 =
Male, M12x1, 4 pole
Signal
0009 (-1..9); 0006; 0016; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
1000 (only in conjunction with mechanical connection code "2")
Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
Protection types and applications (code)
1 = I M1 Ex ia I Ma
II 1D Ex ia lIIC T85 C Da
9 = II 3G Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. connection 6)*
A = II 1D Ex ta lllC T80 C T500T90 C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection "6")*

II 2D Ex tb lllC T80 C Db
C = II 3G Ex ic llC T6 Gc
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80 C Dc
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
* For design and electrical connection see device dimensions
E 18.335.2/11.13
Accessories:
216
Pin
HDA 47X6-A
Signal +
n.c.
Signal -
n.c.
Note:
Dimensions:

described.
Protection types and applications (code): 1, C
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

Binder series 714-4p
male electr. conn.

3p +PE EN 175301-803
(DIN43650)
M18
male electr. conn. 4p
12.3
M12x1
12
59.4
18.3
18
35
27
2+0,3
12
hex. SW27
Elastomer profile
seal ring
DIN3869
G1/4 A
18.9 -0.2
29.5
12
hex. SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
Protection ratings and areas of application (code): 9, A
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
The impact protected metal safety sleeve is included. A straight female connector is
required for electrical connection; e.g. female connector M12x1, 4 pole, straight, with
3m shielded cable: ZBE 06S-03, Part No. 6098243

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.335.2/11.13
hex. SW27
217
E 18.335.2/11.13
12
218
Electronic
HDA 4400
ATEX Non-sparking

e.g. in mills.
I M1 Ex ia I Ma
II 1D Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 C Da
T500T90/T100/T110 C Da
II 2D Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 C Db
II 3D Ex tc lllC T80/T90/T100 C Dc
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80/T90/T100 C Dc
Special features:

Certificates:
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X
KEMA 05ATEX1021
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges1)
16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
Overload pressures
32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
Burst pressures
G1/4 A DIN 3852

G1/2 DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm
Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
1.4404; 1.4301

Seal:
FPM
Output data
RLmax.= (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [k]
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
Max. setting
0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.5 % FS max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
Over range
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.4 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.1 % FS
1.5 ms
Rise time
Long-term drift
-20 .. +85 C
-20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4

EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 31

EN 50303
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
and Binder 714 M18)

IP 67 (for M12x1 when an IP 67 connector is used)
Ex ia, ic
Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
Supply voltage
Ui = 12 .. 28 V
12 .. 28 V
Max. input current
Ii = 100 mA
Max. input power
Pi = 1 W
1W
Ci = 22 nF
Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
Other data
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
1)
2)
3)
500 V AC on request
12
E 18.336.2/11.13
Description:
219
Code No. for use
in Model code
Protection type
I M1 Ex ia I Ma
Certificate
Zones /
Categories
A
T500T90C Da
C
Group I
Category M1
Group II, lll

Group II
Category 2G
Group II
Category 3G
Group IIl
Category 1D, 2D
Group II, lll

Category 3G, 3D
Mining
Gases
Gases
Conductive dust
Protection
class:
intrinsically
safe ia
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
Non-sparking nA
Protection class:
Dustproof enclosure
Protection class:
with barrier
Electrical
Connection
(see model
code)
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4,5,6
Pin connections:
12
Pin
HDA 44X4-A
n.c.
Signal +
Signal -
n.c.
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
HDA 44X5-A
Signal +
Signal -
n.c.
Housing
E 18.336.2/11.13
M12x1
220
Pin
HDA 44X6-A
Signal +
n.c.
Signal -
n.c.
Model code:
HDA44XXAXXXX A N X 000
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
5 = Male 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
Male M12x1, 4 pole
6 =
Signal
0016; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
Protection type and applications (code)
1 = I M1 Ex ia I Ma
9 = II 3G Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. conn. 6)*
A = II 1D Ex ta lllC T80 C T500T90 C Da (only in conjunction with electr. conn. "6")*

ll 3D Ex ic lllC T80 C Dc
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
Note:
Dimensions:

profile seal ring
male connection
male connection
3p +PE EN 175301-803
(DIN43650)
M18
18
12.3
12
59.4
male connection 4p
M12x1
35
27
2+0,3
12
hex-SW27
Elastomer profile
seal ring
DIN3869
G1/4 A
18.9 -0.2
29.5
hex-SW27
12
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
Protection types and applications (code): 9, A
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
required for electrical connection, e.g. female connector M12x1, 4 pole, straight, with

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.336.2/11.13
hex-SW27
221
E 18.336.2/11.13
12
222
Electronic
HDA 4300
ATEX Non-sparking

ATEX version HDA 4300 has a ceramic
measurement cell with thick-film strain
gauge.
e.g. in mills.
I M1 Ex ia I Ma
T500T90/T100/T110 C Da
Special features:

Certificates:
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X
KEMA 05ATEX1021
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
-1 .. 1; 1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40 bar
Overload pressures
3; 3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120 bar
Burst pressures
5; 5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm
Sensor:
Ceramic

Mech. connection:
1.4301

Seal:
FPM / EPDM
Output data
RLmax.= (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.5 % FS max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.03 % FS / C max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
Over range

0.03 % FS / C max.
0.5 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.4 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.1 % FS
Rise time
1.5 ms
Long-term drift
-20 .. +85 C
-20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 C .. +60 C / -20 C .. +60 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4

EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 31

EN 50303
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
and Binder 714 M18)

IP 67 ( for M12x1, when an IP 67 connector
is used)

Supply voltage
Max. input current
Max. input power
Ex ia, ic
Ui = 12 .. 28 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W

Ci = 22 nF
Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
Other data
Life expectancy
Weight
5%
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 180 g
Ex nA, ta, tb, tc

12 .. 28 V

1W


1)
2)

500 V AC on request
12
E 18.337.2/11.13
Description:
223
Code No.for use
in Model code
Protection type
T500T90C Da
Group I
Category M1
Group II, lll

Group II
Category 2G
Group II
Category 3G
Group IIl
Category 1D, 2D
Group II, lll

Category 3G, 3D
Mining
Gases
Gases
Conductive dust
Protection
class:
intrinsically
safe ia
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
Non-sparking nA
Protection class:
Dustproof enclosure
Protection class:
with barrier
I M1 Ex ia I Ma
Certificate
Zones /
Categories
Electrical
Connection
(see model
code)
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4,5,6
Devices in ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types II 1D Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 C Da T500T90/T100/T110 C Da, II 2D Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 CDb
and ll 3D Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 C Dc are available with flying leads on request.
Pin connections:
12
Pin
HDA 4344-A
n.c.
Signal +
Signal -
n.c.
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
HDA 4345-A
Signal +
Signal -
n.c.
Housing
M12x1
Model code:
HDA434XAXXXX A N X 000 X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
6 =
Male, M12x1, 4 pole
Signal
0001(-1..1); 01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = I M1 Ex ia I Ma
9 = II 3G Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. conn. 6)*
A = II 1D Ex ta lllC T80C T500T90C Da (only in conjunction with electr. conn. "6")*

Modification number
000 = Standard
1 = Stainless steel
E 18.337.2/11.13
Notes:
224
Pin
HDA 4346-A
Signal +
n.c.
Signal -
n.c.
Accessories:
Note:
Dimensions:

described.
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

male electr. conn.

3p +PE EN 175301-803
(DIN43650)
M18
12.3
M12x1
12
59.4
18.3
18
35
27
2+0,3
12
hex. SW27
Elastomer profile
seal ring
DIN3869
G1/4 A
18.9 -0.2
29.5
12
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex. SW27

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.337.2/11.13
225
E 18.337.2/11.13
12
226
Electronic
HDA 4100
ATEX Dustproof housing
ATEX Non-sparking
The pressure transmitter

HDA 4100 in ATEX version has
been specially developed for use in
potentially explosive atmospheres
for absolute measurement in the low
pressure range and is based on the
HDA 4000 series.
ATEX version HDA 4100 has a ceramic
gauge.
e.g. in mills.
I M1 Ex ia I Ma
T500T90/T100/T110 C Da
Special features:

Certificates:
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X
KEMA 05ATEX1021
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
1; 2.5 bar
Overload pressures
3; 8 bar
Burst pressures
5; 12 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm
Sensor:
Ceramic

Mech. connection:
1.4301

Seal:
FPM / EPDM
Output data
RLmax = (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.5 % FS max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.03 % FS / C max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
Over range

0.03 % FS / C max.
0.5 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.4 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.1 % FS
Rise time
1.5 ms
Long-term drift
-20 .. +85 C
-20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 C .. +60 C / -20 C .. +60 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4

EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 31

EN 50303
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)

and Binder 714 M18)

IP 67 (for M12x1, when an IP 67 connector

is used)

Supply voltage
Max. input current
Max. input power
Ex ia, ic
Ui = 12 .. 28 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W

Ci = 22 nF
Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
Other data
Life expectancy
Weight
5%
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 180 g
12
Ex nA, ta, tb, tc

12 .. 28 V

1W

1)
2)
500 V AC on request
E 18.338.2/11.13
Description:
227
Code No.for use
in Model code
Protection type
T500T90C Da
Group I
Category M1
Group II, lll

Group II
Category 2G
Group II
Category 3G
Group IIl
Category 1D, 2D
Group II, lll

Category 3G, 3D
Mining
Gases
Gases
Conductive dust
Protection
class:
intrinsically
safe ia
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
Non-sparking nA
Protection class:
Dustproof enclosure
Protection class:
with barrier
I M1 Ex ia I Ma
Certificate
Zones /
Categories
Electrical
Connection
(see model
code)
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4,5,6
Pin connections:
12
Pin
HDA 4144-A
n.c.
Signal +
Signal -
n.c.
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
HDA 4145-A
Signal +
Signal -
n.c.
Housing
M12x1
Model code:
HDA414XAXXXX A N X 000 X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
Male, M12x1, 4 pole
6 =
Signal
01.0; 02.5
Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = I M1 Ex ia I Ma
9 = II 3G Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. connection "6") *
A = II 1D Ex ta lllC T80 C T500T90 C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection "6")*

Modification number
000 = Standard
1 = Stainless steel
E 18.338.2/11.13
Notes:
228
Pin
HDA 4146-A
Signal +
n.c.
Signal -
n.c.
Accessories:
Note:
Dimensions:

described.
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

male electr. conn.

3p +PE EN 175301-803
(DIN43650)
M18
12.3
M12x1
12
59.4
18.3
18
35
27
2+0,3
12
hex. SW27
Elastomer profile
seal ring
DIN3869
G1/4 A
18.9 -0.2
29.5
12
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex. SW27

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.338.2/11.13
3m shielded cable: ZBE 06S-03, Part. No. 6098243
229
E 18.338.2/11.13
12
230
Electronic
Pressure Switch
The programmable pressure switch

EDS 4400 in ATEX version has
potentially explosive atmospheres, and
is based on the EDS 4000 series.
The switching point and switchback point, the function of the
switching outputs as N/C or N/O
and the switching delay are userprogrammable in conjunction with the
HYDAC Programming Unit HPG 3000.
programmable EDS 4400 in ATEX
version has a stainless steel
gauge for measuring relative pressure
in the high pressure range.
With approval for the following
I M1 Ex ia I
II 1G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6
II 1 D Ex iaD 20 T100C
almost all requirements are covered
regarding ignition group, error class
and temperature class.
Versions for other Protection types
and applications are available upon
request.
Special features:
Switching point and switch-back

point are user-programmable
Accuracy 1 % FS
Certificates:
DEKRA EXAM BVS 07 ATEX E 041 X
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
Overload pressures
120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
Burst pressure
300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm
Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
1.4404; 1.4301

Seal:
FPM
Output data
Switch output
1 x PNP N/C or N/O
during operation: Imax 34 mA
Output load
Switching points


Max. setting
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
Repeatability (at 25 C)
0.1 % FS max.
Temperature drift

Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 8 ms to 2000 ms; user-programmable with

Long-term drift
-40 .. +100 C
-20 .. +60 C / +70 C / +85 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4

EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26

EN 61241-0 / 11

EN 50303
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz

is used)

I M1
II 1 D

II 1G, 1/2G, 2G
Supply voltage
14 .. 28 V DC
T6: -20 .. +60 C

T5, T4: -20 .. +70 C

T100: -20 .. +70 C
T6: -20 .. +60 C

T5, T4: -20 .. +70 C

T100: -20 .. +70 C
T6: +60 C
T100: +70 C
Max. ambient temperature Ta

T5, T4: +70 C
Max. input current
100 mA
93 mA
Max. input power
0.7 W
0.65 W
Max. internal capacitance
33 nF
33 nF
0 mH
0 mH
Max. internal inductance
Insulation voltage 1) 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage
protection EN 61000-6-2
Approved intrinsic safety barriers
Pepperl & Fuchs:
Z 787

Telematic Ex STOCK:
MTL 7087
Other data
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
and short circuit protection are provided. FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measuring range
1)
500 V AC on request
12
E 18.339.2/11.13
Description:
231
Setting options:

menu.

outputs:
Measuring
range in bar
Increment
in bar
0 .. 60
0.1
0 .. 100
0.2
0 .. 250
0.5
0 .. 400
0 .. 600
Minimum
value
in ms
Maximum
value
in ms
Switch-on
delay
Ton1/Ton2
2040
Switch-off
delay
ToF1/ToF2
2040
The increment for all instruments is 8 ms.
Pin connections:
M12x1, 5 pole
12
3
5
1
Pin
Process
connection
HPG
connection
+UB
+UB
0V
Comport 1 *
0V
0V
Out 1
n.c.
0V
Comport 2 *
E 18.339.2/11.13
* Comport = programming connection
232
Code No.
for use in
Model
code
Protection
Type
Certificate

Zones /
Categories
I M1 Ex ia I
II 1G Ex ia IIC
T4, T5, T6
II 2G Ex ia IIC
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC
T4, T5, T6
II 1D Ex iaD 20
T100 C
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
Group I
Category M1
Group II
Category 1G
Group II
Category 2G, 1/2G
Group II
Category iD
Mining
Gases
Gases
Dusts
Protection
class:
intrinsically
safe ia with
barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
For use in Zone 0
For use in Zone

1, 2
For mounting to
Zone 0
For use in Zone

20, 21, 22
For mounting to
Zone 20
T4, T5: Ta = 70 C
T6:
Ta = 60 C
T4, T5: Ta = 70 C
T6:
Ta = 60 C
T100: Ta = 70 C
Electrical
Connection
Instruments for other Protection types and applications are available on request.
Please contact our technical sales department for more information.
Model code:
EDS4448XXXXP AN X000
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Switching output
P = Programmable
Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = I M1 Ex ia I
2 = II 1G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6
3 = II 2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6 / II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6
8 = II 1D Ex iaD 20 T100 C
Modification number
000 = Standard
Accessories:
Safety instructions:
These units must only be programmed outside the potentially explosive location.
When operating in potentially explosive locations, the programming cables
may only be connected to the 0 V outside of the potentially explosive area.
The switching output draws the switching energy from the power supply to the
pressure switch. No additional energy is introduced into the electrical circuit
through the switching output.
The dual Zener barriers specified and approved in the technical data must be
used to connect the pressure switch.
These have a reverse polarity diode to decouple the signal.
The signal path may only be passively loaded.
Ensure that measured fluids in contact with the pressure switch are compatible
with the materials used.
Note:

Dimensions:
male electr. conn.
5 pole
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
12
Programming Unit:
Caution:
electr. conn.
female 5 pole
The HPG 3000 Programming Unit may only be used outside the potentially explosive
area.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.339.2/11.13

HPG 3000 000
Part. No. 909 422
233
E 18.339.2/11.13
12
234
Electronic
Pressure Switch

EDS 4300 in ATEX version was
specially developed for use in
potentially explosive atmospheres and
version has a ceramic measurement
cell with thick-film strain gauge for
measuring relative pressure in the low
pressure range.
I M1 Ex ia I
II 1 D Ex iaD 20 T100 C
and applications are available on
request.
Special features:

point user-programmable
Accuracy 1 % FS
Certificates:
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40 bar
Overload pressures
3; 8, 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120 bar
Burst pressures
5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm
Sensor:
Ceramic

Mech. connection:
1.4301

Seal:
FPM / EPDM
Output data
Switch output
1 x PNP N/C or N/O
Output load
Switching points

0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
Max. setting
0.1 % FS max.
Temperature drift


Long-term drift
-40 .. +100 C
-20 .. +60 C / +70 C / +85 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4

EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26

EN 61241-0 / 11

EN 50303
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 67

(M12x1, when an IP 67 connector is used)

I M1
II 1 D

II 1G, 1/2G, 2G
Supply voltage
14 .. 28 V DC
T6: -20 .. +60 C

T5, T4: -20 .. +70 C

T100: -20 .. +70 C
T6: -20 .. +60 C

T5, T4: -20 .. +70 C

T100: -20 .. +70 C
T6: +60 C
T100: +70 C

T5, T4: +70 C
Max. input current
100 mA
93 mA
Max. input power
0.7 W
0.65 W
33 nF
33 nF
0 mH
0 mH
Pepperl & Fuchs:
Z 787

Telematic Ex STOCK:
MTL 7087
Other data
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
Note:


and short circuit protection are provided. FS (Full Scale) = relative to the full measuring range
1)
500 V AC on request
12
E 18.340.1/11.13
Description:
235
Setting options:
In conjunction with the HYDAC Programming

Unit HPG 3000, all the settings are
combined in an easy-to-follow menu.

outputs:
Code No.
for use in
Model
code
Protection
Type
I M1 Ex ia I
II 1G Ex ia IIC
T4, T5, T6
II 2G Ex ia IIC
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC
T4, T5, T6
II 1D Ex iaD 20
T100 C
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
Measuring range
in bar
Increment in bar
0 .. 1
0.002
0 .. 2.5
0.005
0 .. 4
0.01
Group I
Category M1
Group II
Category 1G
Group II
Category 2G, 1/2G
Group II
Category iD
0 .. 6
0.01
Mining
Gases
Gases
Dusts
0 .. 10
0.02
0 .. 16
0.05
0 .. 25
0.1
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
For use in Zone 0
0 .. 40
0.1
Protection
class:
intrinsically
safe ia with
barrier
For use in Zone

1, 2
For mounting to
Zone 0
For use in Zone

20, 21, 22
For mounting to
Zone 20
T4, T5: Ta = 70 C
T6:
Ta = 60 C
T4, T5: Ta = 70 C
T6:
Ta = 60 C
T100: Ta = 70 C
Certificate
Zones /
Categories

Minimum
value in ms
Maximum
value in ms
Switch-on
delay
Ton1/Ton2
2040
Switch-off
delay
ToF1/ToF2
2040
12
Pin connections:
M12x1, 5 pole
4
3
5
Pin
Process
connection
HPG
connection
+UB
+UB
0V
Comport 1 *
0V
0V
Out 1
n.c.
0V
Comport 2 *
Electrical
Connection
Model code:
EDS4348XXXXP AN X000 X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
Switching output
P = Programmable
Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = I M1 Ex ia I
8 = II 1D Ex iaD 20 T100 C
Modification number
000 = Standard
1 = Stainless steel
E 18.340.1/11.13
Accessories:
236
When operating in potentially explosive locations, the programming cables may
only be connected to the 0 V outside of the potentially explosive area.
Dual Zener barriers specified and approved in the technical data must be used to
connect the pressure switch.
Note:

Dimensions:
male electr. conn.
5 pole
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
12
Programming Unit:
Caution:
electr. conn.
female 5 pole
area.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.340.1/11.13

HPG 3000 000
Part. No. 909 422
237
E 18.340.1/11.13
12
238
Electronic
Pressure Switch

version has a ceramic measurement
cell with thick-film strain gauge for
measuring absolute pressure in the
low pressure range.
I M1 Ex ia I
request.
Special features:

point user-programmable
Accuracy 1 % FS
Certificates:
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
1; 2.5 bar
Overload pressures
3; 8 bar
Burst pressures
5; 12 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm
Sensor:
Ceramic

Mech. connection:
1.4301

Seal:
FPM / EPDM
Output data
Switch output
1 x PNP N/C or N/O
Output load
Switching points

0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
0.1 % FS max.
Temperature drift


Long-term drift
-40 .. +100 C
-20 .. +60 C / +70 C / +85 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4

EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26

EN 61241-0 / 11

EN 50303
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 67

(M12x1, when an IP 67 connector is used)

I M1
II 1 D

II 1G, 1/2G, 2G
Supply voltage
14 .. 28 V DC
T6: -20 .. +60 C

T5, T4: -20 .. +70 C

T100: -20 .. +70 C
T6: -20 .. +60 C

T5, T4: -20 .. +70 C

T100: -20 .. +70 C
T6: +60 C
T100: +70 C

T5, T4: +70 C
Max. input current
100 mA
93 mA
Max. input power
0.7 W
0.65 W
33 nF
33 nF
0 mH
0 mH
Pepperl & Fuchs:
Z 787

Telematic Ex STOCK:
MTL 7087
Other data
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
Note:


and short circuit protection are provided. FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
1)
500 V AC on request
12
E 18.341.2/11.13
Description:
239
Setting options:

menu.

outputs:
Measuring
range in bar
Increment
in bar
0 .. 1
0.002
0 .. 2.5
0.005
Minimum
value
in ms
Maximum
value
in ms
Switch-on
delay
Ton1/Ton2
2040
Switch-off
delay
ToF1/ToF2
2040
Pin connections:
M12x1, 5 pole
3
5
1
12
Code No.
for use in
Model
code
Protection
Type
Certificate

Pin
Process
connection
HPG
connection
+UB
+UB
0V
Comport 1 *
0V
0V
Out 1
n.c.
0V
Comport 2 *
Zones /
Categories
Electrical
Connection
I M1 Ex ia I
II 1G Ex ia IIC
T4, T5, T6
II 2G Ex ia IIC
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC
T4, T5, T6
II 1D Ex iaD 20
T100 C
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
Group I
Category M1
Group II
Category 1G
Group II
Category 2G, 1/2G
Group II
Category iD
Mining
Gases
Gases
Dusts
Protection
class:
intrinsically
safe ia with
barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
For use in Zone 0
For use in Zone

1, 2
For mounting to
Zone 0
For use in Zone

20, 21, 22
For mounting to
Zone 20
T4, T5: Ta = 70 C
T6:
Ta = 60 C
T4, T5: Ta = 70 C
T6:
Ta = 60 C
T100: Ta = 70 C
Model code:
EDS4148XXXXP AN X000 X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
01.0; 02.5
Switching output
P = Programmable
Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = I M1 Ex ia I
8 = II 1D Ex iaD 20 T100 C
Modification number
000 = Standard
1 = Stainless steel
E 18.341.2/11.13
Accessories:
240
When operating in potentially explosive locations, the programming cables may
only be connected to the 0 V outside of the potentially explosive area.
Dual Zener barriers specified and approved in the technical data must be used to
connect the pressure switch.
Note:

Dimensions:
male electr. conn.
5 pole
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
12
Programming Unit:
Caution:
electr. conn.
female 5 pole
area.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.341.2/11.13

HPG 3000 000
Part. No. 909 422
241
E 18.341.2/11.13
12
242
Electronic
HDA 4700
CSA Non Incendive

in CSA version has been specially
developed for the North American
market for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres and is based on the
HDA 4000 series.
HDA 4700 in CSA version has a
example, the oil and gas industry, on
gas turbines or in locations with high
levels of dust, e.g. in mills.
Intrinsically safe:
- Class I Div. 1 Group A, B, C, D T6 [C, US]
- Class I Zone 0 AEx ia IIC T6
[US]
- Ex ia IIC T6
[C]
- Class I, II, III
Div. 1
Group A, B, C, D, E, F, G T6
[C, US]
Non incendive:
- Class I Div. 2 Group A, B, C, D T4A [C, US]
- Class I Zone 2 AEx nL IIC T4
[US]
- Class I Zone 2 Ex nL IIC T4
[C]
- Class I, II, III
Div. 2
Group A, B, C, D, F, G T4A
- Class I Zone 2 AEx nA II T4
- Class I Zone 2 Ex nA II T4
Special features:

Certificate: CSA 1760344
[C, US]
[US]
[C]
Technical data:
Input data
-1 .. 9; 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
Measuring ranges1)2)
Overload pressures
20; 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
200; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
Burst pressures
Mechanical connection2) G1/4 A DIN 3852

G1/2 DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm; 40 Nm
Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
1.4404; 1.4301

Seal:
FPM
Output data

RLmax = (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0.25 % FS typ.
Max. setting
0.5 % FS max.
0.15 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.25 % FS max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.015 % FS / C max.
12
0.008 % FS / C typ.
Over range

0.015 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.05 % FS
Rise time
1.5 ms
Long-term drift
Intrinsically safe: -20 .. +60 C

Non incendive: -20 .. +85 C
Intrinsically safe: -40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C

Non incendive: -40 .. +85 C / -20 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C

Non incendive: -40 .. +85 C / -20 .. +85 C
mark
Certificate No.: CSA 1760344
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Protection class to IEC 60529 / NEMA
Min. IP 65
(depending on the electr. connection)
Min. NEMA 4
Supply voltage
12 .. 28 V DC
Max. input current
100 mA
Max. input power
up to 28 V: 1 W
22 nF
0 mH
Other data
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g


1)

psi pressure ranges on request
2)

1000 bar only with mechanical connection G 1/2 DIN 3852 and vice versa.
3)

4)

500 V AC on request
E 18.342.2/11.13
Description:
243
Pin connections:
Group
Protection
Type
HDA 47X9-A
green
Signal +
white
Signal -
greenyellow
Housing
Zones /
Categories
Intrinsically safe
Non incendive
Non incendive
Gases and dusts
Gases
Gases
Gases and dusts
Intrinsically safe
Intrinsically safe
Non incendive
Non incendive
- Class I, II, III

- Division 1
- Group
A, B, C, D, E, F, G
T6
Ex ia IIC T6
- Class I
- Division 2
- Group
A, B, C, D
T4A
- Class I, II, III

- Division 2
- Group
A, B, C, D, F, G
T4A
- Class I
- Zone 2
- AEx nL IIC T4
- Class I
- Zone 2
- Ex nA II T4
- Class I
- Zone 2
- Ex nL IIC T4
- Class I
- Zone 2
- AEx nA II T4 IP 6x
E 18.342.2/11.13
12
244
HDA 47X5-A
HDA 47XA-A
Signal +
Signal +
Signal -
Signal -
n.c.
n.c.
Housing
Housing
(with field cabling)
CSA 1760344
- Class I
- Zone 0
- AEx ia IIC T6
- Class I
- Division I
- Group
A, B, C, D
T6
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
Intrinsically safe
Certificate
Core
Electrical
Connection
9, A
Code for
Model Code
Model code:
5, 9, A
5, 9, A
B
9
C
HDA47XXAXXXXC N X000 (2m)
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852

(only for pressure range "1000 bar")
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
9 = Conduit connection thread
(1/2-14 NPT, male)
A = Male, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650), 3 pole + PE
(1/2 conduit female thread)
Signal
0009 (-1..9); 0016; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Approval
C = CSA
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
A = Group 1
B = Group 2 and 3
C = Group 4
Modification number
000 = Standard
Cable length in m (only for electr. connection type 9)
Standard = 2 m
Accessories:
Note:
Dimensions:

described.
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
welded
hex.-SW27
12
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.342.2/11.13
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
245
E 18.342.2/11.13
12
246
Electronic
HDA 4400
CSA Non Incendive

HDA 4000 series.
Intrinsically safe:
- Class I Div. 1 Group A, B, C, D T6 [C, US]
[US]
- Ex ia IIC T6
[C]
- Class I, II, III
Div. 1
[C, US]
Non incendive:
[US]
[C]
- Class I, II, III
Div. 2
Special features:

[C, US]
[US]
[C]
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges1)
Overload pressures
Burst pressures

Torque value
16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar

32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 900; 1600 bar
200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852
G1/4 A DIN 3852
45 Nm; 20 Nm
Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
1.4404; 1.4301
Seal:
FPM

Output data
RLmax = (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.5 % FS max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
Over range
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.4 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.1 % FS
Rise time
1.5 ms
Long-term drift


-40 .. +100 C
Non incendive: -40 .. +85 C / -20 .. +85 C

mark
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Min. IP 65
Min. NEMA 4
Supply voltage
12 .. 28 V DC
Max. input current
100 mA
Max. input power
up to 28 V: 1 W
22 nF
0 mH
Other data
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
Note:


FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range, B.F.S.L.= Best Fit Straight Line
1)
1000 bar only with mechanical connection G DIN 3852 and vice versa
2)
3)
4)
500 V AC on request
12
E 18.342.1.0/11.13
Description:
247
Pin connections:
Group
Protection
Type
HDA 44X9-A
green
Signal +
white
Signal -
greenyellow
Housing
Zones /
Categories
Intrinsically safe
Non incendive
Non incendive
Gases and dusts
Gases
Gases
Gases and dusts
Intrinsically safe
Intrinsically safe
Non incendive
Non incendive
- Class I, II, III

- Division 1
- Group
A, B, C, D, E, F, G
T6
Ex ia IIC T6
- Class I
- Division 2
- Group
A, B, C, D
T4A
- Class I, II, III

- Division 2
- Group
A, B, C, D, F, G
T4A
- Class I
- Zone 2
- AEx nL IIC T4
- Class I
- Zone 2
- Ex nA II T4
- Class I
- Zone 2
- Ex nL IIC T4
- Class I
- Zone 2
12
HDA 44X5-A
HDA 44XA-A
Signal +
Signal +
Signal -
Signal -
n.c.
n.c.
Housing
Housing
CSA 1760344
- Class I
- Zone 0
- AEx ia IIC T6
- Class I
- Division I
- Group
A, B, C, D
T6
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
Electrical
Connection
9, A
Code for
Model Code
Model code:
5, 9, A
5, 9, A
B
E 18.342.1.0/11.13
9
C
HDA44XXAXXXXC N X000 (2m)
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852

(only for pressure range "1000 bar")
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
(1/2-14 NPT, male)
A = Male, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650), 3 pole + PE
Signal
0016; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Approval
C = CSA
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
A = Group 1
B = Group 2 and 3
C = Group 4
Modification number
000 = Standard
Cable length in m (only for electr. connection code 9)
Standard = 2 m
Accessories:
248
Intrinsically safe
Certificate
Core
Note:
Dimensions:

described.
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
welded
hex.-SW27
12
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.342.1.0/11.13
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
249
E 18.342.1.0/11.13
12
250
Electronic
HDA 4300
CSA Non Incendive

HDA 4000 series.
HDA 4300 in CSA version has a ceramic
gauge for measuring relative pressure in
the low pressure range.
example, the oil and gas industry, on gas
turbines or in locations with high levels of
dust, e.g. in mills.
Intrinsically safe:
- Class I Div. 1 Group A, B, C, D T6
- Ex ia IIC T6
[C, US]
[US]
[C]
- Class I, II, III

Div. 1
[C, US]
Non incendive:
[US]
[C]
- Class I, II, III
Div. 2
Special features:

[C, US]
[US]
[C]
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges1)
-1 .. 1; 1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40 bar
Overload pressures
3; 3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120 bar
Burst pressures
5; 5; 12;18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm
Sensor:
Ceramic Al203

Mech. conn.:
1.4301

Seal:
FPM / EPDM
Output data
RLmax = (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]

0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1.0 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.5 % FS max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.03 % FS / C max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
Over range

0.03 % FS / C max.
0.5 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.4 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.1 % FS
Rise time
1.5 ms
Long-term drift


-40 .. +100 C

Non incendive: -40 .. +85 C / -20 .. +85 C
mark
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Min. IP 65
Min. NEMA 4
Supply voltage
12 .. 28 V DC
Max. input current
100 mA
Max. input power
up to 28 V: 1 W
22 nF
0 mH
Other data
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 180 g

1)

2)

-20 C with FPM or EPDM seal, -40 on request
3)

500 V AC on request
12
E 18.343.2/11.13
Description:
251
Pin connections:
Group
Protection
Type
HDA 43X9-A
green
Signal +
white
Signal -
greenyellow
Housing
Zones /
Categories
Intrinsically safe
Non incendive
Non incendive
Gases and dusts
Gases
Gases
Gases and dusts
Intrinsically safe
Intrinsically safe
Non incendive
Non incendive
- Class I, II, III

- Division 1
- Group
A, B, C, D, E, F, G
T6
Ex ia IIC T6
- Class I
- Division 2
- Group
A, B, C, D
T4A
- Class I, II, III

- Division 2
- Group
A, B, C, D, F, G
T4A
- Class I
- Zone 2
- AEx nL IIC T4
- Class I
- Zone 2
- Ex nA II T4
- Class I
- Zone 2
- Ex nL IIC T4
- Class I
- Zone 2
- Class I
- Zone 0
- AEx ia IIC T6
- Class I
- Division I
- Group
A, B, C, D
T6
Electrical
Connection
9, A
Code for
Model Code
Model code:
12
HDA 43X5-A
HDA 43XA-A
Signal +
Signal +
Signal -
Signal -
n.c.
n.c.
Housing
Housing
CSA 1760344
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
5, 9, A
5, 9, A
B
E 18.343.2/11.13
9
C
HDA434XAXXXXC N X000 X 1 (2m)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
5 = Male, 3 pole+ PE, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
(1/2-14 NPT, male)
A = Male, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650), 3 pole + PE
Signal
0001(-1..1); 01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
Approval
C = CSA
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
A = Group 1
B = Group 2 and 3
C = Group 4
Modification number
000 = Standard
1 = Stainless steel
Standard = 2 m
Accessories:
252
Intrinsically safe
Certificate
Core
Note:
Dimensions:

described.
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
welded
hex.-SW27
12

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.343.2/11.13
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
253
E 18.343.2/11.13
12
254
Electronic
HDA 4100
CSA Non Incendive

HDA 4000 series.
ceramic measurement cell with thickfilm strain gauge for measuring absolute
Intrinsically safe:
- Class I Div. 1 Group A, B, C, D T6
- Ex ia IIC T6
[C, US]
[US]
[C]
- Class I, II, III

Div. 1
[C, US]
Non incendive:
[US]
[C]
- Class I, II, III
Div. 2
Special features:

[C, US]
[US]
[C]
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges1)
1; 2.5 bar
Overload pressures
3; 8 bar
Burst pressures
5; 12 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm
Sensor:
Ceramic Al203

Mech. conn.:
1.4301

Seal:
FPM / EPDM
Output data
4 ..20 mA, 2 conductor
RLmax.= (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1.0 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.5 % FS max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.03 % FS / C max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
Over range

0.03 % FS / C max.
0.5 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
0.4 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.1 % FS
1.5 ms
Rise time
Long-term drift


-40 .. +100 C

Non incendive: -40 .. +85 C / -20 .. +85 C
mark
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Min. IP 65
Min. NEMA 4
Supply voltage
12 .. 28 V DC
Max. input current
100 mA
Max. input power
up to 28 V: 1 W
22 nF
0 mH
Other data
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
~ 180 g
Weight

1)

2)

-20C with FPM or EPDM seal, -40 on request
3)

500 V AC on request
12
E 18.344.2/11.13
Description:
255
Pin connections:
Group
Protection
Type
HDA 41X9-A
green
Signal +
white
Signal -
greenyellow
Housing
Zones /
Categories
Intrinsically safe
Non incendive
Non incendive
Gases and dusts
Gases
Gases
Gases and dusts
E 18.344.2/11.13
12
256
HDA 41X5-A
HDA 41XA-A
Signal +
Signal +
Signal -
Signal -
n.c.
n.c.
Housing
Housing
CSA 1760344
Intrinsically safe
Intrinsically safe
Non incendive
Non incendive
- Class I, II, III

- Division 1
- Group
A, B, C, D, E, F, G
T6
Ex ia IIC T6
- Class I
- Division 2
- Group
A, B, C, D
T4A
- Class I, II, III

- Division 2
- Group
A, B, C, D, F, G
T4A
- Class I
- Zone 2
- AEx nL IIC T4
- Class I
- Zone 2
- Ex nA II T4
- Class I
- Zone 2
- Ex nL IIC T4
- Class I
- Zone 2
- Class I
- Zone 0
- AEx ia IIC T6
- Class I
- Division I
- Group
A, B, C, D
T6
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
Intrinsically safe
Certificate
Core
Electrical
Connection
9, A
Code for
Model Code
5, 9, A
5, 9, A
B
9
C
Model code:
HDA414XAXXXXC N X000 X 1 (2m)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
5 = Male, 3 pole+ PE,
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
(1/2-14 NPT, male)
A = Male EN175301-803
(DIN 43650), 3 pole + PE
Signal
01.0; 02.5
Approval
C = CSA
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
A = Group 1
B = Group 2 and 3
C = Group 4
Modification number
000 = Standard
1 = Stainless steel
Standard = 2 m
Accessories:
Note:
Dimensions:

described.
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
welded
hex.-SW27
12

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.344.2/11.13
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
257
E 18.344.2/11.13
12
258
Electronic
HDA 4700
IECEx Intrinsically Safe
IECEx Dustproof Enclosure
IECEx Non-sparking

IECEx Intrinsically Safe version has
been especially developed for use in
is based on the HDA 4000 series.
HDA 4700, devices with IECEx
Intrinsically Safe approval have a
field-proven, all-welded stainless steel
measurement cell with thin film strain
gauge without internal seal.
with high dust loads, e.g. in mills.
Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Ex nA llC T6,T5,T4 Gc
Ex ic llC T6,T5,T4 Gc
Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 C Da
T500 90/100/110 C Da
Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 C Db
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 C Dc
Ex ic lllC T80/90/100 C Dc
Ex ia lllC T85 C Da
Special features:

Certificate:
IECEx TSA 09.0041X /
IECEx KEM 08.0014X
Robust design
Excellent long-term properties
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges1)
-1 .. 9; 6; 16; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600;

1000 bar
Overload pressures
20; 15; 32; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000;

1600 bar
Burst pressure
100; 100; 200; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000;

3000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
(torque value)
G1/2 DIN 3852 (40Nm)
Stainl. steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;

1.4404; 1.4301

Seal:
FPM
Output data
RLmax = (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0.25 % FS typ.
Max. setting
0.5 % FS max.
0.15 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.)
0.3 % FS max.

0.008 % FS / C typ.
Zero point
0.015 % FS / C max.

0.008 % FS / C typ.
0.015 % FS / C max.
Over range

0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis

0.1 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.05 % FS
Rise time
1.5 ms
Long-term drift
-20 .. +85 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4;

EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 36
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (for male EN175301-803


Ex ia, ic
Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
Supply voltage
Ui = 12 .. 28 V
12 .. 28 V
Max. input current
Ii = 100 mA
Max. input power
Pi = 1 W
1W
Ci = 22 nF
Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
Other data
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
1)
2)
3)
500 V AC on request
12
E 18.392.1/11.13
Description:
259
Protection types
and
applications
Zones /
Categories
Code for
use in
Model code
IECEx
IECEx
Australia
Ex ia I Ma
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia IIC T6 Gb
Ex nA llC T6 Gc
Ex ta lllC T80 C
T500T90 C Da
Ex tb lllC T80 C Db
Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80 C Dc
Ex ia lIIC T85 C Da
Equipment protection level

Ma
Equipment
protection level
Ga, Ga/Gb
Equipment
protection level
Gb
Equipment
protection level
Gc
Equipment
protection level
Da, Db
Equipment
protection level
Gc, Dc
Equipment
protection level
Da
Mining
Gases
Gases
Gases
Conductive dust
Conductive dust
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
non-sparking nA
Protection class:
Dustproof
enclosure
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
Certificate numbers: IECEx TSA 09.0041X, IECEx KEM 08.0014X

Devices in the ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 C Da T500T90/T100/T110C Da, Ex tb lllC
T80/90/100 C Db and Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 C Dc are available with flying leads on request. Devices in the ignition protection class "non-sparking" for
protection type Ex nA llC T6, T5, T4 Gc are available with flying leads on request.
Model code:
E 18.392.1/11.13
12
260
HDA47XXAXXXX I N X 000
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852
(only for "1000 bar" pressure range)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
4 = Male 4 pole Binder series 714 M18 (connector not supplied)
5 = Male 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) (connector supplied)
6 =
Male M12x1, 4 pole (connector not supplied)
Signal
0009 (-1..9); 0006; 0016; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600;
Approval
I = IECEx
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
9 = Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. connection "6")*
A = Ex ta lllC T80 C T500T90 C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection "6")*
Ex tb lllC T80 C Db
C = Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80 C Dc
D = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Ex ia lllC T85 C Da
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
* For design and electrical connection see Dimensions
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical female connectors, can be found in the Accessories brochure.
Pin connections:
Dimensions:
Protection types and applications: (code): 1, C, D
profile seal
ring
Pin
male electr. conn.
Binder series 714, -4p
male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4 pole
HDA 47x4-A
n.c.
Signal +
Signal -
n.c.
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
Pin
HDA 47x5-A
Signal +
Signal -
n.c.
Housing
M12x1
12
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
Protection types and applications: (code): 9, A
Pin
HDA 47x6-A
Signal +
n.c.
Signal -
n.c.
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
E 18.392.1/11.13
hexSW27
261
Note:

E 18.392.1/11.13
12
262

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 4400
IECEx Non-sparking

IECEx Intrinsically Safe version has been
especially developed for use in potentially
explosive atmospheres and is based on
the HDA 4000 series.
with high dust loads, e.g. in mills.

Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
T500 90/100/110 C Da
Ex ia lllC T85 C Da
Special features:
Accuracy: 0.5 % FS typ.

Certificate:
IECEx KEM 08.0014X
Robust design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges1)
Overload ranges
Burst pressure
(Torque value)
Output data
Max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
Zero point
Over range
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long term drift

- mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz

Supply voltage
Max. input current
Max. input power
Other data
Life expectancy
Weight
16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar

32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
G1/2 DIN 3852 (45 Nm)
G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
Stainless steel:
1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;

1.4404; 1.4301
FPM
Seal:
conductor
4 .. 20 mA, 2
RLmax = (UB 12 V) / 20 mA [k]
0.5 % FS typ.
1.0 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
12
0.4 % FS max.
0.25 % FS
1.5 ms
-20 .. +85 C
-20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 36
20 g
IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) and
Binder 714 M18)
Ex ia, ic
Ui = 12 .. 28 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
Ex nA, ta, tb, tc

12 .. 28 V

1W
Ci = 22 nF
Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
5%
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 150 g

1)
2)
3)
500 V AC on request
E 18.392.1.0/11.13
Description:
263
Protection types
and
applications
Zones /
Categories
Code for
use in
Model code
IECEx
IECEx
Australia
Ex ia I Ma
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia IIC T6 Gb
Ex nA llC T6 Gc
Ex ta lllC T80 C
T500T90 C Da
Ex tb lllC T80 C Db
Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80 C Dc

Ma

Ga, Ga/Gb

Gb
Equipment protection evel

Gc

Da, Db
Equipment protection
level
Gc, Dc
Mining
Gases
Gases
Gases
Conductive dust
Conductive dust
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
non-sparking nA
Protection class:
Dustproof
enclosure
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
Ex ia lIIC T85 C Da
Da
4, 5, 6

T80/90/100 C Db and Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 C Dc are available with flying leads on request. Devices in the ignition protection class "non-sparking" for
protection types Ex nA llC T6, T5, T4 Gc are available with flying leads on request.
Model code:

12
HDA44XXAXXXXINX000
= G1/2 DIN 3852 (only for "1000 bar" pressure range)
2
4
= G1/4 A DIN 3852
= Male 4 pole Binder series 714 M18 (connector not supplied)
4
5
= Male 3 pole + PE, EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) (connector supplied)
= Male M12x1, 4 pole (connector not supplied)
6
Signal
0016; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Approval
I = IECEx
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Ex tb lllC T80 C Db
C = Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80 C Dc
D = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Ex ia lllC T85 C Da
Modification number
000 = Standard
E 18.392.1.0/11.13
Notes:
*For design and electrical connection see Dimensions
264
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, can be found in the Accessories brochure.
Pin connections:
Dimensions:
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

Binder series 714, -4p
male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4 pole
Pin
1
2
3
4
HDA 44x4-A
n.c.
Signal +
Signal n.c.
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
hex-SW27
Pin
1
2
3
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
HDA 44x5-A
Signal +
Signal n.c.
Housing
12
M12x1, 4 pole
Protection types and applications: (code): 9, A

Pin
1
2
3
4
HDA 44x6-A
Signal +
n.c.
Signal n.c.
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
E 18.392.1.0/11.13
hexSW27
265
Note:

E 18.392.1.0/11.13
12
266

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 4300
IECEx Non-sparking

in IECEx Intrinsically Safe version has
and is based on the HDA 4000 series.
As with the industrial version,
the HDA 4300 with IECEx Intrinsically
Safe approval has the field-proven
ceramic measuring cell with thick-film
strain gauge.
e.g. in mills.

Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Ex ta lllC T80/90/100C Da
T500 90/100/110C Da
Ex tb lllC T80/90/100C Db
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100C Dc
Ex ic lllC T80/90/100C Dc
Ex ia lllC T85C Da
Special features:

Certificate:
IECEx KEM 08.0014X
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
Torque value
Output data
max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
Zero point
Over range
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long term drift
- mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz

Supply voltage
Max. input current
Max. input power
Other data
Life expectancy
Weight
-1 .. 1; 1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40 bar

3; 3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120 bar
5; 5; 12;18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
Sensor:
Ceramic
Mech. connection: 1.4301
Seal:
FPM / EPDM
4 .. 20 mA, 2
-conductor
RLmax = (UB 12 V) / 20 mA [k]
0.5 % FS typ.
1.0 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
0.03 % FS / C max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
0.03 % FS / C max.
0.5 % FS max.
12
0.4 % FS max.
0.1 % FS
1.5 ms
-20 .. +85 C
-20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 36
20 g
IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
and Binder 714 M18)
Ex ia, ic
Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
Ui = 12 .. 28 V
12 .. 28 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
1W
Ci = 22 nF
Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
5%
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 180 g

1)
2)
500 V AC on request
E 18.392.3.0/11.13
Description:
267
Protection types
and
applications
Zones /
Categories
Code (see
model code)
IECEx
IECEx
Australia
Ex ia I Ma
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia IIC T6 Gb
Ex nA llC T6 Gc
Ex ta lllC T80C
T500T90C Da
Ex tb lllC T80C Db
Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80C Dc
Equipment level
standard
Ma
Equipment level
standard
Ga, Ga/Gb
Equipment level
standard
Gb
Equipment level
standard
Gc
Equipment level
standard
Da, Db
Equipment level
standard
Gc, Dc
Equipment level
standard
Mining
Gases
Gases
Gases
Conductive dust
Conductive dust
Protection class:
intrinsically
safe ia
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
non-sparking nA
Protection class:
Dustproof
enclosure
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
Ex ia lIIC T85 C Da
Da
4, 5, 6

T80/90/100C Db and Ex tc lllC T80/90/100C Dc are available with flying leads on request. Devices in the ignition protection class "non-sparking" for
Model code:

E 18.392.3.0/11.13
12
268
HDA434XAXXXXINX000X1
4
= G1/4 A DIN 3852
4
= Male, 4 pole Binder series 714 M18 (connector not supplied)
5
= Male, 3 pole + PE, EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) (connector supplied)
6
= Male, M12x1, 4 pole (connector not supplied)
Signal
0001 (-1..1); 01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
Approval
I = IECEx
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
9 = Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. connection 6)*
A = Ex ta lllC T80C T500T90C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection 6")*
Ex tb lllC T80C Db
C = Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80C Dc
D = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Ex ia lllC T85C Da
Modification number
000 = Standard
1
= Stainless steel
Notes:
*
For design and electrical connection see device dimensions
Accessories:
Pin connections:
Dimensions:
Protection types and applications (code): 1, C, D
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4 pole
Pin
1
2
3
4
HDA 43x4-A
n.c.
Signal +
Signal n.c.
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Pin
1
2
3
HDA 43x5-A
Signal +
Signal n.c.
Housing
12
M12x1, 4 pole

Pin
1
2
3
4
HDA 43x6-A
Signal +
n.c.
Signal n.c.
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
E 18.392.3.0/11.13
hex.-SW27
269
Note:

described.
E 18.392.3.0/11.13
12
270

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 4100
IECEx Non-sparking

in IECEx Intrinsically Safe version has
for absolute measurement in the low
pressure range and is based
As with the industrial version, the
HDA 4100 with IECEx Intrinsically Safe
approval has the field-proven ceramic
measuring cell with thick-film strain
gauge without interior seals.
e.g. in mills.

Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
T500 90/100/110C Da
Ex ia lllC T85C Da
Special features:

Certificate:
IECEx KEM 08.0014X
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
Torque value
Output data
max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
zero point
over range
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long term drift
- mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz

Supply voltage
Max. input current
Max. input power
Other data
Life expectancy
Weight
1; 2.5 bar
3; 8 bar
5; 12 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
Sensor:
Mech. connection:
Seal:
Ceramic
1.4301
FPM / EPDM
4 .. 20 mA, 2
conductor
RLmax = (UB 12 V) / 20 mA [k]
0.5 % FS typ.
1.0 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
0.03 % FS / C max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
0.03 % FS / C max.
0.5 % FS max.
12
0.4 % FS max.
0.1 % FS
1.5 ms
-20 .. +85 C
-20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 36
20 g
IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
and Binder 714 M18)
Ex ia, ic
Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
Ui = 12 .. 28 V
12 .. 28 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
1W
Ci = 22 nF
Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
5%
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 180 g

1)
2)
500 V AC on request
E 18.392.2.0/11.13
Description:
271
Protection types
and
applications
Zones /
Categories
Code (see
model code)
IECEx
IECEx
Australia
Ex ia I Ma
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia IIC T6 Gb
Ex nA llC T6 Gc
Ex ta lllC T80C
T500T90C Da
Ex tb lllC T80C Db
Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80C Dc
Equipment level
standard
Ma
Equipment level
standard
Ga, Ga/Gb
Equipment level
standard
Gb
Equipment level
standard
Gc
Equipment level
standard
Da, Db
Equipment level
standard
Gc, Dc
Equipment level
standard
Mining
Gases
Gases
Gases
Conductive dust
Conductive dust
Protection class:
intrinsically
safe ia
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
non-sparking nA
Protection class:
Dustproof
enclosure
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
Ex ia lIIC T85 C Da
Da
4, 5, 6

T80/90/100C Db and Ex tc lllC T80/90/100C Dc are available with flying leads on request. Devices in the ignition protection class "non-sparking" for
Model code:

E 18.392.2.0/11.13
12
272
HDA414XAXXXXINX000X1
4
= G1/4 A DIN 3852
4
= Male, 4 pole Binder series 714 M18 (connector not supplied)
5
= Male, 3 pole + PE, EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) (connector supplied)
6
= Male, M12x1, 4 pole (connector not supplied)
Signal
01.0; 02.5;
Approval
I = IECEx
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
A = Ex ta lllC T80C T500T90C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection "6")*
Ex tb lllC T80C Db
C = Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80C Dc
D = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Ex ia lllC T85C Da
Modification number
000 = Standard
1
= Stainless steel
Notes:
*
For design and electrical connection see device dimensions
Accessories:
Pin connections:
Dimensions:
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.

4 pole
Pin
1
2
3
4
HDA 41x4-A
n.c.
Signal +
Signal n.c.
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Pin
1
2
3
HDA 41x5-A
Signal +
Signal n.c.
Housing
12
M12x1, 4 pole

Pin
1
2
3
4
HDA 41x6-A
Signal +
n.c.
Signal n.c.
Impact protected
metal safety
sleeve
SW25
E 18.392.2.0/11.13
hex.-SW27
273
Note:

E 18.392.2.0/11.13
12
274

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 4700
with Flush Membrane
ATEX Non-sparking
The pressure transmitter HDA 4700 in
ATEX version with flush membrane has
potentially explosive atmospheres.
with flush membrane has a stainless steel
measurement cell with a thin film strain
gauge.
with an all-welded stainless steel
pressure is transmitted hydrostatically to
the measurement cell via the pressure
transfer fluid.
This device is used for applications in
where the medium changes regularly
and any residues could cause mixing
or contamination of the media, or in
highly viscous media. Intended areas of
application are, for example, the oil and
gas industry, in mines or in locations with
high levels of dust, e.g. in mills.
I M1 Ex ia I Ma
T500T90/T100/T110 C Da
Special features:

membrane
Accuracy 0.25 % typ.
Certificates:
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X
KEMA 05ATEX1021
Robust design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload ranges
Burst pressure 1)
Torque value
Output data
max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
Zero point
Over range
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long term drift
mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Supply voltage
Max. input current
Max. input power
Other data
Life expectancy
Weight
40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar

80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 900 bar
200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852
Silicon-free oil
45 Nm
Stainless steel:
1.4435; 1.4301
FPM
Seal:
O-ring:
FPM
RLmax = (UB 12 V) / 20 mA [k]
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.15 % FS typ.
0.25 % FS max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
12
0.1 % FS max.
0.05 % FS
1.5 ms
-20 .. +85 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 31
EN 50303
20 g
IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803(DIN 43650))

Ex ia, ic
Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
Ui = 12 .. 28 V
12 .. 28 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
1W
Ci = 22 nF
Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
5%
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 180 g
provided.

1)

2)
3)

4)

500 V AC on request
E 18.374.1.0/11.13
Description:
275
Code used in
Model code
Protection type
I M1 Ex ia I Ma
Certificate
Zones /
Categories
A
T500T90C Da
C
Group I
Category M1
Group II, lll

Group II
Category 2G
Group II
Category 3G
Group IIl
Category 1D, 2D
Group II, lll

Category 3G, 3D
Mining
Gases
Gases
Conductive dust
Protection class:
intrinsically safe
ia with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
Non-sparking nA
Protection class:
Dustproof enclosure
Protection class:
with barrier
Electrical
Connection
(see model code)
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4,5,6
Pin connections:
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
12
Pin
HDA 47Z5-A
Signal +
Signal -
n.c.
Housing
M12x1, 4 pole
Pin
HDA 47Z6-A
Signal +
n.c.
Signal -
n.c.
Model code:

HDA47ZXAXXXXXXXANX000

Z = Flush membrane
5
= Male 3 pole + PE,
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6
Signal
0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = I M1 Ex ia I Ma
A = II 1D Ex ta lllC T80 C T500T90 C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection 6)*
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
E 18.374.1.0/11.13
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical female connectors, can be found in the
276
Note:
Dimensions:
35.5
~ 35

Profile seal ring

M3
27.5
male electr. conn.

3p +PE EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr.
conn. 4p
18
12
12.3
M12x1
59.4
35
27
13.8
hexSW27
Elastomer profile
seal ring DIN3869
G1/2 A
26 h14
29.5
12
seal ring DIN3869

18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
10
20.5
hexSW27
O-ring 15 x 2
18.1
G1/2 A
26 h14
29.5
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
The impact protected metal safety sleeve is included.

A straight female connector is required for electrical
connection, e.g. female connector M12x1, 4 pole,
straight, with 3m shielded cable: ZBE 06S-03,
Part. No. 6098243

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.374.1.0/11.13
hexSW27
277
E 18.374.1.0/11.13
12
278
Electronic
HDA 4400
with Flush Membrane
ATEX Non-sparking
developed for use in potentially explosive
HDA 4000 series.
stainless steel measurement cell with thinfilm strain gauge.
transfer fluid.
contamination of the media. Intended
areas of application are, for example,
the oil and gas industry, in mines, or in
locations with high levels of dust,
e.g. in mills.
I M1 Ex ia I Ma
T500T90/T100/T110 C Da
Special features:

membrane
Accuracy 0.5 % typ.
Certificates:
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X
KEMA 05ATEX1021
Robust design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload ranges
Burst pressure 1)
Torque value
Output data
max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
Zero point
Over range
Non-linearity at max. setting to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long term drift
mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz
Supply voltage
Max. input current
Max. input power
Other data
Life expectancy
Weight
40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar

80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 900 bar
200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/2A DIN 3852
Silicon-free oil
45 Nm for G1/2, G1/2 A
20 Nm for G1/4
Stainless steel:
1.4435; 1.4301
Seal:
FPM
O-ring:
FPM
RLmax = (UB 12 V) / 20 mA [k]
0.5 % FS typ.
1.0 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
0.4 % FS max.
0.1 % FS
1.5 ms
12
-20 .. +85 C
-20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 31
EN 50303
20 g
IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803(DIN 43650))
Ex ia, ic
Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
12 .. 28 V
Ui = 12 .. 28 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
1W
Ci = 22 nF
Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
5%
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 180 g
provided.

1)

2)
3)

4)

500 V AC on request
E 18.375.1.0/11.13
Description:
279
Code used in
Model code
Protection type
I M1 Ex ia I Ma
Certificate
Zones /
Categories
Electrical
Connection
(see model code)
A
T500T90C Da
C
Group I
Category M1
Group II, lll

Group II
Category 2G
Group II
Category 3G
Group IIl
Category 1D, 2D
Group II, lll

Category 3G, 3D
Mining
Gases
Gases
Conductive dust
Protection
class:
intrinsically
safe ia
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
Non-sparking nA
Protection class:
Dustproof enclosure
Protection class:
with barrier
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4,5,6
Pin connections:
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
12
Pin
1
2
3
HDA 44Z5-A
Signal +
Signal n.c.
Housing
M12x1, 4 pole
Pin
1
2
3
4
HDA 44Z6-A
Signal +
n.c.
Signal n.c.
Model code:

HDA44ZXAXXXXXXXANX000

Z = Flush membrane
5
= Male 3 pole + PE,
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6
Signal
0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = I M1 Ex ia I Ma
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
E 18.375.1.0/11.13
Accessories:
280
Note:
Dimensions:

35.5
~ 35
Profile seal ring

M3
27.5
male electr. conn.

3p +PE EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr.
conn. 4p
18
12
12.3
M12x1
59.4
35
hexSW27
Elastomer profile
seal ring DIN3869
13.8
27
G1/2 A
29 h14
29.5
12
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78

10.9
hex-SW27
20.5
seal ring DIN3869

18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
10
19.5
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869
11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5
O-ring 15 x 2
18.1
G1/4 A
G1/2 A
18.9
26 h14
29.5
29.5
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25

connection. e.g. female connector M12x1, 4 pole,
Part. No. 6098243

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.375.1.0/11.13
hexSW27
281
E 18.375.1.0/11.13
12
282
Electronic
HDA 4300
with Flush Membrane
ATEX Non-sparking
developed for use in potentially explosive
HDA 4000 series.
HDA 4300 in ATEX version has the fieldproven ceramic measurement cell with
thick-film strain gauge.
transfer fluid.
e.g. in mills.
I M1 Ex ia I Ma
II 1D Ex ta lllC T80/90/100C Da
T500T90/T100/T110C Da
II 2D Ex tb lllC T80/90/100C Db
II 3D Ex tc lllC T80/T90/T100C Dc
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80/T90/T100C Dc
Special features:

membrane
Certificates:
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X
KEMA 05ATEX1021
Robust design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload range
Burst pressure
Torque value
Output data
max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
Zero point
Over range
Non-linearity at max. setting to
DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long term drift

- mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz
Supply voltage
Max. input current
Max. input power
Other data
Life expectancy
-1 .. 1; -1 .. 9; 1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25 bar

3; 32; 3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80 bar
5; 48; 5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120 bar
G1/2A DIN 3852
Silicon-free oil
45 Nm for G1/2, G1/2 A
20 Nm for G1/4
Stainless steel: 1.4435; 1.4301
Seal:
FPM
FPM
O-ring:
RLmax = (UB 12 V) / 20 mA [k]
0.5 % FS typ.
1.0 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
0.03 % FS / C max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
0.03 % FS / C max.
12
0.5 % FS max.
0.4 % FS max.
0.1 % FS
1.5 ms
-20 .. +85 C
-20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 31
EN 50303
20 g
IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803(DIN 43650))
Ex ia, ic
Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
Ui = 12 .. 28 V
12 .. 28 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
1W
Ci = 22 nF
Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
5%
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 180 g
Weight
provided.

1)
2)

3)

500 V AC on request
E 18.376.3.0/11.13
Description:
283
Code
Model code
Protection type
I M1 Ex ia I Ma
Certificate
Zones /
Categories
Electrical
Connection
(see model
code)
A
T500T90C Da
C
Group I
Category M1
Group II, lll

Group II
Category 2G
Group II
Category 3G
Group IIl
Category 1D, 2D
Group II, lll

Category 3G, 3D
Mining
Gases
Gases
Conductive dust
Protection
class:
intrinsically
safe ia
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
Non-sparking nA
Protection class:
Dustproof enclosure
Protection class:
with barrier
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4,5,6
Pin connections:
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
12
Pin
1
2
3
HDA 43Z5-A
Signal +
Signal n.c.
Housing
M12x1, 4 pole
Pin
1
2
3
4
HDA 43Z6-A
Signal +
n.c.
Signal n.c.
Model code:

HDA43ZXAXXXXXXXANXXXX

Z = Flush membrane
5
= Male 3 pole + PE,
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6
Signal
0001(-1..1); 0009(-1..9); 01.0; 02.5; 04.0;
06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = I M1 Ex ia I Ma

ll 3D Ex ic lllC T80 C Dc
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
E 18.376.3.0/11.13
Accessories:
284
Note:
Dimensions:

35.5
~ 35
Profile seal ring

M3
27.5
male electr. conn.

3p +PE EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
18
12
12.3
M12x1
61.4
35
27
13.8
hex-SW27
Elastomer profile
seal ring DIN3869
G1/2 A
26 h14
29.5
12
2
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869
11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5
10
20.5
seal ring DIN3869

18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
19.5
hex-SW27
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78
O-ring 15 x 2
10.9
18.1
G1/4 A
G1/2 A
18.9
26 h14
29.5
29.5
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
hex-SW27

Part. No. 6098243

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.376.3.0/11.13
SW25
285
E 18.376.3.0/11.13
12
286
Electronic
HDA 4700
with Flush Membrane
IECEx Non-sparking
transfer fluid.
high levels of dust, e.g. in mills.
Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
T500 90/100/110C Da
Ex ia lllC T85C Da
Special features:

membrane
Certificate:
IECEx KEM 08.0014X
Robust design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload ranges
Burst pressure1)
Torque value
Output data
max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
zero point
over range
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long term drift
mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz
Supply voltage
Max. input current
Max. input power
Other data
Life expectancy
40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar

80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 900 bar
200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852
Silicon-free oil
45 Nm
Stainless steel:
1.4435; 1.4301
Seal:
FPM
O-ring:
FPM
RLmax = (UB 12 V) / 20 mA [k]
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.15 % FS typ.
0.25 % FS max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
12
0.1 % FS max.
0.05 % FS
1.5 ms
-20 .. +85 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 36
20 g
IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650))
Ex ia, ic
Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
Ui = 12 .. 28 V
12 .. 28 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
1W
Ci = 22 nF
Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
5%
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 180 g
provided.

1)

2)
3)

4)

500 V AC on request
E 18.374.3.0/11.13
Description:
287
Code used in
Model code
Protection types
and
applications
Ex ia I Ma
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia lIIC T85 C Da
Ex ia IIC T6 Gb
Equipment
protection level Ma

Ga, Ga/Gb, Da
Equipment
protection level Gb
Mining
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Ex ta lllC T80 C
T500T90 C Da
Ex tb lllC T80 C Db
Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80 C Dc
Equipment
protection level Gc
level Da, Db
level Gc, Dc
Gases
Gases
Conductive dust
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
Non-sparking nA
Protection class:
Dustproof enclosure
Protection class:
with barrier
Certificate
Zones /
Categories
Ex nA llC T6 Gc
IECEx KEM 08.0014X
Electrical
Connection
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4,5,6
Devices in ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 C Da T500T90/T100/T110 C Da, Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 C Db and
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 C Dc are available with flying leads on request.
Devices in the ignition protection class "Non-sparking" for the protection type Ex nA llC T6, T5, T4 Gc are available with flying leads on request.
Pin connections:
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
1
2
3
HDA 47Z5-A
Signal +
Signal n.c.
Housing
12
M12x1, 4 pole
Pin
1
2
3
4
HDA 47Z6-A
Signal +
n.c.
Signal n.c.
Model code:

HDA47ZXXXXXXXXXINX000

Z = Flush membrane
5
= Male 3 pole+ PE,
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6
Signal
0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
Approval
I = IECEx
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
D = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Ex ia lllC T85 C Da
9 = Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. connection 6) *
A = Ex ta lllC T80 C T500T90 C Da (only in conjunction with electr. conn. 6) *
Ex tb lllC T80 C Db
C = Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80 C Dc
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
E 18.374.3.0/11.13
Accessories:
288
Note:
Dimensions:
Protection types and applications (code): D, C
35.5
35

Profile seal ring

M3
27.5
male electr. conn.

3p +PE EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
18
male electr.
conn. 4p
12
12.3
M12x1
59.4
35
13.8
27
hexSW27
Elastomer profile
seal ring DIN3869
G1/2 A
26 h14
29.5
12
3
hex-SW27
10
20.5
seal ring DIN3869

18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
O-ring 15 x 2
18.1
G1/2 A
26 h14
29.5
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
hexSW27

Part. No. 6098243

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.374.3.0/11.13
SW25
289
E 18.374.3.0/11.13
12
290
Electronic
HDA 4400
with Flush Membrane
IECEx Non-sparking
transfer fluid.
high levls of dust, e.g. in mills.
Ex ia l Ma
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressure 1)
Torque value
Output data
max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
Zero point
Over range
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long term drift
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
T500 90/100/110 C Da
Ex ia lllC T85 C Da

Supply voltage
Max. input current
Max. input power
Special features:

membrane
Certificate:
IECEx KEM 08.0014X
Robust design
- mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz

Other data
Life expectancy
Weight
40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar

80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852
Silicon-free oil
45 Nm for G1/2, G1/2 A
20 Nm for G1/4
Stainless steel:
1.4435; 1.4301
Seal:
FPM
O-ring:
FPM
RLmax = (UB 12 V) / 20 mA [k]
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.015 % FS / C type
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
12
0.4 % FS max.
0.1 % FS
1.5 ms
-20 .. +85 C
-20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 36
20 g
IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803(DIN 43650))
Ex ia, ic
Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
12 .. 28 V
Ui = 12 .. 28 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
1W
Ci = 22 nF
Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
5%
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 180 g
provided.

1)

2)
3)

4)

500 V AC on request
E 18.392.4.0/11.13
Description:
291
Code No.
for use in
Model code
Protection
types and
applications
Ex ta lllC T80C
T500T90C Da
Ex tb lllC T80C Db
Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80C Dc
level Gc
level Da, Db
level Gc, Dc
Gases
Gases
Conductive dust
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
Non-sparking nA
Protection class:
Dustproof enclosure
Protection class:
with barrier
Ex ia I Ma
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia lIIC T85C Da
Ex ia IIC T6 Gb
Equipment
protection level Ma
level Ga, Ga/Gb, Da
level Gb
Mining
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Certificate
Zones /
Categories
Ex nA llC T6 Gc
IECEx KEM 08.0014X
Electrical
connection
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4,5,6
Devices in ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 C Da T500T90/T100/T110 C Da, Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 C Db and
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 C Dc are available with flying leads on request.
Devices in the ignition protection class "Non-sparking" for the protection type Ex nA llC T6, T5, T4 Gc are available with flying leads on request.
Pin connections:
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
1
2
3
12
HDA 44Z5-A
Signal +
Signal n.c.
Housing
M12x1, 4 pole
Pin
1
2
3
4
HDA 44Z6-A
Signal +
n.c.
Signal n.c.
Model code:

HDA44ZXAXXXXXXXINX000

Z = Flush membrane
5
= Male 3 pole+ PE,
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6
Signal
0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
Approval
I = IECEx
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
D = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Ex ia lllC T85 C Da
Ex tb lllC T80 C Db
C = Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80 C Dc
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
E 18.392.4.0/11.13
Accessories:
292
Note:
Dimensions:

described.
35.5
35
Profile seal ring

M3
27.5
male electr. conn.
3p +PE EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
18
12
12.3
M12x1
59.4
35
27
13.8
hex. SW27
Elastomer profile
seal ring DIN3869
G1/2 A
29 h14
29.5
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78

10.9
12
hex. SW27
20.5
seal ring DIN3869

18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
10
19.5
hex. SW27
seal ring DIN3869
11.6 x 16.5 x1.5
O-ring 15 x 2
18.1
G1/4 A
G1/2 A
18.9
26 h14
29.5
29.5
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
hex. SW27

connection; e.g. female connector M12x1, 4 pole,
Part. No. 6098243

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.392.4.0/11.13
SW25
293
E 18.392.4.0/11.13
12
294
Electronic
HDA 4300
with Flush Membrane
IECEx Non-sparking
As with the industrial version HDA 4300,
the devices with IECEx Intrinsically Safe
approval have the field-proven ceramic
measuring cell with thick-film strain
gauge.
transfer fluid.
e.g. in mills.
Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
T500 90/100/110 C Da
Ex ia lllC T85 C Da
Special features:

membrane
Certificate:
IECEx KEM 08.0014X
Robust design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressure
Torque value
Output data
max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
zero point
over range
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long term drift
mark
Vibration resistance acc. to
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Supply voltage
Max. input current
Max. input power
Other data
Life expectancy
Weight
-1 .. 1;-1 .. 9;1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25 bar

3; 32; 3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80 bar
5; 48; 5; 12;18; 30; 48; 75; 120 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852
Silicon-free oil
45 Nm for G1/2, G1/2 A
20 Nm for G1/4
Stainless steel:
1.4435; 1.4301
FPM
Seal:
O-ring:
FPM
RLmax = (UB 12 V) / 20 mA [k]
0.5 % FS typ.
1.0 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
0.03 % FS / C max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
0.03 % FS / C max.
0.5 % FS max.
12
0.4 % FS max.
0.1 % FS
1.5 ms
-20 .. +85 C
-20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 36
20 g
IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650))
Ex ia, ic
Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
Ui = 12 .. 28 V
12 .. 28 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
1W
Ci = 22 nF
Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
5%
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 180 g
provided.

1)
2)

3)

500 V AC on request
E 18.376.2.0/11.13
Description:
295
Code for use in
Model code
Protection
types and
applications
Ex ia I Ma
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia lIIC T85C Da
Ex ia IIC T6 Gb
Equipment protection level Ma
level Ga, Ga/Gb, Da
level Gb
Mining
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Electrical
Connection
Ex ta lllC T80C
T500T90C Da
Ex tb lllC T80C Db
Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80C Dc
level Gc
level Da, Db
level Gc, Dc
Gases
Gases
Conductive dust
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
Non-sparking nA
Protection class:
Dustproof enclosure
Protection class:
with barrier
Certificate
Zones /
Categories
Ex nA llC T6 Gc
IECEx KEM 08.0014X
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4, 5, 6
4,5,6
Devices in the ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 C Da T500T90/T100/T110C Da, Ex tb lllC T80/90/100C Db and
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100C Dc are available with flying leads on request. Devices in the ignition protection class "non-sparking" for protection type Ex nA llC T6, T5, T4 Gc are
available with flying leads on request.
Pin connections:
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin
1
2
3
12
HDA 43Z5-A
Signal +
Signal n.c.
Housing
M12x1, 4 pole
Pin
1
2
3
4
HDA 43Z6-A
Signal +
n.c.
Signal n.c.
Model code:

HDA43ZXAXXXXXXXINX000

Z = Flush membrane
5
= Male 3 pole + PE,
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6
Signal
0001 (-1..1); 01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
Approval
I = IECEx
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
D = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Ex ia lllC T85 C Da
A = Ex ta lllC T80 C T500T90 C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection 6)*
Ex tb lllC T80 C Db
C = Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80 C Dc
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
E 18.376.2.0/11.13
Accessories:
296
Note:
Dimensions:

35.5
35
Profile seal ring

M3
27.5
male electr.
conn. 4p
male electr. conn.

3p +PE EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
18
12
12.3
M12x1
59.4
35
27
13.8
hexSW27
Elastomer profile
seal ring DIN3869
G1/2 A
29 h14
29.5
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78

10.9
12
hexSW27
20.5
seal ring DIN3869

18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
10
19.5
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869
11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5
O-ring 15 x 2
18.1
G1/4 A
G1/2 A
18.9
26 h14
29.5
29.5
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
The Impact protected metal safety sleeve is included.

Part No. 6098243

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.376.2.0/11.13
hexSW27
297
E 18.376.2.0/11.13
12
298
Electronic
HDA 4700
with Flush Membrane
ATEX, IECEx, CSA
The electronic pressure transmitter

HDA 4700 with flush membrane is certified
in the ignition protection class Flameproof
Enclosure to ATEX, IECIx and CSA.
The devices have triple approval, ensuring
that they are universally suitable for use in
potentially explosive environments around
the world. Therefore it is no longer necessary
to stock multiple devices with separate
individual approvals.
The pressure connection is achieved with an
all-welded stainless steel front membrane
filled internally with a pressure transfer
fluid. The process pressure is transmitted
hydrostatically to the measurement cell via
the pressure transfer fluid.
This device is used for applications in which
a standard pressure connection could
become blocked, clogged or frozen by the
particular medium used. Further applications
include processes where the medium
changes regularly and any residues could
cause mixing or contamination of the media,
or in highly viscous media.
Its main applications are in mining and the
oil and gas industry, e.g. in underground
vehicles, hydraulic power units (HPU),
blow-out preventers (BOPs), drill drives or in
lubrication systems.
CCSAUS Explosion Proof Seal Not Required
Class III
Type 4
ATEX Flame Proof

I M2 Ex d I Mb
IECEx Flame Proof
Ex d I Mb
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
Special features:

Certificates:
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
Robust design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload ranges
Burst pressure

Torque value
Conduit, housing material
Output data
Output signal, permitted load resistance2)
max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
Zero point
Over range
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long term drift
mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz
to ISO 20653
Other data
Supply voltage
Life expectancy
Weight
40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar

80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
300; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852
Silicon-free oil
45 Nm
Stainless steel:
1.4435; 1.4301
Seal:
FPM
O-ring:
FPM
1.4404; 1.4435 (316L)
RLmax = (UB 8 V) / 20 mA [k]
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.15 % FS typ.
0.25 % FS max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
12
0.1 % FS max.
0.05 % FS
1.5 ms
T5, T130 C: -25 .. +80 C
T6, T110 C: -25 .. +60 C
T5, T130 C: -40 .. +80 C / -20 .. +80 C
T6, T110 C: -40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
T5, T130 C: -40 .. +80 C / -20 .. +80 C
T6, T110 C: -40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 1 / 31
20 g
8 .. 30 V DC
5%
> 10 million load cycles, 0 .. 100 % FS
~300 g
Note.: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override
1)
2)
3)
-20 C with FPM seal , -40 C on request
E 18.374.2.0/11.13
Description:
299
Pin connections:
Approvals
Certificate
Applications /
Protection types
Core
red
black
greenyellow
HDA 47Z9-A
Signal +
Signal Housing

ATEX: Flame Proof
IECEx: Flame Proof
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
CCSAUS:
Class III
Type 4
ATEX:
I M2
Ex d I Mb
II 2G
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
IECEx:
Ex d I Mb
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
Model code:

HDA47ZXAXXXXXXXDX000(2m)
Core
white
brown
green
yellow
12
HDA 47ZG-A
Signal Signal +
n.c.
n.c.

Z
= Flush membrane
9
= 1/2-14 NPT Conduit
(male thread), single cores
G = 1/2-14 NPT Conduit
(male thread),
flying leads
Signal
0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
Approval
D = CSA Explosion Proof Seal not required
ATEX Flame Proof
IECEx Flame Proof
Modification number
000 = Standard
Cable length in m
Standard = 2 m
40 bar
16 bar
E 18.374.2.0/11.13
Accessories:
300
Note:
Dimensions:

Venting*
hexSW27
hexSW27
hexSW27
seal ring DIN3869
18.5 x 23.9 x1.5
12
O-ring 15x2

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.374.2.0/11.13
* optional, depending on gauge type "Sealed Gauge" / "Vented Gauge"
301
E 18.374.2.0/11.13
12
302
Electro-Mechanical
Flow Switch
HFS 2100
ATEX Encapsulation
The HYDAC HFS 2100 flow switch

explosive atmospheres. Like the
standard version it is based on the
variable area float principle, and can be
mounted in any position.
The test medium moves a spring-loaded
float in the direction of flow, depending
on the flow rate. A fully encapsulated
reed contact is fitted to the outside of
the instrument and is therefore separate
from the flow circuit. When the magnet
inside the float reaches the preset
position, the reed contact switches.
example, the oil and gas industry, on gas
turbines or in locations with high levels
of dust contamination, e.g. in mills.
II
II
2G Ex mb II T6 / T5
2D Ex tD A21 IP67 T80 C / T100 C
Medium:
Special features:
Accuracy 10 % FS
30 .. 600 cSt
Stepless switch point setting
by user
Threaded connection
Certificate:
PTB 03 ATEX 2159 X
PTB 03 ATEX N056-3
Technical data:
Input data
Operating pressure
Brass version
Pressure drop
Brass version
Output data
Switching outputs
Accuracy 3)
Repeatability
Switching capacity
Change-over contact
N/O contact
Max. surface temperature
Viscosity range
- mark

Other data
Housing material
Note.:

Size 1
0.5 .. 1.6
0.8 .. 3.0
2.0 .. 7.0
Size 2
0.5 .. 1.5
1 .. 4
2 .. 8
3 .. 10
5 .. 15
8 .. 24
10 .. 30
15 .. 45
20 .. 60
30 .. 90
35 .. 110
300 bar
350 bar
0.02 .. 0.2 bar
See dimensions
250 bar
300 bar
0.02 .. 0.4 bar
12
St. steel 1.4571; FPM 1); brass nickel-pl.; brass; hard

ferrite
Stainless steel 1.4571; FPM 1); hard ferrite
1 or 2 Reed contacts
Change-over or normally open type 2)
10 % FS
2 % FS max.
max. 250 V / 1 A / 30 W
Back-up fuse 1 A (outside the hazardous area)
max. 250 V / 2 A / 60 W
T6 / T80 C:
-20 .. +75 C
T5 / T100 C:
-20 .. +90 C
T6 / T80 C:
-20 .. +75 C
T5 / T100 C:
-20 .. +90 C
T6 / T80 C:
+75 C
T5 / T100 C:
+90 C
30 .. 600 cSt
EN 60079-0:2006 / EN 60079-18:2004
EN 61241-0:2006 / EN 61241-1:2004
IP 67
Flying leads (2 m cable length)

1)
2)
3)
3% possible with calibration to a certain viscosity
E 18.393.1/11.13
Description:
303
Pin assignment:
Flying leads
Core HFS 21X1-XS
1
2
3
N/O contact
Model code:
HFS 21X1-XW
Centre
N/C contact
Measuring principle
N/O contact
Test medium


External magnetic fields can affect

the switching contact. Ensure sufficient
distance from magnetic fields
(e.g. from electric motors)!
12
The circuits must not incorporate any

effective inductance or capacitance.
The maximum ratings stipulated in
the technical data must never be
exceeded, not even for a short time.
To protect the switching contact, a
fuse for the circuit must be provided
outside the hazardous area, unless
the switching unit is connected to an
intrinsically safe circuit.
Unless the device is connected to an
intrinsic safe circuit, special safety
precautions have to be implemented.
The device may be used in hazardous
areas designated as category 2.
The device must not be used in areas
where there is a possibility that an
electrostatic charge can be caused in
the plastic housing.
The device must not be used in
machinery, systems or medical
apparatus where, in the event of
a malfunction, persons, animals
or equipment could be harmed or
damaged.
HFS21X1 XX XXXXXXXX 7 X X A00
Mechanical connection 4) 6)
1 = 1/4 "
2 = 3/8 "
3 = 1/2 "
4 = 3/4 "
5 = 1 "
1 = Flying leads
(2m in length)
1S = 1 N/O contact
2S = 2 N/O contacts
Oil 10 % -Size 100.5-01.6; 00.8-03.0; 02.0-07.0
Oil 10 % - Size 200.5-01.5; 0001-0004; 0002-0008; 0003-0010;
0005-0015; 0008-0024; 0010-0030; 0015-0045;
0020-0060; 0030-0090; 0035-0110
Accuracy
7 = 10.0 % FS
Housing material
S = Stainless steel
1 = With indicator
Modification number
A00 = ATEX version for potentially explosive areas
Mechanical connection options depend on housing type
(see Dimensions).
When the model with 2 switching contacts is selected, the second contact is mounted
on the side of the instrument, at 90 to the first contact.
6)
Other models available on request.
4)
5)
Note:
E 18.393.1/11.13
Accessories:
304

[l/min]
[mm]
0.5 .. 1.6
0.8 .. 3.0
2.0 .. 7.0
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
DN
SW
8
10
15
24
24
27
1/4
3/8
1/2 *)
98
119
90
450
500
400
15
27
1/2
90
400
15
Type
15
*) Standard
31.2
ca.: 39.2
SW
ca.: 50.2
12
0.5 .. 1.5
1 .. 4
2 .. 8
3 .. 10
5 .. 15
8 .. 24
10 .. 30
15 .. 45
20 .. 60
30 .. 90
35 .. 110
DN
SW
8
15
20
25
34
34
34
40
1/4"
1/2"
3/4"
1" *)
152
152
152
130
10
14
15
17
1500
1425
1340
1160
15
20
25
34
34
40
1/2"
3/4"
1" *)
152
152
130
14
15
17
1425
1340
1160
20
25
34
40
3/4"
1" *)
152
130
15
17
1340
1160
40
25
40
1"
130
17
1160
ca.: 63.1
40
*) Standard
E 18.393.1/11.13
[mm]
[l/min]
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
Type
305

G 1/2"
[l/min]
[mm]
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
90
15
Type
DN
SW
15
30
1/2"
90
570
2.0 .. 7.0
G 1/2"
33.5
ca.: 53.1
65.5
69
30
0.8 .. 3.0
15
0.5 .. 1.6
30
47
[l/min]
[mm]
2 .. 8
3 .. 10
5 .. 15
8 .. 24
10 .. 30
15 .. 45
20 .. 60
30 .. 90
35 .. 110
SW
8
15
20
25
34
34
34
40
1/4"
1/2"
3/4"
1" *)
152
152
152
130
10
14
15
17
1590
1515
1430
1250
15
20
25
34
34
40
1/2"
3/4"
1" *)
152
152
130
14
15
17
1515
1430
1250
70.5
20
25
34
40
3/4"
1" *)
152
130
15
17
1430
1250
ca.: 63.1
40
25
40
1"
130
17
1250
1 .. 4
DN
0.5 .. 1.5
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
57
40
12
Type
*) Standard
E 18.393.1/11.13
Note:
306

HYDAC Electronic GmbH

Hauptstrae 27
D-66128 Saarbrcken
Tel.: 0 68 97 / 509-01
Fax: 0 68 97 / 509-1726
Electro-Mechanical
Flow Switch
HFS 2500
ATEX Encapsulation
for Water or Water-based Media
The HYDAC HFS 2500 flow switch

explosive atmospheres. Like the
standard version it is based on the
variable area float principle, and can be
mounted in any position.
The test medium deflects a springloaded float in the direction of flow,
depending on the flow rate. A fully
encapsulated reed contact is fitted
to the outside of the device and is
therefore separate from the flow circuit.
When the magnet inside the float
reaches the preset position, the reed
contact switches.
II 2G Ex mb II T6 / T5
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP67 T80 C / T100 C
Medium:
Water / water-based media
Special features:
Accuracy 5 % or 10 % FS
Threaded connection
Certificate:
PTB 03 ATEX 2159 X
PTB 03 ATEX N056-3
Technical data:
Input data
5 % accuracy
10 % accuracy
Size 2
Size 3
0.2 .. 4.0
8 .. 90
0.02 .. 0.2
10 .. 30
0.6 .. 5.0
5 .. 110
0.2 .. 0.6
15 .. 45
0.5 .. 8.0
10 .. 150
0.4 .. 1.8
20 .. 60
1 .. 14
35 .. 220
0.8 .. 3.2
30 .. 90
1 .. 28
35 .. 250
2 .. 7
60 .. 150
2 .. 40
3 .. 13
4 .. 55
4 .. 20
1 .. 70
8 .. 30
Operating pressure
Brass version
200 bar
300 bar
250 bar
300 bar
350 bar
300 bar
Pressure drop [bar]
0.02 .. 0.8
0.02 .. 0.3
0.02 .. 0.4
See dimensions

Brass version
Stainless steel 1.4571; NBR 1); Brass; nickel-plated; Brass; Hard ferrite
12
Output data
Switching outputs
Change-over or normally open type 2)
Accuracy
5 % or 10 % FS
Repeatability
2 % FS max.
Switching capacity
Change-over contact
max. 250 V / 1 A / 30 W
N/O contact
max. 250 V / 2 A / 60 W
T6 / T80 C:
T5 / T100 C:
-20 .. +75 C
-20 .. +90 C
T6 / T80 C:
T5 / T100 C:
-20 .. +75 C
-20 .. +90 C
Max. surface temperature
T6 / T80 C:
T5 / T100 C:
+75 C
+90 C
mark
EN 60079-0:2006 / EN 60079-18:2004
EN 61241-0:2006 / EN 61241-1:2004
IP 67
Other data
Housing material
Flying leads (2 m cable length)
Note.:


1)
2)
E 18.394.1/11.13
Description:
307
Model code:
HFS 2 5 X 1 XX XXXXXXXX X X X A00
12
Measuring
principle
Test medium
5 = Water or
water-based
Mechanical
connection 3)5)
1 = 1/4 "
2 = 3/8 "
3 = 1/2 "
4 = 3/4 "
5 = 1 "
6 = 1 1/4 "
7 = 1 1/2 "
1 = Flying leads (2m in length)
1S = 1 N/O contact
2S = 2 N/O contacts
Water 5 %
00.2-04.0; 00.6-05.0; 00.5-08.0;
01.0-0014; 01.0-0028; 02.0-0040; 04.0-0055;
01.0-0070; 08.0-0090; 0005-0110; 0010-0150;
0035-0220; 0035-0250;
====================================
Water 10 % -Size 20.02-00.2; 00.2-00.6; 00.4-01.8; 00.8-03.2;
02.0-07.0; 03.0-0013; 04.0-0020; 08.0-0030
Water 10 % - Size 3 0010-0030; 0015-0045; 0020-0060;
0030-0090; 0060-0150
Accuracy
6 = 5.0 % FS
7 = 10.0 % FS
Housing material
S = Stainless steel
1 = With indicator
Modification number
A00 = ATEX version for potentially explosive areas
(see Dimensions)
4) When the model with 2 switching contacts is selected, the second switching contact is mounted on the
side of the instrument, at 90 to the first contact.
Note:
E 18.394.1/11.13
Accessories:
308
Pin connections:
Flying leads
Pin
1
2
3
HFS 25X1-XS
N/O contact
HFS 25X1-XW
Centre
N/C contact
N/O contact

switching contact.
motors)!
The circuits must not incorporate any

effective inductance or capacities.

The maximum ratings stipulated in the
technical data must never be exceeded,
even for a short time.

To protect the switching contact, a
fuse for the circuit must be provided
outside the hazardous area, unless
the switching unit is connected to an
intrinsically safe circuit.

Unless the device is connected to an
intrinsic safe circuit, special safety
precautions have to be implemented.

The device may be used in hazardous
areas designated as category 2.

The device must not be used in areas
where an electrical charge in the plastic
housing is likely.

The device must not be used in
machinery, systems or medical
apparatus where, in the event of
a malfunction, persons, animals
or equipment could be harmed or
damaged.

Type
[l/min]
[mm]
SW
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
DN
Water 5 % accuracy
0.2 .. 4.0
0.6 .. 5.0
27
30
53
1/4"
3/8"
1/2"
8
10
15
14
131
850
27
32
30
35
53
1/2"
3/4"
15
20
14
16
146
174
900
34
40
40
40
63
63
3/4"
1"
20
25
18
19
152
156
1400
1100
10 .. 150
50
50
73
1 1/4"
32
21
200
2750
35 .. 220
50
50
73
1 1/4"
32
21
200
3000
35 .. 250
60
60
78
1 1/2"
40
24
200
3800
0.5 .. 8.0
1 .. 14
1 .. 28
2 .. 40
4 .. 55
1 .. 70
8 .. 90
5 .. 110

0.2 .. 0.6
0.4 .. 1.8
0.8 .. 3.2
2.0 .. 7.0
12
27
31
67
1/2
15
15
90
400
3.0 .. 13.0
4.0 .. 20.0
8.0 .. 30.0
Water 10 % Accuracy - Size 310 .. 30

15 .. 45
20 .. 60
34
47
93
3/4
1" *)
20
25
21
17
152
130
1200
1050
41
47
93
1"
25
17
130
1050
30 .. 90
60 .. 150
Standard
E 18.394.1/11.13
*)
309

Type
[l/min]
[mm]
SW
Weight
(approx.)
[g]
DN
1/4"
3/8"
1/2"
8
10
15
14
131
940
Water 5 % accuracy
0.2 .. 4.0
0.6 .. 5.0
0.5 .. 8.0
27
30
53
27
32
30
35
53
1/2"
3/4"
15
20
14
16
146
174
990
34
40
40
40
63
63
3/4"
1"
20
25
18
19
152
156
1490
1190
10 .. 150
50
50
73
1 1/4"
32
21
200
2840
35 .. 220
50
50
73
1 1/4"
32
21
200
3090
35 .. 250
60
60
78
1 1/2"
40
24
200
3890
1 .. 14
1 .. 28
2 .. 40
4 .. 55
1 .. 70
8 .. 90
5 .. 110

0.2 .. 0.6
0.4 .. 1.8
0.8 .. 3.2
2.0 .. 7.0
30
30
70
1/2
15
15
90
570
3.0 .. 13.0
12
4.0 .. 20.0
8.0 .. 30.0
Water 10 % Accuracy - Size 310 .. 30

15 .. 45
20 .. 60
34
40
40
93
3/4
1" *)
20
25
15
17
152
130
1430
1250
40
40
93
1"
25
17
130
1250
30 .. 90
60 .. 150
E 18.394.1/11.13
*)
310
Standard
Note:


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.394.1/11.13
12
311
Display and Monitoring Units

13
The universal display unit HDA 5500 provides the means of visualising
and further processing the signals from our sensors.
The unit is designed for front panel mounting with a standard 92 x 45 mm
cut-out.
E 180.000.2 /11.13
Universal display unit for general applications:

Page
HDA 5500 313
312
13
Digital Display Unit

HDA 5500
Description:
The digital display units in the

HDA 5500 series are microprocessorcontrolled display and monitoring
instruments designed for control
panel installation.
Different versions are available with
a maximum of 3 analogue inputs, an
analogue output (4 .. 20 mA or
0 .. 10V) and up to 4 relay outputs.
The analogue input signals are
displayed according to the settings
selected by the user.
Each of the relay outputs can be
allocated to each of the sensor inputs
or to the differential between input
1 and 2.
A PT 100 temperature probe can be
connected directly to the instrument.
There is also an option for frequency
measurement using the HDS 1000
(HYDAC rpm probe), for example
to measure the speed of rotating
components.
Depending on the model, it is also
possible to connect SMART sensors
(condition monitoring sensors).
SMART sensors are a generation
of sensors from HYDAC which can
transmit several different measured
values.
Special features:
Up to 4 relay switching outputs

RS 232 interface
Voltage supply
12 .. 32 V DC or
85 .. 265 V AC 50 / 60 Hz
Option for PT100 sensor input or
frequency input
E 18.062.3/11.13
Digital display of analogue signals

Clear 4-digit 7-segment
LED display
Up to 3 analogue inputs
(4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 10 V or 0 .. 5 V)
Accuracy 0.5 %
Differential measurement possible
Analogue output
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V)
313
Technical data:
Input models:
13
Analogue transm.
or
HDA 5500-0-...
Analogue seq.
Analogue transm.
Analogue transm.
HDA 5500-1-...
Analogue transm.
Analogue transm.
HDA 5500-2-...
Frequency transm.
Analogue transm.
HDA 5500-3-...
Pt100 temp. transm.
Output models:
HDA 5500-X-0-...
Analogue
Relay output 1
HDA 5500-X-1-...
Relay output 2
Analogue
Relay output 1
HDA 5500-X-2-...
Relay output 2
Relay output 3
Relay output 4
Analogue
E 18.062.3/11.13
Connection terminals:
Supply voltage:
plug-in terminal block 2 pole, RM 5.08
(cross section max. 2.5 mm)
Inputs / outputs:
Relay:
314
Display range
Display
4-digit 7-segment LED display, red,


3 LEDs for active sensor, 4 LEDs for switch points
- 999 .. 9999 (user-adjustable)
Display range
Display units with
bar, kg/cm, MPa, psi, C, F, mA, V, Hz, kN,
background lighting
m, mm, inch, l, l/min, gal, gal/min, 1/min, %, t
Input data
Analogue signal input(s)
Measuring range(s)
select: 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V, 0 .. 10 V or
(up to 3 analogue inputs)

4 .. 20 mA sequential (Modification 006)
Accuracy
0.5 % at 25 C
PT 100 input
Measuring range
- 25 .. 100 C
Accuracy
0.5 % at 25 C
Frequency/counter input
Signal threshold
0 .. 0.6 V = LOW, 3 .. 24 V = HIGH
Frequency range
15 Hz to 24 kHz
Output data
Analoge output
4 .. 20 mA,
load resistance 400 or

0 .. 10 V
load resistance 2 k
0.5 % at 25 C
Accuracy
70 ms
Rise time
Switching outputs
Type
2 or 4 relays each with separate common supply
Switching voltage
0.1 .. 250 V AC
Switching current
9 mA .. 2 A
Switching capacity
400 VA, 50 W

Life expectancy of switch contacts 20 million cycles at minimum load

1 million cycles at maximum load
Reaction time
approx. 20 ms
(with switching delay = 0 ms)
1.5 .. 100 % of the pre-set display range
Setting range of switch points
Setting range of the switching
0.5 .. 99 % of the pre-set display range
hystereses (switch-back points)
Interface
Serial interface
Baud rate 19200 Bauds; 8 data bits;
RS 232
2 stop bits; no parity;

no handshake
Nominal temperature range
0 .. +50 C
0 .. +50 C
- 40 .. +80 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Other data
Housing
control panel housing 96 x 48 x 109 mm;

control panel cut-out 92 (+0.8) x 45 (+0.6) mm;

front panel thickness 1.25 .. 15 mm;

maximum installation depth 121 mm
Supply voltage
12 .. 32 V DC or

85 .. 265 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz
15 VA at 85 .. 230 V AC fuse protection 1 AT
Power consumption
Supply of the meas. transmitter
12 V DC 1 %; max. 20 mA / analogue input
Residual ripple of supply
5%
voltage
Weight
approx. 320 g

Model code:
Notes:
HDA 5500XXXX00X
Inputs
0 = One analogue input
1 = Three analogue inputs
2 = One analogue input + frequency
input / counter function
3 = One analogue input + PT 100 input
The information in this brochure relates

to the operating conditions and
For applications and operating
conditions not described, please contact
the relevant technical department.
13
Outputs
0 = 1 analogue output
1 = 1 analogue output + 2 relay outputs
2 = 1 analogue output + 4 relay outputs
Supply voltage
AC = 85 .. 265 V AC
DC = 12 .. 32 V DC
Modification
000 = Standard
006 = Model with sequential analogue input for HLB 1300 and CS 1000
(only possible on input model "0" and output model "2")
Dimensions:
thickness of
control panel

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01,
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.062.3/11.13
panel cut-out
315
Service Instruments
13
14
Our service instruments have been specially developed for use in servicing,
maintenance and the laboratory, as well as for commissioning.
All commonly available sensors (e.g. pressure, temperature, flow rate,
condition monitoring, ...) with a very wide range of output signals can be
connected to these instruments.
E 180.000.2 /11.13
Service instruments for general applications:

Page
HMG 500 317
HMG 510 319
HMG 3010 321
HDA 4748-H (Accessories) 325
ETS 4148-H (Accessories) 327
EVS 3100-H (Accessories) 329
316
13
Portable Data Recorder

HMG 500
14
Description:
Special features:
Portable 2-channel data recorder

Simple and user-friendly key operation
Large LCD display including
battery status indication
2 sensor inputs,
automatic sensor recognition
Measuring range and unit of
measurement of the sensors
connected to it are recognised
automatically
Zeroing (taring) of the individual

measurement channels
Display of the actual measured values
Display of the differential (channel A
minus channel B)
Minimum or maxmum value indication,
with reset function
Setting device for mechanical
pressure and temperature switches
E 18.063.2/11.13
The HMG 500 is a portable measuring

instrument for simple measuring tasks
in fluid technology such as hydraulics,
pneumatics, lubrication, process,
refrigeration and air conditioning.
Up to two sensors with the HYDAC
Sensor Interface (HSI) can be
connected to the HMG 500 to measure
pressure, temperature or flow rate
(except for SMART sensors). The HMG
500 automatically recognises these
sensors and takes all of the necessary
basic settings from each sensor.
The measurement values and the
corresponding physical unit are
displayed on an easy-to-read LCD
display.
In addition, the HMG 500 offers a wealth
of other advantages over mechanical
pressure gauges, for example, for
measuring pressure on machines and
systems.
The user benefits from a technologically
high level of measuring accuracy and
dynamics.
The HMG 500 measures values at a
very high sampling rate. It can therefore
record and display pressure peaks in
the maximum value memory or rapid
pressure discharges in the minimum
value memory, for example.
Furthermore, differential measurements
can be carried out using two sensors
of a similar type, to calculate pressure
drops or temperature differentials.
To further extend the application range,
HMG 500 has a function for setting
mechanical pressure and temperature
switches precisely and reliably.
Compact, simple and versatile - the
HMG 500 is an invaluable tool for all
those involved in maintenance,
commissioning and service.
317
Technical data:
13
14
Measurement
2 analogue inputs
inputs
for HYDAC measurement transmitters

with HSI interface

(except for SMART sensors**)
Accuracy*
0.1 % FS max.
Automatic recognition of measuring
Functions
range and unit of measurement

Taring of the measuring channels

Display of the actual meas. value

Min./max. indication

Reset of the min./max. values

Measured values differential
channel A - channel B

Display of units, selectable

Setting device for mechanical pressure
and temperature switches
Display
4-digit 7 segment LCD display

with battery status indication;

2 measurement values incl. unit displayed
simultaneously
Measurement unit Selectable
(depending on the Pressure: bar, psi, MPa
Temperature: C, K, F
sensors
connected
Flow rate: l/min, gallon/min
to HMG) (1 US gallon = 3.7853 l)
0.1 ms
Sampling rate
Resolution
12 bit
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Safety
EN 61010
9 V battery
Voltage
supply Oper. time: approx. 10 h (with 2 sensors)

Euro plug power supply (230 V AC)
(available as an accessory)
Environmental
Operating temp.: +5 .. +60 C
conditions
Storage temp.: -40 .. +70 C

Rel. humidity: 0 .. 70 %
Weight
410 g
Note:
* FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
** SMART sensors (Condition Monitoring Sensors) are
a generation of sensors from HYDAC which can provide
a variety of different measurement values.
Dimensions:
Ordering details:
HMG 500-000
Items supplied
HMG 500
Operating manual D/E/F
9 V battery
HMG 500-Set 01
Items supplied
HMG 500
9 V battery
HDA 4748-H-0600-000
ZBE 30-02, sensor cable M12x1, 2 m
Connection adapter G1/4 female to Minimess 16X2
Case for HMG 500 / 510
HMG 500-Set 02
Items supplied
HMG 500
9 V battery
2 off HDA 4748-H-0600-000
2 off ZBE 30-02, sensor cable M12x1, 2 m
2 off connection adapter G1/4 female to Minimess 16X2
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical and

mechanical connection adapters, power supply, etc. can
Examples of main accessories:
Pressure transmitter
HDA 4000 with HSI interface
Pressure ranges: -1 .. 9 bar, 0 .. 16 bar, 0 .. 60 bar,
0 .. 100 bar, 0 .. 250 bar, 0 .. 400 bar, 0 .. 600 bar
Temperature transmitter
ETS 4000 with HSI interface
Measuring range: -25 .. 100 C
Flow rate transmitter
EVS 3000 with HSI interface
Measuring ranges: 1.2 .. 20 l/min, 6 .. 60 l/min,
15 .. 300 l/min, 40 .. 600 l/min
Sensor simulator
SSH 1000, ideal for training purposes
Electrical connection adapter
UVM 3000, for mechanical pressure and
temperature switches
Hydraulic adapters
E 18.063.2/11.13
Note:
318
The information in this brochure relates to the operating

conditions and applications described.
For applications and operating conditions not described,
please contact the relevant technical department.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01, Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E-mail: electronic@hydac.com, Internet: www.hydac.com
13

HMG 510
14
The HMG 510 is a hand-held instrument

for simple measurement tasks on
hydraulic and pneumatic systems in
mobile and industrial applications.
Compact and simple to use, the
HMG 510 is an ideal tool for all those
involved in maintenance, commissioning
and service.
Up to two sensors with the HYDAC
Sensor Interface (HSI) can be
connected to the HMG 510.
Sensors are available to measure
pressure, temperature and flow rate as
well as sensors for condition monitoring
(also known as SMART sensors).
Some examples of SMART sensors are
the HYDACLAB Oil Condition Sensor,
the AS 1000 AquaSensor and the
CS 1000 Contamination Sensor.
The HMG 510 automatically recognises
these sensors and takes all the
necessary basic settings from each
sensor.
The measurement values and the
corresponding physical unit are
displayed on an easy-to-read LCD
display.
In addition to this, the HMG 510 enables
measured values which have been
saved in the SMART sensors to be
uploaded to a PC.
With the aid of the HYDAC PC software
"CMWIN", the measurement data stored
in the SMART sensors can be displayed
on a PC screen in the form of a graph,
then analysed, edited and saved.
The HMG has a standard integrated
USB port to enable this data transfer.
To further extend the application range,
the HMG 510 has a function for setting
mechanical pressure and temperature
switches precisely and reliably.
Special features:
Portable 2-channel data recorder

Simple and user-friendly key operation
Large LCD display including
battery status indication
2 sensor inputs, automatic sensor
recognition
Specially designed to display
measured values from condition
monitoring sensors (SMART sensors)
Measuring range and unit of
measurement of the sensors
connected to it are recognised
automatically
Zeroing (taring) of the individual

measurement channels
Display of the actual measured values
Display of the differential
(channel A minus channel B)
Min. or max. value indication,
with reset function
Setting device for mechanical
pressure and temperature switches
USB port
E 18.066.2/11.13
Description:
319
Technical data:
13
14
Measurement
inputs

2 analogue inputs
for HYDAC measurement transmitters
with HSI interface and SMART sensors
Accuracy*
0.1 % FS max.
Functions
Automatic recognition of measuring
range and unit of measurement

Taring of the measuring channels

Display of the actual measured value

Min./max. indication

Reset of the min./max. values

Measured values differential
channel A - channel B

Display of units, selectable

Setting device for mechanical pressure
and temperature switches

Communication bridge to a connected PC
Display
4-digit 7 segment LCD display

with battery status indication;

2 measured values incl. unit displayed
simultaneously
Measurement unit Selectable for
bar, psi, MPa
(depending on the Pressure:
sensors Temperature: C, K, F
connected) Flow rate:
l/min, gallon/min

(1 US gallon = 3.7853 l)

Permanently pre-set on SMART sensors
Sampling rate
0.1 ms
Resolution
12 bit
mark
Safety
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 61010
9 V battery
Voltage
supply Operating time: approx. 10 h
(with 2 sensors)**

Euro plug power supply (230 V AC)
(available as an accessory)
Environmental
conditions

Operating temperature: +5 .. +60 C

Storage temperature: -40 .. +70 C
Rel. humidity:
0 .. 70 %
Weight
410 g
* FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range

** Not applicable to SMART sensors, as they require
an external voltage.
Ordering details:
HMG 510-000
Items supplied
HMG 510
9 V battery
USB cable
Y adapter blue (for HLB 1300)
Y adapter yellow (for CS 1000)
ZBE 30-02, sensor cable M12x1, 2m
Software CD with "CMWIN"
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical and

mechanical connection adapters, power supply, etc. can
Examples of main accessories:
Pressure transmitter
HDA 4000 with HSI interface
Pressure ranges: -1 .. 9 bar, 0 .. 16 bar, 0 .. 60 bar,
0 .. 100 bar, 0 .. 250 bar, 0 .. 400 bar, 0 .. 600 bar
Temperature transmitter
ETS 4000 with HSI interface
Measuring range: -25 .. 100 C
Flow rate transmitter
EVS 3000 with HSI interface
Measuring ranges: 1.2 .. 20 l/min, 6 .. 60 l/min,
15 .. 300 l/min, 40 .. 600 l/min
Sensor simulator
SSH 1000, ideal for training purposes
Electrical connection adapter
UVM 3000, for mechanical pressure or temperature
switches
Hydraulic adapters
Dimensions:
Note:
E 18.066.2/11.13

For applications and operating conditions not described,
320

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01, Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
13

HMG 3010
14
Description:
Special features:
Simple, user-friendly operation
Practical, robust design
Large, full-graphics colour display
Quick and independent basic setting
of the device through the use of
automatic sensor recognition
Up to 10 sensors can be connected
simultaneously
Up to 32 measurement channels can
be displayed at a time
Measuring rates up to 0.1 ms
Extended voltage measurement
-10 .. +10 V and 0 .. 50 V
Can be connected to a CAN bus
Very large data memory for

archiving measurement curves
Various measurement modes:
Normal measuring
Fast curve recording
Long term measuring
4 independent triggers,
can be logically linked
PC connection
USB
RS 232
Convenient visualisation, archiving
and data processing using the
HMGWIN 3000 and CMWIN software
supplied
E 18.399.1/11.13
The HMG 3010 is an impressive, top

performance portable measuring and
data recording device.
Automated setting procedures, a simple,
self-explanatory operator guide and
many comprehensive functions ensure
the operator is able to carry out a wide
range of measuring tasks within a very
short time and to work in a way which is
both time-saving and cost-effective.
The HMG 3010 thus quickly becomes a
reliable and helpful tool in the working
environment of service, maintenance,
development, test rig technology, quality
assurance or commissioning of systems
and machines.
The HMG 3010 is designed primarily
to record pressure, temperature and
flow rate values which are the standard
variables in hydraulics and pneumatics.
For this purpose, special sensors are
available, with which the variable,
the measurement range and unit
are automatically detected by the
HMG 3010. The device also offers
measurement inputs for standard
sensors with current and voltage
signals. In addition to the analogue
inputs, the HMG 3010 also has two
digital inputs (e.g. for frequency or rpm
measurements).
The ability to connect the HMG 3010
to a CAN bus and thus to display
messages from the CAN bus completes
the range of applications.
Due to the wide range of functions and
its simple handling, the HMG 3010 is
just as appropriate for users who take
measurements only occasionally as it is
for professionals for whom measuring
and documentation are routine.
The update capability of the
HMG 3010 via the integral USB port
ensures that the user can benefit from
future upgrades of the device software.
321
Function:
13
E 18.399.1/11.13
14
322
Clear and graphical selection menus

guide the operator very simply to all
the device functions available. A
navigation pad on the keypad ensures
rapid operation.
The HMG 3010 can monitor
signals from up to ten sensors
simultaneously. For this there are
5 robust standard input sockets. By
using Y adapters, the number of inputs
can be doubled individually to make a
total of between 6 and 10.
Up to 8 sensors can be connected to 4
of these input sockets:
- 8 sensors (e.g. for pressure,
temperature, and flow rate) with
the special digital HSI interface
(HYDAC Sensor Interface);
this means the basic device
settings (measured variable, range,
and unit of measurement) are
undertaken automatically
- 8 standard analogue sensors
with current and voltage signals
- 4 Condition Monitoring sensors*)
(SMART sensors); again, the
basic device settings are carried out
automatically
Frequency measurements, counter
functions, or triggers for data logging
can be implemented via the fifth input
socket with 2 digital inputs.
For extended voltage measurement,
the HMG 3010 offers the possibility
of recording signals of
0 .. 50 V on two inputs and a signal
of -10 .. +10 V on one input (e.g.
proportional valve control).
The connection to a CAN bus in
conjunction with the CAN adapter
ZBE 3010 makes it possible to record
CAN messages (e.g. motor speed,
motor oil pressure) in combination
with measured data from the hydraulic
system.
HYDAC CAN bus sensors connected
directly to the CAN adapter can be
parameterized using the HMG 3010
(node ID and baud rate)
All input channels can
operate simultaneously at a
measurement rate of 0.5 ms (1.0 ms
for SMART sensors). To record highly
dynamic processes, 2 analogue inputs
are capable of recording measured
values of 0.1 ms.
The most impressive function of the
HMG 3010 is its ability to record
dynamic processes "online", i.e. in
real-time, as a measurement curve
and to render them as graphs in the
field.
Measured values, curves or texts are

visualized on a full-graphics colour
display in different selectable formats
and display forms.
The data memory for recording

curves or logs can hold up to 500,000
measured values. At least 100 such
full-length data records can be stored
in an additional archive memory.
For specific, event-driven curves
or logs, the HMG 3010 has four
independent triggers, which can be
linked together logically.
It is also possible to determine
differential values between different
input signals from sensors. Particularly
when measuring flow rate by means
of differential pressure measurement
across a measuring orifice, the
accuracy can be significantly improved
by using a stored calibration curve.
To generate such calibration curves,
the HMG 3010 has an easy-to-use
handheld recording function.
User-specific device settings can
be stored and re-loaded at any time
as required. This means that repeat
measurements can be carried out on
a machine again and again using the
same device settings.
Numerous useful and easy-to-use

auxiliary functions are available,
e.g. zoom, ruler tool, differential value
graph creation and individual scaling,
which are particularly for use when
analysing the recorded measurement
curves.
The HMG 3010 communicates with a

PC via the built-in USB port or RS 232
port.
The PC software HMGWIN 3000 is also

supplied with the device. This software
is a convenient and simple package
for analysing and archiving curves and
logs which have been recorded using
the HMG 3010, or for exporting the data
for integration into other PC programs
if required. It is also possible to operate
the HMG 3010 directly from the
computer, to undertake basic settings,
and to start measurements online and
display them directly on the PC screen
as measurement curve progressions.
Some examples of the numerous

useful additional functions:
Transfer and archiving of
measurements recorded using the
HMG 3010
Display of the measurements in graph
form or as a table
CMWIN:
The HYDAC software CMWIN is also
supplied with the device.
This software enables you to
communicate directly with SMART
sensors *) connected to the HMG 3010
from your PC.
Zoom function:
Using the mouse, a frame is drawn
around an interesting section of a
measurement curve, which is then
enlarged and displayed.
Both programs can be run on

PCs with Windows Vista / XP / 2000
and Windows 7 operating systems.
Fig.: Zoomed section of measurement curve
Accurate measurement of the curves

using the ruler tool (time values,
amplitude values, and differentials)
Individual comments and

measurement information can be
inserted into the graph
*) SMART sensors
(Condition Monitoring Sensors)
are a generation of sensors from
HYDAC which can provide a variety
of different measured values.
Overlay of curves, for example to

document the wear of a machine (new
condition/current condition)
13
14
Using mathematical operations

(calculation functions, filter functions)
new curves can be added.
Snap-shot function: comparable to the
function of a digital camera, a picture
can be taken immediately of any graph
and saved as a jpg file.
A professional measurement
report can be produced at the click
of a mouse: HMGWIN 3000 has an
automatic layout function.
Starting with a table of contents, all
recorded data, descriptions, and
graphics and/or tables are combined
into a professional report and saved as
a pdf file.
Online function:
Starting, recording, and online
display of measurements
(similar to the function of an
oscilloscope)
Change of axis assignment of the

recorded measurement parameters in
graph mode (e.g. to produce
a p-Q graph )
E 18.399.1/11.13
HMGWIN 3000:
323
Technical data:
Meas. inputs
13
E 18.399.1/11.13
14
324
4 input sockets (channels A-H) for

connecting up to 8 analogue
sensors or up to 4 SMART
sensors.
1 input socket with 2 digital
inputs (channels I-J) and one
voltage input of -10 V to
+ 10 V (shown on channel H)
Sensors are connected using
standard M12x1 male connectors
(5 pole)
Channels A, B, E, F, G
(Accuracy)
HSI
( 0.1 % FS max.)
4 .. 20 mA
( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 20 mA
( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 4.5 V
( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 5 V
( 0.2 % FS max.)
0 .. 10 V
( 0.1 % FS max.)
0.5 .. 4.5 V ( 0.1 % FS max.)
0.5 .. 5.5 V ( 0.2 % FS max.)
1 .. 5 V
( 0.2 % FS max.)
1 .. 6 V
( 0.2 % FS max.)
Channels C and D HSI
( 0.1 % FS max.)
(Accuracy)
4 .. 20 mA
( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 20 mA
( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 4.5 V
( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 5 V
( 1.0 % FS max.)
0 .. 10 V
( 0.5 % FS max.)
0 .. 50 V
( 0.1 % FS max.)
0.5 .. 4.5 V ( 0.1 % FS max.)
0.5 .. 5.5 V ( 1.0 % FS max.)
1 .. 5 V
( 1.0 % FS max.)
1 .. 6 V
( 1.0 % FS max.)
Channel H
HSI
( 0.1 % FS max.)
(Accuracy)
4 .. 20 mA
( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 20 mA
( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 4.5 V
( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 5 V
( 0.2 % FS max.)
0 .. 10 V
( 0.1 % FS max.)
0.5 .. 4.5 V ( 0.1 % FS max.)
0.5 .. 5.5 V ( 0.2 % FS max.)
1 .. 5 V
( 0.2 % FS max.)
1 .. 6 V
( 0.2 % FS max.)
-10 .. +10 V ( 0.5 % FS max.)
Channels I and J Frequency range: 1 .. 30 000 Hz
(Accuracy)
( 0.1 % FS max.)
Switching / switch-back threshold: 2 V / 1 V
Max. input voltage: 50 V
Differential channels A - B
C-D
Difference channel for flow ratemeasurement orifice (shown on channel B)
Measuring rate
0.1 ms, max. 2 analogue input channels
(dependent on
0.2 ms, max. 4 analogue input channels
the number of
0.5 ms, all 10 input channels
active channels)
1.0 ms, for SMART sensors
resolution
12 bit
Memory
At least. 100 measurement curves,
each with up to 500,000 measured values
Display
3.5" colour display
Interfaces
1 USB, 1 serial port
mark
EN 61000-1/2/3/4
Safety
EN 61010
Ambient
Operating temp.:
0 .. +50 C
conditions
Storage temp.:
-20 .. +60 C
Rel. humidity:
0 .. 70 %
Weight
1100 g
Note:
Order details:
HMG 3010 - 000 - X
Operating manual and documentation

D = German
E = English
F = French
Items supplied
HMG 3010
Power supply for 90 .. 230 V AC
Operating manual
CD-ROM containing USB drivers, HMGWIN 3000 and
CMWIN software
USB connection cable
Accessories:
CAN adapter, required for CAN bus
operation ( to be ordered separately)
ZBE 3010 CAN adapter for HMG 3010
Material No. 921238
Additional accessories, such as electrical and

mechanical connection adapters, power adapters, etc.
can be found in the "Accessories - Service
devices" catalogue section
Dimensions:
shown with protective cover open
Note:
For applications or operating conditions not described,
HYDAC ELECTrONIC GMBH
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01, Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
13
Electronic
with HSI Sensor Recognition
HDA 4748-H
The pressure transmitter

HDA 4748-H with HSI sensor
recognition has been specially
developed for use in conjunction with
HYDAC measuring instruments
HMG 500, HMG 510, HMG 3000,
HMG 3010 and CMU 1000.
For data transmission, the HDA 4748-H
has an HSI interface
(HYDAC Sensor Interface).
The HSI sensors are automatically
recognised via the HSI interface
by the above-mentioned HYDAC
measuring instruments and all
necessary basic device settings are
taken from each sensor.
Like all pressure transmitters of the
HDA 4700 series, the HDA 4748-H
also has a very accurate and robust
sensor cell with a thin-film strain
It combines excellent technical
specifications with a very compact
design.
Special features:
Fully automatic recognition by,

and voltage supply from, HYDAC
measuring instruments HMG 500,
HMG 510, HMG 3000, HMG 3010
or CMU 1000
Automatic transfer of measuring
range, measured value and
measurement unit
Very compact design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges1)

Overload pressures

Burst pressures

(torque value)

Output data
Output signal

Max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
Zero point
Over range
to DIN 16086

Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long-term drift
mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Other data
Voltage supply

Life expectancy

Weight
-1 .. 9; 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600;

1000 bar
20; 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000;
1600 bar
100; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000;
3000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
(20 Nm)
G1/2 DIN 3852
(40 Nm)
Seal: FPM
HSI (HYDAC Sensor Interface)

Automatic sensor recognition
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.15 % FS typ.
0.25 % FS max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.008 % FS / C typ.
0.015 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
0.1 % FS max.
0.05 % FS
0.5 ms
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
20 g
IP 67 (when an IP 67 connector
is used)
via HYDAC measuring instruments
HMG 500, HMG 510, HMG 3000,
HMG 3010 or CMU 1000
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 150 g


FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measuring range,
1)

2)

E 18.332.2/11.13
Description:
14
325
Model code:
13
14
Note:
HDA4748HXXXX000
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852 (male)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)

described.
Male, M12x1, 5 pole
8 =
Signal
H = HSI (automatic sensor recognition)
0009; 0016; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600 (only in conjunction with mech. conn. "4")
1000 (only in conjunction with mech. connection "2")
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.
5 pole
hex. SW27
E 18.332.2/11.13
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
326
hex. SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
13
Electronic
with HSI Sensor Recognition
ETS 4148-H
The electronic temperature

transmitter ETS 4148-H with HSI
sensor recognition has been specially
HMG 500, HMG 510, HMG 3000,
For data transmission, the
ETS 4148-H has an HSI interface
(HYDAC Sensor Interface).
The HSI sensors are automatically
recognised by the above-mentioned
HYDAC measuring instruments and
all necessary basic settings are taken
from each sensor.
Like all temperature transmitters of
the ETS 4000 series,
the ETS 4148-H features a robust
design and excellent EMC properties.
Based on corresponding evaluation
designed to measure temperatures in
the range -25 C to +100 C.
Special features:
Fully automatic sensor recognition

by, and voltage supply from,
HMG 500, HMG 510, HMG 3000,
HMG 3010 and CMU 1000
Automatic transfer of
measuring range, measured value
and measurement unit
Accuracy 0.8 % FS
Robust design

Standard protection class IP 67
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring principle
PT 1000
Measuring range
-25 .. +100C
6 mm
Probe length
Probe diameter
4.5 mm
Pressure resistance
600 bar
Overload pressure
900 bar
G A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm

Seal: FPM
Output data
Output signal

Automatic sensor recognition through
HMG
0.4 % FS typ.

0.8 % FS max.
0.01 % FS / C
t50: ~4 s
t90: ~8 s
-40 .. +85C / -25 .. + 85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. 125C / -25 .. + 125 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
25 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 67 (when an IP 67 connector
is used)
Other data
M12x1, 5 pole
Voltage supply

HMG 500, HMG 510, HMG 3000,

HMG 3010 or CMU
Weight
~ 200 g


1)

2)

E 18.333.1.1/11.13
Description:
14
327
Note:
Model code:
13
14
ETS4148H 006 000
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
8 = Male, M12x1, 5 pole

described.
Signal
H = HSI (automatic sensor recognition)
Probe length
006 = 6 mm
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.
5 pole
hex. SW27
E 18.333.1.1/11.13
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
328

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
13
Electronic
with HSI-Sensor Recognition
EVS 3100-H
EVS 3110-H
The flow rate transmitters in the

series EVS 3100-H and
EVS 3110-H with HSI sensor
recognition have been specially
HMG 500, HMG 510, HMG 3000,
For data transmission, the EVS 31x0-H
has an HSI interface (HYDAC Sensor
Interface).
The HSI sensors are recognised
automatically via the HSI interface
by the above-mentioned HYDAC
measuring instruments, and all the
necessary basic settings are taken
from each instrument.
As with all flow rate transmitters in the
series EVS 3100 and EVS 3110,
the EVS 31x0-H also operates
according to the turbine principle.
The speed of an impeller turning
in the fluid flow is measured and
converted into an electronic signal.
Special features:
Fully automatic recognition by,

and voltage supply from, HYDAC
measuring instruments HMG 500,
HMG 510, HMG 3000, HMG 3010
or CMU 1000
Automatic transfer of measuring
range, measured value and
measurement unit
Technical data:
Input data
EVS 3108-H-0020
1.2 .. 20.0 l/min
400 bar
EVS 3118-H-0020
EVS 3108-H-0060
6.0 .. 60.0 l/min
400 bar
EVS 3118-H-0060
EVS 3108-H-0300
15.0 .. 300.0 l/min
400 bar
EVS 3118-H-0300
EVS 3108-H-0600
40.0 .. 600.0 l/min
315 bar
EVS 3118-H-0600
40.0 .. 600.0 l/min
400 bar
2 x G1/4 female threads for pressure

and/or temperature sensors
Output data
Output signal

Accuracy
-20 .. +70 C
-20 .. +70 C
-40 .. +100 C
-20 .. +90 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
IP 67 (when an IP 67 connector is used)
Other data
Housing material
EVS 3100-H: Aluminium

EVS 3110-H: Stainless steel
EVS 3100-H: Hydraulic oils
Measuring medium2)

EVS 3110-H: Water-based
media
Viscosity range
1 .. 100 cSt
EVS 3100-H: 30 cSt

EVS 3110-H:
5 cSt
Voltage supply

HMG 500, HMG 510, HMG 3000,

HMG 3010 or CMU 1000
Note:

1)
2)

E 18.334.2/11.13
Description:
14
329
Note:
Model code:
13
14
EVS31X8HXXXX000
Housing material
0 = Aluminium
1 = Stainless steel

described.
Signal
H = HSI (Automatic Sensor Recognition)
Measuring range
0020 = 1.2 .. 20 l/min
0060 = 6.0 .. 60 l/min
0300 = 15.0 .. 300 l/min
0600 = 40.0 .. 600 l/min
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
E 18.334.2/11.13
male electr. conn. 5 pole
330
Model
Meas.
range
[l/min]
D / SW
Torque
value
[Nm]
DN
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
EVS 3108-H-0020
1.2 .. 20
117
135
47 / 46
G"
60
EVS 3108-H-0060
6 .. 60
144
135
48.5 / 46 G"
130
11
[mm]
EVS 3108-H-0300
15 .. 300 155
150
63.5 / 60 G1"
500
22
EVS 3108-H-0600
40 .. 600 181
150
63.5 / 60 G1"
600
30
EVS 3118-H-0020
1.2 .. 20
117
135
47 / 46
G"
60
EVS 3118-H-0060
6 .. 60
144
135
48.5 / 46 G"
130
11
EVS 3118-H-0300
15 .. 300 155
150
63.5 / 60 G1"
500
22
EVS 3118-H-0600
40 .. 600 181
150
63.5 / 60 G1"
600
30

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.334.2/11.13
13
14
331
Condition Monitoring Products

Condition monitoring is the process of logging and interpreting condition
information from machines, systems and their components, with the aim
of implementing predictive maintenance programs based on the condition
of the system.
The operating data of the machine or system is recorded continuously
using the HYDAC sensor system. The recorded data is then analysed and
interpreted. Finally this compressed condition information can be transmitted to the operator, enabling him to monitor and control the machine or
system using a variety of communication channels.
15
E 180.000.2 /11.13
Condition monitoring products from HYDAC ELECTRONIC GMBH:

Page
CMU 1000, Condition Monitoring Unit
333
CSI-B-2, Interface Module 337
HLB 1300, Oil condition sensor
339
AS 1000, AquaSensor 341
AS 3000, AquaSensor 343
AS 3000 IO-Link , AquaSensor
345
EY 1356, Contamination switch 347
332
Condition Monitoring Unit

CMU 1000
15
The CMU1000 is an electronic

evaluation unit designed for permanent
online condition monitoring of machines
and systems.
In order to achieve this, the device must
be supplied with relevant data which is
recorded by the sensors connected to it.
This recorded data (processed or
unprocessed) can be transferred by the
CMU 1000 via different ports or as an
analogue value to other devices and/or
monitoring levels.
The CMU 1000 processes the
application program stored in it
continuously and cyclically like a PLC.
The user creates this program simply
and conveniently on a PC using the CM
Editor developed for this purpose and
then uploads it to the CMU 1000.
The CM Editor is part of the HYDAC PC
software CMWIN Version V03 or higher
(supplied) and it provides the various
tools and functions in accordance with
IEC 61131 for designing, integrating and
testing the user program using "drag
and drop" operations.
For status indication and for displaying
messages and values on the device
itself, there is a back-lit LCD display and
three different coloured LEDs.
The CMU 1000 is operated and data
is input on site using a built-in keypad
within the menu structure of the device.
The CMU 1000 is designed for use in
machines in both the stationary and
mobile sectors.
It is possible to connect easily to
higher-level control, monitoring and bus
systems using the built-in interfaces or in
combination with an additional coupling
module.
Special features:
8 input channels for HSI or SMART

sensors
8 input channels for analogue sensors
4 input channels for digital signals
2 output channels for analogue signals
4 relay switching outputs with
change-over contacts
USB slave port for PC connection
USB master port for storing measured
data on a standard USB memory stick
Ethernet interface
RS 232 interface
2-line LCD display (2 x 16 characters)

to display measured data and status
and/or error messages
3 user-programmable LEDs in different
colours, for status indication
(red, yellow, green)
Simple operation using navigation
pad
Creation of customised application
program using the PC software
CMWIN supplied
E 18.357.2/11.13
Description:
333
CM Editor:
The CM Editor is part of the HYDAC PC software CMWIN, Version 03 or higher, and provides a wide variety of tools and
functions for designing, integrating and testing the application program.
An application program consists of many individual functions which can be linked together. During subsequent operation, this
user program is processed as for a PLC, cyclically.
The program is created according to the IEC 61131 (the standard for PLC programming).
E 18.357.2/11.13
15
334
Technical data:
Interfaces
Input voltage
18.0 .. 35.0 V DC
Keypad
- 4 arrow keys (up, down,

right, left)
- OK key
- ESC key
Display
(back-lit)
- Two-line LCD display

(2 x 16 characters)
- Additional indication of status
information via
3 different coloured LEDs
is possible
USB Mass Storage

Device2)
- USB 1.1 / USB 2.0 full speed

port for connecting
a mass storage device
(memory stick)
- Female connection type "A".
Ethernet,
supported protocols
- RJ 45 8/8 Ethernet interface

- HTTP Server
- TCP/IP
Serial Interface 0
(UART 0)
- Implementing an RS 232 or

an HSI master interface
- Change-over user-programmable
- Connection via plug-in terminals
- No handshake lines
HSI Master
Cascading the CMU
USB Device
- USB 1.1 / USB 2.0 full speed

port for connecting
a PC / Notebook to
configure the CMU
- Female connection type "B".
CAN Bus Interface
Can be integrated as an option
Current consumption max. 1.5 A (3.5 A when

CSI-F-10 connected)
Reverse pol. protect.: -30 V
Isolation voltage
+40 V
Connection of sensors
Up to 8 sensors with HSI functionality or
up to 8 SMART sensors1) and in addition up to 8 analogue
sensors and
up to 4 digital sensors
4 x digital / 2 x digital + 2 x frequency /
3 x digital + 1 x frequency
Analogue inputs
Channel I and J
(Accuracy)

4 .. 20 mA ( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 20 mA ( 0.1 % FS max.)
0.5 .. 4.5 V ( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 10 V ( 0.1 % FS max.)
Channel K and L
(Accuracy)

4 .. 20 mA ( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 20 mA ( 0.1 % FS max.)
0.5 .. 4.5 V ( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 50 V ( 0.1 % FS max.)
-10 .. +10 V ( 0.2 % FS max.) L only!
Channel M and N
(Accuracy)

4 .. 20 mA ( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 20 mA ( 0.1 % FS max.)
0.5 .. 4.5 V ( 0.1 % FS max.)
Channel O and P
(Accuracy)

4 .. 20 mA ( 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 20 mA ( 0.1 % FS max.)
0.5 .. 4.5 V ( 0.1 % FS max.)
-10 .. +10 V ( 0.2 % FS max.) P only!
Digital inputs
Quantity

4, of which 2 are for frequency

measurement (Channel Q and R)
Trigger threshold
approx. 2 V
Dynamics
30 kHz
Measurement channels
Quantity

32 - A measurement channel can be a

value of a connected sensor
(also a subchannel of a SMART
sensor) or a value derived
(calculated) from sensor data.
Analogue outputs
Quantity 2
Type

individually selectable,
current (4 .. 20 mA) or
voltage (0 .. 10 V)
Cycle time
Independently determined at start of program
Display of actual cycle time is possible in the CM Editor
Operating and environmental conditions
-20 .. +70 C
Storage temperature
-30 .. +80 C
Relative humidity
0 .. 70 %,
non-condensing
Dimensions and weight

Dimensions
approx. 212 x 106 x 36 mm
Weight
approx. 600 g
Technical standards
EMC
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Digital outputs
Safety
EN 61010
Quantity 4
Protection class
IP 40
Type:
Relay output, change-over contact
Switching capacity
30V DC / 1 A
Calculation unit
Analogue value
recording
12 bit A/D converter
15
Note:
SMART sensors (Condition Monitoring Sensors) are
a generation of sensors from HYDAC, which can
provide a variety of different measured values.
2)
Recorded data from the CMU can be transferred
to a memory stick via this interface.
The USB Host supports mass storage devices
exclusively.
1)
E 18.357.2/11.13
Supply
335
Note:
Block circuit diagram:

SRAM
Flash
CAN transceiver
Processor
CF-Card
15
optional
16 Bit
Real-time clock
USB master
(Memory Stick)
RS-232 / HSI-Master
(selectable)
USB slave
(PC connection)
LCD display
(2 x 16 characters)
Ethernet
(HTTP server /
TCP/IP)
8 x HSI-IN
8 x Analogue-IN
4 x Digital-IN
Model code:

applications described. For applications
and operating conditions not described,
please contact the relevant technical
department.
Keypad
(4 x arrows / OK / ESC)
3 x LED
(user-programmable)
2 x Analogue-OUT
4 x Digital-OUT
CMU1000 000 X
Modification number
000 = Standard
Operating manual and documentation
D = German
E = English
F = French
Note:
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the technical
amendment details supplied with the instrument.
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as sensor lines for the electrical connection can be found in
the Accessories brochure.
E 18.357.2/11.13
Dimensions:
336

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01,
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Condition Monitoring
Interface Module
CSI-B-2
15
The condition monitoring interface

module CSI-B-2 is another element
in the HYDAC condition monitoring
concept which connects the sensor
level with the interpretation level.
It is an all-purpose electronic
instrument for converting the HSI
signal from HYDAC SMART sensors
into a standardised PC signal.
Using the HYDAC "CMWIN" PC software, it is therefore possible to read
the data and measured values of the
connected SMART sensor directly.
The long-term memory can also be
read as well as adjustments made
and parameters set on the connected
sensor (the setting options depend on
the particular sensor).
The HSI signal can be converted
either into an RS 232 or an RS 485
signal. The CSI-B-2 can be connected
to any PC via the RS 232 interface
(and possibly an additional standard
RS 232/USB adapter1)).
The RS 485 interface and appropriate
additional coupling modules can also
be used to connect to higher-level
control and/or bus systems.
Special features:
1 input channel for HYDAC

SMART sensors
Direct connection of the sensor via
screw-type terminals
Indication of the active interface via
LED (RS 232 / RS 485)
Very compact design
Suitable for mounting on standard
DIN rails
1)
S 232/USB adapter is not supplied

R
with the device.
Technical data:
Input data
HSI interface

Output data
Signal output

Environmental Conditions
Relative humidity
mark
Other data
Supply voltage of the module
Current consumption (module + sensor)

Sensor supply

Cross-section of connection
X1 : Module supply + RS 232 / RS 485
X2 : Sensor supply + HSI
SUB-D: RS 232
Conversion mode options

Indication of active conversion mode

Dimensions and weight
Housing

Weight
Note:

HYDAC Sensor Interface

for digital linking of SMART
sensors1)
- Male X2
switchable:
RS 485 half-duplex or RS 232
- Male X1 (RS 485)
- SUB-D 9 pole female (RS 232)
-25 .. +85 C
-30 .. +85 C
0 .. 70 %, non-condensing
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
IP 40
18 .. 35 V DC (male X1)
30 mA to 300 mA max.
(depending on the supply voltage and
the connected sensor)
15 V DC 5 % / 300 mA max.
at 23 C (male X2)
Max. 1.5 mm
Male terminal block, 8 pole RM 3.5
Male terminal block, 5 pole RM 3.5
9 pole female with thumbscrews
Option HSI - RS 232 or HSI - RS 485
via jumper (bridge):
X1.3 - X1.4 open:
HSI - RS 232
X1.3 - X1.4 closed:
HSI - RS 485
Green LED:
HSI - RS 232
Yellow LED:
HSI - RS 485
approx. 55 x 106 x 34 mm
Housing to be mounted on
rails (35 mm) to
DIN EN 60715 TH 35
(formerly DIN EN 50022)
~ 140 g

1)
SMART sensors (Condition Monitoring Sensors) are a generation of
sensors from HYDAC, which can provide a variety of different
measured values.
E 18.359.2/11.13
Description:
337
Model code:
CSI B 2 000
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the technical
amendment details supplied with the instrument.
15
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as sensor lines for the electrical connection can be found
Terminal strip X1
Pin
Signal
RS 485 (-)
RS 485 (+)
3
4
3 4 open:
3 4 closed:
RxD RS 232
(connected to Pin 3 SUB-D 9 pole)
TxD RS 232
0V
+UB (18 .. 35 V DC) Module supply
HSI to RS 232
HSI to RS 485
Terminal strip X2
Pin
Dimensions:
Signal
+UB (15 V DC) Sensor supply
0V
HSI signal
0V
0V
Note:
E 18.359.2/11.13

For applications and operating
conditions not described, please
contact the relevant technical
department.
Subject to technical modifications
338

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Oil Condition Sensor

HYDACLAB
HLB 1300
15
The HYDACLab HLB 1300 is a

multifunctional sensor for online
condition monitoring of standard
and bio oils in stationary and mobile
applications.
The user is thus informed in real
time of changes in the fluids and can
take immediate action in the case of
deteriorating operating conditions.
Assertions can be made about
the condition of an oil, e.g. ageing
or mixing with other fluids, on the
basis of the measured values for
the relative change in dielectric
constant, the saturation level and the
temperature.
These measurements are available
as sequential analogue signals and
switching signals at the electrical
output of the HYDACLab (e.g. for
activating warning devices or alarms).
The measured values can be
displayed on various HYDAC display
and measurement devices.
Special features:
Online condition monitoring of oils

Applications in industrial and mobile
sectors
Analogue output signal for:
- Saturation level
- Temperature
- Rel. change in dielectric constant
Switching output
Compact design
Simple cartridge mounting
Technical data:
Input data
Rel. humidity
0 .. 100 % saturation
-25 .. +100 C
Temperature
Dielectric constant (R)
1 .. 10
Operating pressure
< 50 bar
< 600 bar
Pressure resistance
Flow velocity
< 5 m/s
Output data - Saturation level
Output signal
4 .. 20 mA
(0 .. 100 %)
Calibration accuracy
2 % FS max.
Accuracy1)
3 % FS typ.
Output data - Temperature measurement
Output signal
4 .. 20 mA
(-25 .. +100C)
Accuracy
3 % FS max.
Output data - Relative change in dielectric constant (R)
Output signal
12 mA 8 mA ( 30 % of IV)
Accuracy2)
see below
Switch output
Signal 1 (N/C)
PNP switching output 0.5 A max.

switching level UB - 4 V
Default warning level SP1
85 %
Humidity
80 C
Temperature
15 % (temperature compensated)
Dielectric constant
+20 .. +80 C
Storage temperature
-40 .. +90 C
Fluid compatibility
Mineral oils HLP (HLP-D on request)

Esters: HEES, HETG

Seal material: FPM
mark
EN 61000 - 6 - 1 / 2 / 3 / 4
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage UB
10 .. 36 V DC
5%
G DIN 3852 E
Torque value
30 Nm
M12x1, 5 pole
Housing
Stainless steel
Weight
~ 205 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection, short circuit protection provided.
FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range IV (Initial Value)

1)
The max. accuracy achievable when measuring relative humidity is heavily
dependent on the type of fluid or fluid additive. More precise information on this is
available on request.

2)
The accuracy achievable when measuring the relative change in dielectric
constant is dependent on the application, the type of oil and the individual
calibration of the sensor. Detailed information on this is available on request.
E 18.371.2/11.13
Description:
339
Model code:
HLB 1 3 0 8 1 C 000 F 1
Pin connections:
M12x1
Variables
3 = 3 variables
- Relative change in dielectric constant (DK)
- Saturation level
- Temperature
0 = G3/4 A DIN 3852
15
3
5
8 = Male M12x1, 5-pole (connector not supplied)
Pin
Type of signal, output 1

1 = Switching output / N/C
Type of signal, output 2

Modification number
000 = Standard (cannot be adjusted)
+UB
Signal 1
Signal 2
HSI* Reset (PLC)
* HSI = HYDAC Sensor Interface

(HYDAC's own communication
interface)
Signal 1: PNP switching output
Signal 2: Sequential analogue output
(4 .. 20 mA)
Seal material (parts in contact with the fluid)

F = FPM seal
1 = Stainless steel
Note:
Accessories:
in the Electrical Accessories brochure.
Dimensions:
Display and read-out

options:
HDA 5500-0-2-Zc-006
Digital Display Unit; the HDA 5500
displays the sequential analogue output
of the HYDACLAB and provides the
user with 4 programmable switching
outputs.
HDA 5500-0-2-AC-006(CM1k)
Order no.: 909925
HDA 5500-0-2-DC-006(CM1k)
Order no.: 909926
male electr. conn.

M12x1, 5 pole
HMG 510
Portable 2-channel data recorder,
specially designed for use with HSI and
SMART sensors
Order no.: 909889
hex-SW27
HMG 3010
Portable data recorder with full graphics
colour display for indicating, displaying
and editing measured values
Order no.: 920930
Information on other read-out options can
be found on our website at
www.hydac.com or please contact your
HYDAC representative.
Note:
E 18.371.2/11.13

340

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
AquaSensor
AS 1000
15
The AquaSensor AS 1000 is the

culmination of continued development
of the successful AS 2000 series for
online detection of water in oils, in
particular as an OEM sensor for fluid
conditioning monitoring. It measures
the degree of saturation and the
temperature of the fluid.
In the analogue output version, the
AS 1000 transmits the values for
the degree of saturation and the
temperature as a 4 .. 20 mA signal.
In the version with 2 switch outputs,
the AS 1000 can be configured
individually using the HYDAC service
instrument HMG 3010, the Condition
Monitoring Unit CMU 1000 and the
interface module CSI-B-2.
adjusted:
- Saturation level / temperature
- Switch points
- Switch mode of the switch outputs
- Switching direction
- Switch delay times
The AS 1000 therefore enables
hydraulic and lubrication oils to be
monitored accurately, continuously
and online.
Special features:
Reliable due to its compact

and robust design
Cost-effective sensor, also for
use in OEM applications
Not necessary to calibrate to
different types of oil
Pressure-resistant also during
pulsations
Wide fluid temperature range
Individual configuration
Early detection of
water problems thereby
preventing breakdowns
and unnecessary interruption
to operations.
Technical data:
Input data
Saturation level
0 ... 100 %
Temperature
-25 .. 100 C
-0.5 .. 50 bar
Operating pressure
Burst pressure
630 bar
G3/8 A DIN 3852
Torque value
25 Nm
Mech. connection:

Stainless steel / Vacuum-metallized
ceramic

Seal: FPM or EPDM
Output data
Pin 2: Saturation level
4 .. 20 mA (corresponds to 0 .. 100 %)
Output signal

RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]

or switch output (configurable)
2 % FS max.
Accuracy in media measurements
3 % FS typ.
Pressure dependency
0.2 % FS / bar
Pin 4: Temperature
Output signal
4 .. 20 mA (corresponds to -25 .. 100 %)

RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]

or switch output (configurable)
Accuracy
2 % FS max.
Pin 5:

Switch outputs
Type
PNP transistor outputs

(configurable as N/O or N/C)
Switching current
0 .. +90 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +125 C / -25 .. +125 C
Viscosity range
1 .. 5000 cSt
< 5 m/s
Flow velocity
Fluid compatibility
mineral oil based fluids,

synthetic and natural esters
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage
12 .. 32 V DC
5%
Weight
~ 145 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection, short circuit protection are provided.

1)

E 18.321.2/11.13
Description:
341
Pin connections:
Model code:
AS1X08X000
Medium
0 = Mineral oils
1 = Phosphate ester, e.g. Skydrol
0 = G3/8 A DIN 3852
15
Signal technology
C = Output 1 Pin 2 saturation level (4 .. 20 mA)
Output 2 Pin 4 temperature (4 .. 20 mA)
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notice:
or the technical amendment details supplied with the instruments.
Accessories:
Dimensions:
hex.-SW27
E 18.321.2/11.13
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
342
M12x1
Note:
The information in this brochure relates to the operating conditions and applications
described.
3
5
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
AS 1X08-C
+UB
Saturation level
4 .. 20 mA
0V
Temperature
4 .. 20 mA
HSI*
AS 1X08-2
+UB
SP 1
0V
SP 2
HSI*
* HSI = HYDAC Sensor Interface (HYDAC's

own communication interface)
Display, read-out and

configuration options:
HDA 5500-1-1-xC-000
Digital Display Unit with 2 programmable
switch outputs, which have been
specifically designed for use with the
AS 1000
HDA 5500-1-1-AC-000
Order no.: 908869
HDA 5500-1-1-DC-000
Order no.: 908870
HMG 510
Portable 2-channel data recorder,
specially designed for displaying
measured values with HSI and
SMART sensors
Order no.: 909889
HMG 3010
Portable data recorder with full graphics
colour display for indicating, displaying
and editing measured values as well
as for configuration of HSI and SMART
sensors
Order no.: 920930
CMU 1000
Electronic evaluation unit for online
measured value monitoring as well as
for the configuration of HSI and SMART
sensors
Order no. 920716
CSI-B-2
Interface module, enables configuration
of HSI and SMART sensors using
HYDAC PC software CMWIN
Order no. 920134
Information on other read-out options
can be found on our website at
www.hydac.com or please contact your
HYDAC representative.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
AquaSensor
AS 3000
15
The AquaSensor AS 3000 with an

integrated digital display is based
on the proven AS 1000 series for
the online detection of water in oils,
particularly as a sensor for Condition
Monitoring. The device has 2 switch
outputs and one switchable analogue
output signal (4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V).
The AS 3000 detects the water
saturation level and temperature of
the fluid and transmits the values in
the form of an analogue or switching
signal. The display shows the actual
measured values.
All settings offered by the AS 3000
are grouped in 2 clearly-arranged
menus.
adjusted:
- Saturation level / temperature
- Switch points
- Switch mode of the switch outputs
- Switching direction
- Switch delay times
The AS 3000 thus enables hydraulic
and lubricating oils to be monitored
accurately, continuously and online.
Special features:

rotated in two axes
Reliable due to its robust design
Pressure-resistant, also during
pulsations
Individual configuration
programming
Early detection of water problems
thus preventing faults and
unnecessary interruptions to
operations.
Technical data:
Input data
Saturation level
0 ... 100 %
Temperature
-25 .. 100 C
-0.5 .. 50 bar
Operating pressure
Burst pressure
630 bar
G3/8 A DIN 3852
Torque value
25 Nm
Connector:

ceramic

Seal: FPM or EPDM
Output data
2 % FS max.
3 % FS typ.
Pressure dependency
0.2 % FS / bar
Analogue output
Signal
selectable:

4 .. 20 mA
ohmic resist. max. 500

0 .. 10 V
ohmic resist. min. 1 k

Switch outputs
Type
PNP transistor outputs

(programmable as N/O / N/C)
Assignment
Selectable:

Saturation level or temperature
Switching current
max. 1.2 A per switch output
Switching cycles
> 100 million
0 .. +80 C
-25 .. +80 C
-40 .. +80 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
Viscosity range
1 .. 5000 cSt
Flow velocity
< 5 m/s
Fluid compatibility

mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage
18 .. 35 V DC
5%
Weight
~ 145 g

1)

E 18.605.0/11.13
Description:
343
Pin connections:
Model code:
AS3X085000
Medium
0 = Mineral oils
1 = Phosphate ester, e.g. Skydrol
0 = G3/8 A DIN 3852
15
M12x1
Signal technology
5 = 2 switch outputs and 1 analogue output
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
3
5
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
AS 3X08-5
+UB
Analogue
0V
SP 1
SP 2
Accessories:
adaptors, etc. can be found in the Accessories brochure.
Dimensions:
hex-SW27
Note:
E 18.605.0/11.13

344
male electr. conn. M12x1 -5 pole

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
AquaSensor
AS 3000
15
The AS 3000 with its IO Link

communication interface and
integrated digital display is used for
the online detection of water in oils,
particularly as a sensor for condition
monitoring. In addition, the AS 3000
measures the temperature of the
operating fluid.
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V).
The AquaSensor AS 3000 with
communication interface IO-Link
been specially designed to connect
machine tools, handling and
assembly automation, intralogistics or
packaging industry.
Special features:
IO Link interface
1 PNP transistor output
Additional signal output, can be
configured as PNP transistor
4-digit display
Display rotates in two planes for
optimal alignment
Technical data:
Input data
Saturation level
0 ... 100 %
Temperature
-25 .. 100 C
Operating pressure
-0.5 .. 50 bar
Burst pressure
630 bar
G3/8 A DIN 3852
25 Nm
Torque value
Mech. connection:

ceramic

Seal: FPM or EPDM
Output data
Output signals

Output 2: can be configured as PNP

transistor switching output or

analogue output
2 % FS max.
3 % FS typ.
Pressure dependence
0.2 % FS / bar
Analogue output
Signal
selectable:

4 .. 20 mA

0 .. 10 V
load resist. min. 1 k

Switch outputs
Type
Assignment
Selectable:

Saturation level or temperature
Switching current
max. 250 A per switching output
Switching cycles
> 100 million
Parameterisation Via IO-Link interface, with HYDAC
programming device HPG 3000 or
push-buttons on the AS 3000
0 .. +80 C
-25 .. +80 C
-40 .. +80 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
Viscosity range
1 .. 5000 cSt
Flow velocity
< 5 m/s
Fluid compatibility

mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
IP 67
Other data
Supply voltage
18 .. 35 V DC
Current consumption


110 mA w
ith inactive switching output
and analogue output
5%
Weight
~ 145 g

1)

E 18.605.1.0/11.13
Description:
345
Setting options:

AS 3000 as well as the menu structure
VDMA Standard.

outputs:
15
Measuring
range
Lower limit of
RP
Upper limit of
SP
0 .. 100 %
1%
100 %
Measuring
range
Minimum
difference betw.
RP and SP
Increment*
0 .. 100
1%
0.2 %
-25 .. 100 C
0.1 C

SP = switching point
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
Baud rate
38.4 kBaud *
Cycle time
2.5 ms
Process data width
16 Bit
Frame type
2.2
Specification
V1.1
*C
Model code:

AS3X0 6L000
Medium
0
= Mineral oils
1
= Phosphate ester, e.g. Skydrol
0
= G3/8 A DIN 3852
6
= Male M12x1, 4-pole
Output
L
= IO Link interface
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
adaptors, etc. can be found in the Accessories brochure.
Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole
L+
2
1
3
IO-Link
C/Q
L-
Dimensions:
Standard IO
I/Q
Pin
1
2
Signal
L+
I/Q
3
4
LC/Q
Description
Supply voltage
analogue output
Gnd
hex.-SW27
male electr. conn.

M12x1 - -5 pole
E 18.605.1.0/11.13
Note:
346

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Contamination Switch
EY-1356
15
The contamination switch series

EY-1356 works as a warning element
in hydraulic systems and gearboxes
and has been developed by HYDAC
ELECTRONIC to meet the special
requirements of our customers.
The sensor detects and attracts
metal ferromagnetic particles in
oil or in other hydraulic fluids. The
accumulation of particles generates
a switching signal (change in the
ohmic resistance). The contamination
sensor thus provides an early warning
of possible wear. Substantial damage
on bearings and gear wheels, for
instance, can therefore be avoided.
The sensor is available with different
mechanical and electrical connections
and can be integrated into almost any
application.
Special features:
Simple design
Robust design
Standard connection types
Technical data:
Maximum switching voltage
30 VDC
Maximum switching current
200 mA
Maximum oil pressure abs.
6 bar (16 bar)
Holding power of the permanent solenoid
~ 1.5 N
Ambient temperature
-25 C .. +90 C

DEUTSCH male connector

DT04 2 pole
IP67
Integrated male connector

according to EN175301-803/ ISO4400
IP65
Mating connector supplied

DEUTSCH male connector

DT04 2 pole
no

according to
EN175301-803/ ISO4400
yes
Max. torque value

M14x1.5
15 Nm
M18x1.5
25 Nm
M22x1.5
60 Nm
M26x1.5
70 Nm
M33x2
140 Nm
Installation position

We recommend an "upside-down"
mounting position, i.e. connector or
cable outlet pointing downwards.
The contamination switch is supplied with seal ring DIN 3896 NBR.
Functional principle /
diagram:
The permanent solenoid at the

measuring surface of the contamination
switch attracts the ferromagnetic particles
from the passing oil. The increased
accumulation of particles forms an
electrical bridge between the permanent
solenoid and the adjacent metal contact.
The resulting switching signal can, for
instance, activate a warning function or
switch off the system.
Electronics for
display
Contamination
switch
Ferritic dirt particles

form connecting bridge
E 18.602.1/11.13
Description:
347
Order details:
15
Pin connections:
Part number

according to
EN175301-803/ ISO4400
M14x1.5
3252533
M18x1.5
3305023
M22x1.5
3731848
M26x1.5
3731849
M33x2
3252555
M14x1.5
3731852
M18x1.5
3731853
M22x1.5
3731854
M26x1.5
3731855
M33x2
3731856
Strand DEUTSCH male

connector
DT04 2 pole
in accordance with EN 175301-803

Without connector
Pin
1
+UB
-UB
Reverse polarity permitted
Dimensions:
Cable assignment for Deutsch DT04
Deutsch male connector

Housing DT04-2P-EP04 W2P
PIN 0460-202-16141
Protective sleeve
Female
connector
Pin
1
+UB
-UB
Reverse polarity permitted
gasket GDM3-16
(NBR)
Hirschmann
Switching example:
Seal ring
DIN 3869 NBR
Seal ring
DIN 3869 NBR
Relay for display
Dim.
14
18
22
26
33
M14x1.5
M18x1.5
M22x1.5
M26x1.5
M33x2
12
12
12
12
12
4.5
19
23.9
27
31.4
39.2
Other types
of connection are
available on
request
E 18.602.1/11.13
Note:
348


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.602.1/11.13
15
349
OEM Products for Large Volume Production

Areas of application for our OEM products for large volume production
range from mobile and stationary industrial hydraulics, to pneumatics,
machine building, automotive and mobile technology through to mining, oil
depots, marine and the off-shore industry.
Our sensors are available in a variety of electrical output signals,
connector and fluid port connection options. This versatility, combined with
certification to ATEX, CSA and IECEx or
, ensures an almost limitless
range of applications for our products.
OEM Products for Large Volume Production:
16
Pressure transmitters Page

HDA 8700 (minimum order 500 pieces)
351
353
355
HDA 8700 for appl. with increased functional safety
(minimum order 500 pieces)
357
359
Electronic pressure switches

EDS 810 (minimum order 500 pieces)
361
363
365
EDS 4400 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof encl. (min. order 50 pieces) 367
EDS 4400 ATEX Intrinsically safe (minimum order 50 pieces)
369
371
373
Temperature transmitters
HTT 8000 (minimum order 500 pieces)
375
Electronic temperature switch

HTS 8000 (minimum order 500 pieces)
377
Electronic position switch

HLS 100 for appl. with increased functional safety
(minimum order 100 pieces)
379
E 180.000.2 /11.13
Special products 381

- Position switches IES 2010 / 2015 / 2020
- Position sensor IWE 40
- Position switch HLS 200 for applications with increased functional safety
350
Electronic Pressure
Transmitter
HDA 8700
(Minimum order quantity 500 units)

HDA 8700 has been specifically
developed for the OEM market, e.g.
in mobile applications. Like most of
our pressure transmitter series, the
HDA 8700 is based on a robust, longlife thin-film sensor.
All parts (sensor and pressure
connection) which are in contact with
the fluid are made of stainless steel
and are welded together. This means
that there are no sealing points in
the interior of the sensor and the
possibility of leakage is excluded.
available in various pressure ranges
from 0 .. 40 bar to 0 .. 600 bar.
For integration into modern controls,
standard analogue output signals are
available, e.g. 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V,
1 .. 6 V or 0 .. 10 V. Ratiometric
output signals are also available.
For the electrical connection, various
integrated connections are available.
A basic accuracy of max. 0.5 % FS,
combined with a small temperature
drift, ensures a broad range of
applications for the HDA 8700.
Special features:

Outstanding performance in terms
Very compact design
ECE type approval
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
(Torque value)


Output data
Output signal

Max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
Zero point
Over range
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long-term drift
mark
mark2)
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 5 .. 2000 Hz
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-27
to ISO 20653
Other data

Supply voltage

for use acc. to UL specification

Current consumption
Life expectancy

Weight
Note:

1)
2)
16
40; 60; 100; 160; 250; 400; 600 bar
80; 120; 200; 320; 500; 800; 1000 bar
200; 300; 500; 800; 1250; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
7/16-20 UNF 2A
(15 Nm)
9/16-18 UNF 2A
(20 Nm)
each with orifice 0.5 mm
Seal: FPM
e.g.: 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V, 1 .. 6 V, 0 .. 10 V,
ratiometric: 0.5 .. 4.5 V for UB = 5 V DC
(10 .. 90 % UB 5 %), etc.
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.15 % FS typ.
0.25 % FS max.
0.01 % FS / C typ.
0.02 % FS / C max.
0.01 % FS / C typ.
0.02 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
0.1 % FS max.
0.1 % FS
1.5 ms
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C/ -25 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +125 C / -25 .. +125 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
25 g
IP 65, IP 67 (depending on the electrical connection)
IP 69 K (depending on the electrical connection)
M12x1, 4 pole
AMP DIN 72585 code 1, 3 pole
Packard Metri Pack Series 150, 3 pole
Deutsch DT 04, 3 pole
AMP Superseal, 3 pole.
AMP Junior Power Timer, 3 pole
Flying leads, 1 m cable length
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650), 3 pole
8 .. 30 V DC
12 .. 30 V DC for output signal 0 .. 10 V
5 V 5 % for ratiometric output signal
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
max. 22 mA total
5%
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 55 g
Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage,

override, short-circuit protection are provided.
E 18.347.2/11.13
Description:
351
Note:
Dimensions:
Male connection
DIN 72585
3 pole
Male connection
Metri-Pack
series 150
3 pole
Flying leads
Male connection
Superseal
series 1.5
3 pole
Male connection
Junior Power Timer
3 pole
16
Male connection
Deutsch DT04
3 pole

described.
Male connection
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
3 pole
male connection M12x1, 4 pole

hex.-SW27
orifice
hex.-SW27
E 18.347.2/11.13
orifice
352
Order details:
hex.-SW27
orifice
The electronic pressure switch HDA 8700 has been specially developed for OEM
customers and is available for minimum order quantities of 500 units per type.
For exact specification, please contact the Sales Department of HYDAC ELECTRONIC.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic Pressure
Transmitter
HDA 8400

HDA 8400 has been specifically
in mobile applications. Like most of
our pressure transmitter series, the
HDA 8400 is based on a robust and
long-life, thin-film sensor.
All parts (sensor and pressure
connection) which are in contact with
the fluid are made of stainless steel
and are welded together. This means
that there are no sealing points in the
interior of the sensor. The possibility
of leakage is excluded.
available in various pressure ranges
from 0 .. 40 bar to 0 .. 600 bar. For
integration into modern controls,
available, e.g. 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V,
1 .. 6 V or 0 .. 10 V. Ratiometric
output signals are also available.
For the electrical connection, different
types of integrated connections are
available.
A basic accuracy of max. 1 % FS,
combined with a small temperature
drift, ensures a broad range of
applications for the HDA 8400.
Special features:

Very compact design
ECE type approval
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
(Torque value)


Output data
Output signal

Max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
Zero point
Over range

to DIN 16086
Hysteresis

Repeatability
Rise time
Long-term drift
mark
mark2)
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 5 .. 2000 Hz
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-27
to ISO 20653
Other data

Supply voltage


Life expectancy

Weight
Note:

1)
2)
16
40; 60; 100; 160; 250; 400; 600 bar
80; 120; 200; 320; 500; 800; 1000 bar
200; 300; 500; 800; 1250; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
7/16-20 UNF 2A
(15 Nm)
9/16-18 UNF 2A
(20 Nm)
Seal: FPM
e.g.: 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V, 1 .. 6 V, 0 .. 10 V,
(10 .. 90 % UB 5 %), etc.
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
0.4 % FS max.
0.1 % FS
1.5 ms
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +125 C / -25 .. +125 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
25 g
M12x1, 4 pole
AMP Superseal, 3 pole.
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650), 3 pole
8 .. 30 V DC
12 .. 30 V DC for output signal 0 .. 10 V
5 V 5 % for ratiometric output signal
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
> 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
~ 55 g

E 18.348.2/11.13
Description:
353
Note:
Dimensions:
Male connection
DIN 72585
3 pole
Male connection
Metri-Pack
series 150
3 pole
Male connection
Superseal
series 1.5
3 pole
Male connection
Junior Power Timer
3 pole
16
Male connection
Deutsch DT04
3 pole

described.
Flying leads
Male connection
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
3 pole
male connection M12x1, 4 pole

hex.-SW27
orifice
hex.-SW27
E 18.348.2/11.13
orifice
354
Order details:
hex.-SW27
orifice

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
HDA 8700
for Applications with
Increased Functional Safety
This version of the pressure transmitter
series HDA 8700 has been developed
specifically for use in safety circuits /
safety functions as part of the functional
safety of machinery and equipment up to
SIL 2 (IEC 61508) or PL d (ISO 13849).
During normal operation, the pressure
transmitter HDA 8700 generates a
pressure-proportional output signal. In
the background, the pressure transmitter
performs cyclical diagnostic tests to
detect internal errors.
If an instrument error is detected,
the pressure transmitter HDA 8700
supplies an output signal < 3 mA
which is recognised by the user as an
unacceptable discrepancy.
This means that the pressure transducer
HDA 8700 achieves Performance Level d
in the Safety category (based on a
Category 2 of the architecture) and SIL 2.
As a result, the pressure transducer can
be recommended for use in applications
where safety is critical.
mobile and stationary safety-oriented
systems such as load torque displays or
load torque limitation in loading cranes or
working platforms.
Special features:
Very compact design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
(Torque value)

Output data
Output signal with error recognition
Max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
Zero point
Over range
Non-linearity at max. setting to
DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long term drift
mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 0 .. 500 Hz
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
Service life
Weight
Safety-related data
Performance level
Based on
PL
Architecture
Based on
SIL
Note.:
1)
2)
16
40; 60; 100; 160; 250; 400; 600 bar
80; 120; 200; 320; 500; 800; 1000 bar
200; 300; 500; 800; 1250; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
(20 Nm)
7/16-20 UNF 2A
(15 Nm)
9/16-18 UNF 2A
(20 Nm)
Seal:
FPM
4 .. 20 mA
RLmax = (UB 8 V) / 20 mA [k]
< 3 mA
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.15 % FS typ.
0.25 % FS max
0.01 % / C typ.
0.02 % / C max.
0.01 % / C typ.
0.02 % / C max.
0.03 % FS max.
0.1 % FS max.
0.1 % FS.
10 ms
-25 .. 85 C
-40 .. 100 C / -25 .. 100 C
-40 .. 100 C
- 40 .. 125 C / -25 .. 125 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
25 g
100 g / 6 ms / half-sine
IP 67
8 .. 32 V DC
> 10 million cycles (0 .. 100 %)
~ 75 g
DIN EN ISO 13849-1:2008

d
Category 2
DIN EN 61508:2001
2

-25C with FPM seal, -40C on request
E 18.347.1.0/11.13
Description:
Functional Safety
PL d
SIL 2
355
Note:
Dimensions:
25.90.30
4.1
12
2.5
29.5
max. 48+0.3
Male connection
Junior Timer 2 pole

hex.-SW27
16
G1/4 A
orifice 0.5
18.9-0.2
23.5-0.1
100.13
2.5
5.1
29.4-0.1
O-ring 11.89 x 1.98-FPM-90Sh

hex.-SW27
9/16-18UNF2A
orifice 0.5
190.30
5.1
2.5
9.140.13
23.5-0.1
O-ring 8.92 x 1.8-FPM-90Sh

hex.-SW27
7/16-20UNF2A
orifice 0.5
14.30.13
E 18.347.1.0/11.13
23.5-0.1
356
Order details:
This version of the electronic pressure transducer HDA 8700 has been
specially developed for OEM customers and is available for minimum order quantities of
500 pieces per type.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic Pressure
Transmitter
HDA 7400

HDA 7400 combines excellent
technical specifications with a highly
compact design.
The HDA 7400 was specifically
in mobile applications. A stainless
steel sensor cell with thin-film strain
gauge is the basis for a robust, longlife pressure transmitter.
0 .. 40 bar and 0 .. 600 bar provide
versatility when adapting to particular
applications.
For integration into modern controls
(e.g. with PLC), standard analogue
output signals are available.
Special features:

Highly compact design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
Torque value

Output data
Output signal1)

Max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
Zero point / Over range
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long-term drift
Compensated temperature range1)
mark
mark3)
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz

16
40; 60; 100; 160; 250; 400; 600 bar
80; 120; 200; 320; 500; 800; 1000 bar
200; 300; 500; 800; 1250; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
Seal:
FPM
e.g.: 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V,
0.5 .. 4.5 V, 1 .. 6 V,
0 .. 10 V etc.
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.015 % FS / C typ.
0.025 % FS / C max.
0.3 % FS max.
0.4 % FS max.
0.1 % FS
2 ms
-25 .. +85 C
-40 ..+85 C / -25 ..+85 C
-40 ..+100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 ..+100 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
20 g
IP 65
IP 67 ( for M12x1, when an
Other data
e.g. M12x1 (4 pole)

Flying leads
Supply voltage


9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
Current consumption
max. 34 mA total
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
~ 60 g
Weight
Note:

1)

2)

3)


Other models on request
E 18.349.2/11.13
Description:
357
Note:
Dimensions (examples):

described.
cable screen and core ends

are twisted & tinned
hex.-SW27
16
hex.-SW27
E 18.349.2/11.13
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
358
Order details:
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic Pressure
Transmitter
HDA 9300

HDA 9000 has been specially
developed for low pressure applications
in the industrial and mobile sectors.
The transmitters are available in various
pressure ranges from
0 .. 1 bar to 0 .. 100 bar.
available, e.g. 4 .. 20 mA,
0 .. 5 V, 1 .. 6 V or 0 .. 10 V.
Ratiometric output signals are also
available.
For the electrical connection, different
types of integrated connections are
available.
A basic accuracy of 0.5 % FS typ.,
combined with a small temperature drift,
ensures a broad range of applications
for the HDA 9300, e.g. in pump and
compressor controls, refrigerating
plants and air conditioning, or for pilot
controls in the mobile sector.
Special features:

Very compact design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
Mechanical connection 1)
(Torque value)
Output data
Output signal
max. setting
(B.F.S.L.)
zero point
over range
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Rise time
Long term drift

- mark

- mark3)
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 5 .. 2000 Hz
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-27
to ISO 20653
Other data
Supply voltage
Service life
Weight
16
1; 1.6; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40; 60; 100 bar
-1 .. 1; -1 .. 4 bar
2; 5; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120; 200; 200 bar
3.2; 12 bar
3; 7.5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180; 300; 300 bar
4.8; 18 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
(20 Nm)
1/4-18 NPT, external thread (40 Nm)
(15 Nm)
7/16-20 UNF 2A
9/16-18 UNF 2A
(20 Nm)
Connector: Stainless steel
Measuring cell: Ceramics
Seal: FPM, EPDM
e.g.: 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V, 1 .. 6 V, 0 .. 10 V,
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
0.25 % FS typ.
0.5 % FS max.
0.02 % FS / C typ.
0.04 % FS / C max.
0.02 % FS / C type
0.04 % FS / C max.
0.5 % FS max.
0.25 % FS max.
0.1 % FS max.
4 ms
0.3 % FS / year typ.
- 25 .. 85 C
- 40 .. 100 C / -25 .. 100 C
-40 .. +100 C
- 40 .. 125 C / -25 .. 125 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
25 g
500 g / 1 ms / half-sinus
IP 65, IP 67 (depending on electrical connection)
IP 69K (depending on electrical connection)
M12x1, 4 pol.
Packard Metri Pack Series 150, 3 pole.
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650), 3 pole + PE
8 .. 36 V DC
12 .. 36 V DC for 0 .. 10 V,
5 V DC 5 % (ratiometric)
5%
~ 100 g

1)

2)

3)

E 18.349.1.0/11.13
Description:
359
Note:
Dimensions:

described.
Electr. conn. male

Deutsch DT 04
3 pole
16
3.5
26.6+0.1
Electr. conn. male

Metri-Pack series 150
3 pole
Electr. conn. male

EN175301-803
(DIN 43650) 3 pole + PE
35.5
Electr. conn. male

M12x1 - 4 pole
26.6+0.1
12
36 Max.
10
18.5
16
26.6+0.1
hex.-SW27
G1/4 A
18.9-0.2
2.3
17+0.2
100.13
29.5-0.05
hex.-SW27
1/4-18NPT
O-ring
11.89 x 1.98
O-ring 8.92 x 1.83
E 18.349.1.0/11.13
29.5-0.05
7/16-20UNF2A
hex.-SW27
360
190.3
2.3
9.140.13
29.5-0.05
9/16-18UNF2A
hex.-SW27
14.30.13
29.5-0.05
Order details:
The electronic temperature switch HDA 9300 has been specially developed for OEM

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 810

EDS 810 has been specially
developed for use in volume
production machines.
The highly compact instrument is
equipped with a very robust pressure
sensor with thin-film strain gauge on a
stainless steel membrane.
The transistor switching output is
available with either N/C or N/O
function.
The switching and switch-back
point of the EDS 810 is factory-set
according to customer specification
(not field-adjustable).
0.. 40 bar and 0 .. 600 bar are
available.
Special features:
Accuracy 1 % FS
Very compact design
ECE type approval
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
40; 60; 100; 160; 250; 400; 600 bar
Overload pressures
80; 120; 200; 320; 500; 800; 1000 bar
Burst pressures
200; 300; 500; 800; 1250; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
(Torque value)
7/16-20 UNF 2A
(15 Nm)

9/16-18 UNF 2A
(20 Nm)


Seal: FPM
Output data
Switch output
Either:

- 1 PNP or 1 NPN transistor switching output

- 2 PNP transistor switching outputs
(only in conjunction with electrical
connection M12x1, 4 pole)
Switching direction
N/C / N/O function

(according to customer specification)
Output load
500 mA per switching output
Switching points
Switch-back points
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1 % FS max.
0.1 % FS max.
Temperature drift

8 ms to 2000 ms (standard 32 ms);

factory-set according to customer spec.
Long-term drift
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C
1)
-40 .. +125 C / -25 .. +125 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark 2)
25 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 5 .. 2000 Hz
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-27
to ISO 20653
Other data
M12x1, 4 pole


Packard Metri Pack series 150, 3 pole


AMP Superseal, 3 pole



EN175301-803 (DIN 43650), 3 pole
Supply voltage
8 .. 32 V DC

9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption
1 PNP max. 0.52 A total/max. 20 mA
with inactive switch output

2 PNP max. 1.02 A total/max. 20 mA
with inactive switch outputs

NPN max. 20 mA total
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 55 g
Note:

1)

2)


16
E 18.350.2/11.13
Description:
361
Note:
Dimensions:
Male connection
DIN 72585
3 pole
Male connection
Metri-Pack
series 150
3 pole
Male connection
Superseal
series 1.5
3 pole
Male connection
Junior Power Timer
3 pole
16
Male connection
Deutsch DT 04
3 pole

Flying leads
Male connection
DIN EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
3 pole
male M12x1, 4 pole

hex-SW27
orifice
hex-SW27
E 18.350.2/11.13
orifice
362
Order details:
hex-SW27
orifice
The electronic pressure switch EDS 810 has been specially developed for OEM
For precise specifications, please contact our the Sales Department of HYDAC
ELECTRONIC.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 710

developed for use in large volume
production machines.
The highly compact unit has a very
robust pressure sensor with thin-film
membrane.
The EDS 710 is available with
1 transistor switching output (PNP)
which can be defined either as N/C
or N/O.
of the EDS 710 are factory-set
0 .. 16 bar and 0 .. 600 bar are
available.
Special features:
1 transistor switch output

(PNP), either as N/C or N/O
Factory-set according to
customer specification
Accuracy 1 % FS
Highly compact design
Technical data:
16
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
Torque value

Output data
Switch output

Output load
Switching points
Switch-back points
1 transistor switching output

(N/C or N/O)
400 mA
0.1 % FS max.
Temperature drift



Max. setting
16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar

32; 200; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
200; 500; 500;1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
Seal: FPM
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.


Long-term drift
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
100 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
IP 67
Other data
e.g. M12x1 (4 pole)

Flying leads
Supply voltage
10 .. 30 V DC
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 60 g
Note:

1)

2)


Other electrical connection options, e.g. cables with different types
of connector, available on request.
E 18.351.2/11.13
Description:
363
Note:

cable screen and core ends

are twisted & tinned
hex-SW27
16
hex-SW27
E 18.351.2/11.13
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
364
Order details:
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
customers and is available for minimum order quantities of 100 pieces per type.
For precise specifications, please contact the Sales Department of HYDAC
ELECTRONIC.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 410
(Minimum order quantity 50 pieces)

developed for use in volume
production machines, and is based on
the EDS 4000 pressure switch series.
The EDS 410 is available with 1 or 2
transistor switching outputs (PNP),
which can be defined as either N/C
or N/O.
The switching and reset points of the
EDS 410 are factory-set according
to customer specification (not fieldadjustable).
As with the EDS 4000 standard
model, the EDS 410 has a ceramic
gauge for measuring relative pressure
in the low pressure range, and a
thin-film strain gauge for measuring in
the high pressure range.
0 .. 1 bar and 0 .. 600 bar as well as
different electrical and mechanical
connection types are available.
Special features:
1 or 2 transistor switching outputs

(PNP), either as N/C or N/O
Factory-set according to
Accuracy 1 % FS
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges

Overload pressures

Burst pressures

Torque value

Output data
Switch output

Output load
Switching points
Switch-back points
Max. setting
Temperature drift


Long-term drift
mark
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)

16
1; 2.5; 6; 10; 16; 40; 60;
100; 250; 400; 600 bar
3; 8; 15; 20; 32; 80; 120;
200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
5; 12; 30; 48; 75; 180; 300;
500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
Sensor cell: Ceramic or stainless steel
Seal: FPM or EPDM
1 or 2 PNP transistor switching outputs
(N/C or N/O)
1.2 A per switching output
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
0.1 % FS max.
-25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +100 C / -25 .. +100 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
20 g
100 g
IP 65
IP 67 ( M12x1, when an IP 67 connector
is used)
Other data
e.g. EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)

M12x1 (4 pole)

Flying lead
Supply voltage
8 .. 32 V DC
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 145 g
Note:

1)

2)


Other connection options available on request.
E 18.352.2/11.13
Description:
365
Note:
E 18.352.2/11.13
heat-shrink tubing (sealed with silicon)

hex-SW27
male electr. conn.

4p
366
Order details:
male connection
3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
elastomer profile seal ring DIN3869
16

cable gland PG 9
DEUTSCH male connection DT04-4P

connector contact crimped on
customers and is available for minimum order quantities of 50 pieces per type.
ELECTRONIC.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 4400
ATEX, CSA, IECEx
EDS 4400 with flameproof enclosure and
triple approval according to ATEX, CSA
and IECEx ensures the instrument is
universally suitable for use in potentially
explosive environments around the
world.
Each device is certified by the three
accordingly. Therefore it is no longer
necessary to stock multiple devices with
The switching point and switch-back
point, the function of the switching output
as N/C or N/O and the switching delay
are permanently set in accordance with
the customer's requirements.
EDS 4400, those with triple approval
have a field-proven, all-welded stainless
Its main applications are in mining
and the oil and gas industry, e.g. in
Class III
Type 4
ATEX Flame Proof
I M2 Ex d I Mb
IECEx Flame Proof
Ex d I Mb
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
Special features:

Certificates:
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
Robust design
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
6; 16; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
Overload pressures
15; 32; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
Burst pressure
100; 200; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
G1/2 A DIN 3852 (40 Nm)
(Torque value)
G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;

1.4404; 1.4301

Seal:
FPM
1.4404; 1.4435 (316L)
Output data
0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting
1.0 % FS max.
Repeatability
0.1 % FS max.
Temperature drift

1 or 2 PNP transistor switch outputs
Switch output 2)
max. 1.2 A on 1 switch output version
Output load

max. 1 A each on 2 switch output version
Switch points / hysteresis / N/C or
permanently pre-set acc. to customer spec.
N/O function
Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 32 ms standard

(8 .. 2000 ms pre-set to customer spec.)
Long-term drift
T5, T130 C: -25 .. +80 C

T6, T110 C: -25 .. +60 C
T5, T130 C: -40 .. +80 C / -20 .. +80 C

T6, T110 C: -40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
-40 .. +100 C
T5, T130 C: -40 .. +80 C / -20 .. +80 C

T6, T110 C: -40 .. +60 C / -20 .. +60 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4

EN 60079-0 / 1 / 31
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
to ISO 20653
Other data
Voltage supply
12 .. 30 V DC
Current consumption
~ 25 mA (plus switching current)
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 300 g
16
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, overvoltage, override and and short circuit


1)

Other mechanical connection options available on request
2)
Other output signals available on request
3)
E 18.388.1/11.13
Description:
367
Pin connections:
Pin connections are configured according

to customer specification.
Approvals

ATEX: Flame Proof
IECEx: Flame Proof
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
CCSAUS:
Class III
Type 4
Certificate
Applications /
Protection types
ATEX:
I M2
Ex d I Mb
II 2G
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
IECEx:
Ex d I Mb
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
16
Order details:
The electronic pressure switch EDS 4400 with triple approval has been specially
developed for OEM customers and is available for minimum order quantities of
50 units per type. For exact specification, please contact the Sales Department of
HYDAC ELECTRONIC.
Dimensions:
Venting
Venting
hexSW27
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
Note:
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
E 18.388.1/11.13

368

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 4400

The pressure switch EDS 4400 in
ATEX version, has been specially
explosive atmospheres, and is based
on the EDS 4000 series.
point, the function of the switching
outputs as N/C or N/O and the
switching delay are factory-set
according to customer requirement
EDS 4400 in ATEX version has a
thin-film strain gauge for measuring
relative pressure in the high pressure
range.
I M1 Ex ia I
request.
Special features:

point factory-set according to
Accuracy 1% FS
Certificates:
Various types of electrical
connection
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
Overload pressures
120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
Burst pressures
G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value
20 Nm
Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
1.4404; 1.4301

Seal:
FPM
Output data
Switch output
1 x PNP N/C or N/O
Output load
Factory-set acc. to customer specification
Switching point
Switch-back point
Factory-set acc. to customer specification
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
Max. setting
0.1 % FS at 25 C
Repeatability
Temperature drift


(8 .. 2000 ms factory-set to customer spec.)
Long-term drift
-40 .. +100 C
-20 .. +60 C / +70 C / +85 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4

EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26

EN 61241-0 / 11

EN 50303
20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 65 (male to EN175301-803 (DIN 43650))

IP 67 (M12x1 male, when an

I M1
II 1 D

II 1G, 1/2G, 2G
Supply voltage
14 .. 28 V DC
T6: -20 .. +60 C

T5, T4: -20 .. +70 C

T100: -20 .. +70 C
T6: -20 .. +60 C

T5, T4: -20 .. +70 C

T100: -20 .. +70 C
T6: +60 C
T100: +70 C

T5, T4: +70 C
Max. input current
100 mA
93 mA
Max. input power
0.7 W
0.65 W
33 nF
33 nF
0 mH
0 mH
1)
Insulation voltage 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage
Pepperl & Fuchs:
Z 787

Telematic Ex STOCK:
MTL 7087
Other data
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
Note:


1)
500 V AC on request
16
E 18.353.2/11.13
Description:
369
Pin connections:
Pin connections are configured

according to customer specification.
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Protection
Type
Certificate
Zones /
Categories
M12x1
I M1 Ex ia I
II 1G Ex ia IIC
T4, T5, T6
II 2G Ex ia IIC
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC
T4, T5, T6
II 1D Ex iaD 20
T100 C
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
Group I
Category M1
Group II
Category 1G
Group II
Category 2G, 1/2G
Group II
Category iD
Mining
Gases
Gases
Dusts
Protection
class:
intrinsically
safe ia with
barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
For use in Zone 0
For use in Zone

1, 2
For mounting to
Zone 0
For use in Zone

20, 21, 22
For mounting to
Zone 20
T4, T5: Ta = 70 C
T6:
Ta = 60 C
T4, T5: Ta = 70 C
T6:
Ta = 60 C
T100: Ta = 70 C
Instruments for other Protection types and applications are available upon request.
16
Order details:
The switching output

draws the switching energy
from the power supply to the
pressure switch. No additional
energy is introduced into
the electrical circuit from the
switching output.
Dual Zener barriers specified
and approved in the technical
data must be used to connect
the pressure switch. These have
a reverse polarity diode to
decouple the signal.
The signal path may only be
passively loaded.
Ensure that measured
fluids in contact with the
pressure switch are
compatible with the materials
used.
The electronic pressure switch EDS 4400 in ATEX version has been specially developed
for OEM customers and is available for minimum order quantities of 50 pieces per type.
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors can be found in the Accessories
brochure.
Dimensions:
profile seal ring
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Note:
E 18.353.2/11.13

370

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
male electr. conn.

4 pole
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 4300

EDS 4300 in ATEX version has a
ceramic measurement cell with thickfilm strain gauge for measuring relative
I M1 Ex ia I
request.
Special features:
Switching output factory-set

Accuracy 1% FS
Certificates:
connection
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
Torque value

Output data
Switch output
Output load
Switching point
Switch-back point
Max. setting
Repeatability
Temperature drift


Long-term drift
mark

DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz

16
1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40 bar
3; 8, 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120 bar
5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
Sensor:
Ceramic
Mech. connection:
1.4301
Seal:
FPM / EPDM
1 x PNP N/C or N/O
factory-set to customer specification
0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
0.1 % FS at 25 C
32 ms standard;
-40 .. +100 C
-20 .. +60 C / +70 C / +85 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26
EN 61241-0 / 11
EN 50303
20 g
IP 65 (male to EN175301-803 (DIN 43650))

I M1
II 1 D

II 1G, 1/2G, 2G
Supply voltage
14 .. 28 V DC
T6: -20 .. +60 C

T5, T4: -20 .. +70 C

T100: -20 .. +70 C
T6: -20 .. +60 C

T5, T4: -20 .. +70 C

T100: -20 .. +70 C
T6: +60 C
T100: +70 C

T5, T4: +70 C
Max. input current
100 mA
93 mA
Max. input power
0.7 W
0.65 W
33 nF
33 nF
0 mH
0 mH
Pepperl & Fuchs:
Z 787

Telematic Ex STOCK:
MTL 7087
Other data
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
Note:


1)
500 V AC on request
E 18.354.2/11.13
Description:
371
Pin connections:

EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Protection
Type
Certificate
Zones /
Categories
M12x1
I M1 Ex ia I
II 1G Ex ia IIC
T4, T5, T6
II 2G Ex ia IIC
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC
T4, T5, T6
II 1D Ex iaD 20
T100 C
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
Group I
Category M1
Group II
Category 1G
Group II
Category 2G, 1/2G
Group II
Category iD
Mining
Gases
Gases
Dusts
Protection
class:
intrinsically
safe ia with
barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
For use in Zone 0
For use in Zone

1, 2
For mounting to
Zone 0
For use in Zone

20, 21, 22
For mounting to
Zone 20
T4, T5: Ta = 70 C
T6:
Ta = 60 C
T4, T5: Ta = 70 C
T6:
Ta = 60 C
T100: Ta = 70 C
16
Order details:

energy is introduced into the
electrical circuit from the
switching output.
the pressure switch. These
have a reverse polarity diode to
passively loaded.
Ensure that measured
pressure switch are
used.
Accessories:
Dimensions:
profile seal ring
male connection
3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Note:
E 18.354.2/11.13

372

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
male electr. conn.

4 pole
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 4100

a ceramic measurement cell with
thick-film strain gauge for measuring
absolute pressure in the low pressure
range.
I M1 Ex ia I
request.
Special features:
Switching output factory-set

Accuracy 1% FS
Certificates:
connection
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring ranges
Overload pressures
Burst pressures
Torque value

Output data
Switch output
Output load
Switching point
Switch-back point
Max. setting
Repeatability
Temperature drift


Long-term drift
mark

DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz

16
1; 2.5 bar
3; 8 bar
5; 12 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
20 Nm
Sensor:
Mech. connection:
Seal:
Ceramic
1.4301
FPM / EPDM
1 x PNP N/C or N/O

0.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
0.1 % FS at 25 C
32 ms standard
-40 .. +100 C
-20 .. +60 C / +70 C / +85 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26
EN 61241-0 / 11
EN 50303
20 g
IP 65 (male to EN175301-803 (DIN 43650))

I M1
II 1 D

II 1G, 1/2G, 2G
Supply voltage
14 .. 28 V DC
T6: -20 .. +60 C

T5, T4: -20 .. +70 C

T100: -25 .. +70 C
T6: -20 .. +60 C

T5, T4: -20 .. +70 C

T100: -20 .. +70 C
T6: +60 C
T100: +70 C

T5, T4: +70 C
Max. input current
100 mA
93 mA
Max. input power
0.7 W
0.65 W
33 nF
33 nF
0 mH
0 mH
Pepperl & Fuchs:
Z 787

Telematic Ex STOCK:
MTL 7087
Other data
5%
Life expectancy
> 10 million cycles

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight
~ 150 g
Note:


1)
500 V AC on request
E 18.355.2/11.13
Description:
373
Pin connections:

EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Protection
Type
Certificate
Zones /
Categories
M12x1
I M1 Ex ia I
II 1G Ex ia IIC
T4, T5, T6
II 2G Ex ia IIC
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC
T4, T5, T6
II 1D Ex iaD 20
T100 C
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
DEKRA EXAM
BVS 07 ATEX
E 041 X
Group I
Category M1
Group II
Category 1G
Group II
Category 2G, 1/2G
Group II
Category iD
Mining
Gases
Gases
Dusts
Protection
class:
intrinsically
safe ia with
barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
Protection class:
with barrier
For use in Zone 0
For use in Zone

1, 2
For mounting to
Zone 0
For use in Zone

20, 21, 22
For mounting to
Zone 20
T4, T5: Ta = 70 C
T6:
Ta = 60 C
T4, T5: Ta = 70 C
T6:
Ta = 60 C
T100: Ta = 70 C
Instruments for other protection types and applications are available on request.
16
Order details:

energy is introduced into the
electrical circuit through the
switching output.
the pressure switch. These
have a reverse polarity diode to
passively loaded.
Ensure that the measured
pressure switch are
used.
Accessories:
Dimensions:
profile
seal ring
male connection
3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Note:
E 18.355.2/11.13

374

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
male electr. conn.

4 pole
Electronic
HTT 8000

The HTT 8000 series of temperature
transmitters was specifically
in mobile applications. It is based on
a silicon semiconductor device with
corresponding evaluation electronics.
All parts in contact with the medium
are in stainless steel, and are welded
together.
available, e.g. 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V,
1 .. 6 V or 0 .. 10 V.
Ratiometric output signals are also
available.
built-in connections are available.
The pressure resistance up to
characteristics make the HTT 8000
ideal for use in harsh conditions.
Special features:

Long-term stability
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring principle
Measuring range 1)
-25 .. +125 C
Probe length
16 mm
Pressure resistance
600 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
(Torque value)
(20 Nm)
Mech. conn.:
Stainless steel

Seal:
FPM
Output data
Output signal
e.g.: 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V, 1 .. 6 V, 0 .. 10 V,


(10 .. 90 % UB 5 %), etc.
1.0 % FS typ.

2.0 % FS max.
0.02 % FS / C
t50: ~ 4 s
t90: ~ 8 s
Ambient temperature range 3)
-40 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +125 C / -25 .. +125 C
mark
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
-mark 4)
25 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-27
IP 67
Other data
M12x1, 4 pole







EN175301-803 (DIN 43650), 3 pole. + PE
Supply voltage
8 .. 30 V DC

12 .. 30 V DC for 0 .. 10 V,

5 V DC 5 % (ratiometric)

9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;

UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption
25 mA
5%
Weight
~ 145 g

override, short circuit protection are provided.

1)

2)

3)

4)

16
E 18.389.1/11.13
Description:
375
Note:
Dimensions:
16
Male connection
DIN 72585
3 pole
Male connection
3 pole
Male connection
DT04 3 pole
Male connection
Junior Power Timer
3 pole
Male connection
Superseal series 1.5
3 pole
Flying leads

Male connection
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
3 pole + PE
Male connection
M12x1 - 4 pole
E 18.389.1/11.13
hex-SW27
376
Order details:
The electronic temperature transmitter HTT 8000 has been specially developed for
OEM customers and is available for minimum order quantities of 500 units per type.
ELECTRONIC.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Temperature Switch
HTS 8000

HTS 8000 has been specifically
in mobile applications. It is based on
a silicon semiconductor device with
corresponding evaluation electronics.
All parts in contact with the medium
are in stainless steel, and are welded
together.
The transistor switching output is
available with either a N/C or a N/O
function.
The switching and switch-back
point of the HTS 8000 is factory-set
built-in connections are available.
With a pressure resistance of
characteristics, the HTS 8000 is ideal
for use in harsh conditions.
Special features:

Long-term stability
Technical data:
Input data
Measuring principle
Measuring range1)
-25 .. +125 C
Probe length
16 mm
Pressure resistance
600 bar
G1/4 A DIN 3852
(Torque value)
(20 Nm)
Mech. conn.:
Stainless steel

Seal:
FPM
Output data
Output signal
Either

- 1 PNP transistor switching output

- 2 PNP transistor switching outputs

(only in conjunction with electr. conn.

M12x1, 4 pole)
Switching direction
N/C / N/O function

(according to customer specification)
Output load
500 mA per switching output
Switching points / switch-back points
1.0 % FS typ.

2.0 % FS max.
0.02 % FS / C
3.0 % FS max.
Max. setting
1.5 % FS typ.
1 % FS max.
16

(8 .. 2000 ms pre-set to customer spec.)
Ambient temperature range3)
mark
mark4)
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-27
Other data

Supply voltage

Current consumption

Weight
-40 .. +85 C / -25 .. +85 C

-40 .. +100 C
-40 .. +125 C / -25 .. +125 C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
25 g
IP 67
M12x1, 4 pole
Flying lead, 1 m cable length
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650), 3 pole + PE
8 .. 32 V DC
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
5%
~ 145 g


1)

2)

3)

4)

E 18.390.1/11.13
Description:
377
Note:
Dimensions:
16
Male connection
DIN 72585
3 pole
Male connection
3 pole
Male connection
DT04 3 pole
Male connection
Junior Power Timer
3 pole
Male connection
Superseal series 1.5
3 pole
Flying leads

Male connection
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
3 pole + PE
Male connection
M12x1 - 4 pole
hex-SW27
E 18.390.1/11.13
6.7
378
Order details:
The electronic temperature switch HTS 8000 has been specially developed for OEM
For a precise specification, please contact the Sales Department of HYDAC
ELECTRONIC.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Electronic
Position Switch
HLS 100
Functional Safety
Functional Safety
PL d
SIL 2

The position switch series HLS 100
has been specifically developed to
detect the end position of safetyrelated devices on mobile machinery.
The position switches are designed
for continuous use in safety circuits/
safety functions as part of the
functional safety of machines up
to SIL 2 (IEC 61508) or PL d (ISO
13849).
The HLS 100 consists of two parts,
the encoder magnet and the sensor
unit.
Using two Hall sensors integrated
into the sensor unit, the sensor
detects the defined position (end
position) of the magnet and transmits
the switching condition "ON" if this
position is detected, or otherwise the
switching condition "OFF".
Switching conditions are output as
permanent PWM signals.
During stable normal operation, the
position switch cyclically performs
internal diagnostic steps, which
identify systematic and random
errors.
Errors which occur are therefore
detected immediately. The output
signal is then deactivated completely
and the sensor is restarted.
Special features:
Compact design
Robust housing suitable for mobile
applications
High operating temperature range
PWM output
IP 67 male connector
Technical data:
Input data
Switching range 1)
Switching distance magnet sensor 1)
Lateral offset magnet sensor 1)
Steel plate thickness
Output data
Type
Duty cycle of the output signal OFF
(magnet outside the switching range)
Duty cycle of the output signal ON
(magnet within the switching range)
Output current consumption
High level
Low level
Output voltage
High level
Low level
Response times after activation
Output signal response time
Internal diagnostic interval
(function)
(failsafe)
mark
Functional safety
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Shock resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (6 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage
Current consumption
Life expectancy
Weight
Safety-related data
Performance level
Based on
PL
Architecture
Based on
SIL
Note:
16
3 .. 9 mm
0 .. 11 mm
6 mm
Magnet: min. 5 mm
Sensor: 6 .. 8 mm
PWM 50 Hz 3 % (Push-Pull)
26 1 %
74 1 %
60 mA min. / 150 mA max.
30 mA min. / 110 mA max.
> +UB 1.2 V at I = 10 mA
< GND + 0.2 V at I = 10 mA
0.5 .. 1.5 s
< 100 ms
500 ms typ. (hardware)
1 s (memory modules)
-30 .. +85 C
-40 .. +100 C
-60 .. +110C
EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
SIL 2 to EN 61508
PL d to ISO 13849
25 g
50 g (half sine)
IP 67
Male ITT Canon Sure Seal,
3 pole
8 .. 32 V DC
< 10 mA (inactive output)
5%
10 years
Sensor ~ 75 g
Magnet ~ 25 g
DIN EN ISO 13849-1: 2008
d
Category 2
DIN EN 61508: 2001 1oo1 - B
2

override, short circuit protection are provided.
1)
All values apply to installation in magnetic steel plate of the required material thickness.
If installed in thicker steel plate or other materials, the entire system must be tested
thoroughly.
2)
Other connectors available on request
E 18.391.1/11.13
Description:
379
Order details:
Dimensions:
The electronic positioning switch

HLS 100 has been especially developed
for OEM customers and is available for
minimum order quantities of 100 units per
type.
For a precise specification, please
contact the Sales Department of HYDAC
ELECTRONIC.
Identification:
white point to
IO-test
16
Switching ranges:
Switching range:
n.d.* = condition not

defined
Switching distance:
Note:
E 18.391.1/11.13
Lateral offset:
380

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Special Products
Position Sensors
and Position Switches
The position sensors and switches have been developed for short distance monitoring
and can be used on the one hand for monitoring valve settings and
on the other as part of a control. Based on different measuring techniques, HYDAC
provides different variants for a diverse range of applications.
Position switch IES 2010 / 2015 / 2020
The position switch for monitoring valve settings (end or centre position)
is primarily used in stationary applications such as:
Hydraulic presses
Plastics machines
Machine tools
16
Special features:
Inductive measurement (LVDT)
Various stroke sizes
Output: 2 switching outputs with change-over function
Electrical connection: M12x1 (4 pole)
Position sensor IWE 40
The IWE 40 position sensors for short distance detection are primarily used
in stationary applications such as:
Hydraulic presses
Plastics machines
Machine tools
Special features:
Inductive measurement (LVDT)
Different measuring ranges (up to max. 7 mm)
Output: Analogue 4 .. 20 mA
Electrical connection: M12x1 (4 pole)
Position switch HLS 200

with increased functional safety
Functional Safety
PL d
The position switch HLS 200 is used for reliable detection of valve centre positions.
They are used both in mobile and in stationary applications.
Special features:
PL d certification
Measuring technique: IR light barriers
Output: 2 switching outputs with change-over function
Electrical connection: M12x1 (4 pole); Deutsch DT 04 (4 pole)
The position sensors and position

switches are OEM products which have
been especially developed for volume
production customers.
For a precise specification, please
contact the Sales Department of HYDAC
ELECTRONIC.
Note:


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.611.0/11.13
Order details:
381
Accessories
Accessories to suit every sensor!
Whether it's electrical connectors, mechanical adapters or
the instrument mounting clamps, the wide range of products from HYDAC
offers solutions for all applications.
Saving time on installation and commissioning.

Electrical Accessories Page
383
- for electrical connection type "4" (Binder, Series 714 M18)
- for electrical connection type "5" (EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) / 383

ISO 4400)
384
- for electrical connection type "6" (M12x1, 4 pole)
- for electrical connection type "7" (DIN 43561)
385
385
- for electrical connection type "8" (M12x1, 5 pole)
387
- for electrical connection type "P" (M12x1, 8 pole)
Mechanical Accessories 389

- Connection adapters for pressure sensors
389
390
- Mounting accessories for EDS 8000, HDA 8000, EDS 810
- Mounting accessories for EDS 3000, ETS 3000, AS 3000,
391
ENS 3000, HNS 3000
392
393
- Mounting accessories for EDS 601
393
- Tank mounting sleeve for ETS 3000
394
- Connection blocks for ENS 3000
394
- Connection blocks for HLB 1300
395
- Connection blocks for AS 1000, AS 3000
395
17
Accessories for distance and position sensors

- Magnets for HLT 1000, HLT 2000, HNT 1000
- Electrical accessories HLT 2000
397
397
399
E 180.000.2 /11.13
401
Accessories for Service Instruments
- Accessories for HMG 30X0 401
- Accessories for HMG 500/510 403
382
Electrical
Accessories
Female Connectors for Sensors
With electrical connection type "4":

(Male Binder series 714 M18)
ZBE 02
Female connector
Binder Series 714 M18
4 pole, straight
Cable diameter: 6.5 .. 8 mm
Part No.:
609479
ZBE 03
Female connector
Binder Series 714 M18
4 pole, right-angle
Part No.:
609480
ZBE 01
17

(Male EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) / ISO 4400)
profile seal ring
E 18.362.2/11.13
Female connector
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) / ISO 4400
3 pole + PE, right-angle
Part No.:
905701
383

(Male M12x1, 4 pole)
ZBE 06
Female connector M12x1

4 pole, right-angle
Cable diameter: 2.5 .. 6.5 mm
Part No.:
6006788
ZBE 06-02

4 pole, right-angle
with 2 m cable
6006790
Part No.:
ZBE 06-05

4 pole, right-angle
with 5 m cable
6006789
Part No.:
Colour code:
Pin 1:
brown
Pin 2:
white
Pin 3:
blue
Pin 4:
black
ZBE 06S-03
17

4-pole, straight
with 3 m cable, shielded
Part No.:
6098243
ZBE 06S-05

4-pole, straight
Part No.:
6143284
ZBE 06S-05

4 pole, right-angle
Part No.:
6044891
E 18.362.2/11.13
Colour code:
Pin 1:
brown
Pin 2:
white
blue
Pin 3:
Pin 4:
black
384

(Male DIN 43651)
ZBE 10
Female connector DIN 43651

6 pole + PE, right-angle
Cable diameter: 7 .. 9 mm
Part No.:
654527

ZBE 08

5 pole, right-angle
Cable diameter: 2.5 .. 6.5 mm
6006786
Part No.:
ZBE 08-02

5 pole, right-angle
with 2 m cable
Part No.:
6006792
17
ZBE 08-05
E 18.362.2/11.13

5 pole, right-angle
with 5 m cable
Part No.:
6006791
Colour code:
Pin 1: brown
Pin 2: white
Pin 3: blue
Pin 4: black
Pin 5: grey
385
ZBE 08S-02

5 pole, right-angle
Part No.:
6019455
ZBE 08S-05

5 pole, right-angle
Part No.:
6019456
ZBE 08S-10

5 pole, right-angle
Part No.:
6023102
Colour code:
Pin 1: brown
Pin 2: white
Pin 3: blue
Pin 4: black
Pin 5: grey
ZBE 30-02
Connection cable M12x1

plug/socket
5 pole, 2 m
6040851
Part No.:
or
ZBE 30-05
Connection cable M12x1

plug/socket
5 pole, 5 m
6040852
Part No.:
E 18.362.2/11.13
17
386
male
M12x1 5 pole
type label
female
M12x1 5 pole
With electrical connection type "P":

ZBE 0P

8 pole, right-angle
Cable diameter: 4 .. 8 mm
Part No.:
6055444
ZBE 0P-02

8 pole, right-angle
with 2 m cable
Part No.:
6052697
ZBE 0P-05

8 pole, right-angle
with 5 m cable
Part No.:
6052698
Colour code:
Pin 1: white
Pin 2: brown
Pin 3: green
Pin 4: yellow
Pin 5: grey
Pin 6: pink
Pin 7: blue
Pin 8: red
E 18.362.2/11.13
17
387
17
E 18.362.2/11.13
Note:
388

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Mechanical
Accessories
Connection accessories for pressure sensors

ZBM 01
Adapter female thread G1/4

male thread G1/2 B,
DIN EN 837-1
Part No.:
257276
hex. SW27
flat seal ring

6.2x17.5x2.0
ZBM 02
Adapter female thread G1/4

male thread G1/2 A,
DIN 3852
Part No.:
257277
hex. SW27
O-ring
20.35x1.78
-NBR
17
ZBM 13
Adapter female thread G1/4 male thread G1/4 A,

with orifice 0.5 mm
906968
Part No.:
hex. SW27
elastomer
seal ring
DIN3869
orifice
ZBM 14
hex. SW19
elastomer
seal ring
DIN3869
E 18.363.2/11.13
Adapter female thread G1/4 male thread G1/4 (rotating)

Part No.:
907818
389
Mounting accessories, device-specific

EDS 8000, HDA 8000; EDS 810
ZBM 8000
Clamp for wall-mounting
- screw-type fitting (Material of lower section:
TPE Santoprene 10187;
Material of top section:
Steel strip DIN 95381-1.4571)
Part No.:
hex. socket cap

screw. ISO4762
3546755
ZBM 8100

- weld-type fitting (Material of welding bridge:
QSTE340TM, zinc coating
EN 12329 FE/ZN8/B;
Material of lower section:
Part No.:
E 18.363.2/11.13
17
390
3546757
hex. socket cap

screw. ISO4762

EDS 3000, ETS 3000, AS 3000, ENS 3000 and HNS 3000
ZBM 3000

- screw-type fitting (Material of lower section:
Part No.:
3184630
hex. socket cap

screw. ISO4762
ZBM 3100

- weld-type fitting (Material of welding bridge:
QSTE340TM, zinc coating
EN 12329 FE/ZN8/B;
Material of lower section:
Part No.:
hex. socket cap

screw. ISO4762
3184632
17
ZBM 3200
Splash guard
(Material:
Elastollan S60 A15 SPF 000)
3201919
E 18.363.2/11.13
Part No.:
391

EDS 300, ETS 300
ZBM 300

- screw-type fitting (Material polypropylene)
906385
Part No.:
ZBM 310

- weld-type fitting (Material polypropylene,
aluminium AlSi12, steel)
Part No.:
6011511
17
E 18.363.2/11.13
hex. socket cap screw

ISO4762
392
Vibration mounts
Part No.:

EDS 1700, ETS 1700
257492
Mounting kit EDS 601

EDS 601
- for front panel mounting(St4K32 DIN 1544)

905404
Part No.:
E 18.363.2/11.13
17
393
Tank mounting sleeve , device-specific

ETS 3000 (100 mm)
Protective sleeve for
tank-mounting
hex-SW27
(Material CuZn39Pb3 - DIN 1763,

electro-nickel-plated)
909640
Part No.:
Connection accessories, device-specific

ENS 3000
ZBM 19
17
compression nut (SW36)

ISO8434-1-N-L22-St
approx.
Straight bulkhead union ISO 8434

908738
Part No.:
Note: Not suitable for
ENS with 250 mm probe length
lock nut SW41
seal ring Cu
DIN7603-A 30x36
SW36
ZBM 20
Straight male stud coupling to

ISO 8434
Part No.:
908739
compression nut (SW36)

ISO8434-1-N-L22-St
E 18.363.2/11.13
SW32
394
Mounting block, device-specific

HLB 1300
ZBM 21 (Flow)
Mounting block for HLB 1300

for flow rates > 2 l/min
Part No.:
3244260
ZBM 23 (Low Flow)
Mounting block for HLB 1300

for flow rates from 0.5 .. 10 l/min
Part No.:
3299331
17
ZBM 22
Connection accessories, device-specific

AS 1000, AS 3000
E 18.363.2/11.13
Mounting block for AquaSensor

AS 1000 and AS 3000
Part No.:
3248511
395
17
E 18.363.2/11.13
Note:
396

described.

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Accessories
Sensors for Distance
and Position
Magnets for HLT 1000, HLT 2000, HNT 1000

ZBL Mr17
Position magnet for HLT 1000 and

HLT 2100
Part No.:
6119372
ZBL Mr22

HLT 2100
Part No.:
6084453
17
ZBL Mr33
E 18.603.0/11.13

HLT 2100
Part No.:
6084207
397
ZBL MV63
Position magnet for

HLT 1000, HLT 2100 and
HLT 2500-L2
Part No.:
6084454
ZBL MS35-39
Measuring slide for

HLT 2500-L2
Part No.:
6105654
17
ZBL MU38-20
E 18.603.0/11.13
Position magnet for

HLT 1000, HLT 2100 and
HLT 2500-L2
Part No.:
6084455
398
ZBL MF38-18
Position magnet for

HLT 2500-F1
Part No.:
6084456
ZBL MF55-20
Position magnet for

HLT 2500-F1
Part No.:
6084457
ZBL Mounting set
Mounting set for HLT 2500

Part No.:
6105653
17
Electrical
connection
Signal
output
HYDAC description
Part
number
M06
Analogue
Cable connector C091, 6 pole, straight
654653
M08
Analogue
Cable connector C091, 8 pole, straight
6123255
C61
CAN /
DVN
ZBE 08 cable connector M12x1, 5 pole,

right-angle
6006786
S01
SSI
Cable connector M23, 12 pole, straight
6120462
S01
SSI
Cable connector M23, 12 pole, rightangle
6120463
E 18.603.0/11.13
Electrical accessories HLT 2000
399
17
E 18.603.0/11.13
Note:
400


Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Accessories for Service

Instruments
Aluminium case
for HMG 30X0 and accessories

6042959
Part No.:
Bag with carrying strap

for HMG 30X0
Part No.:
909795
Power supply unit
for HMG 30X0, Spare Part

Part No.:
6054296
17
ZBE 31
Car charger for HMG 30X0

Part No.:
909739
ZBE 34
Adapter for HMG 30X0 for connecting
HYDAC transmitters
(4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor)
Male M12x1 to
(electrical connection type "4")
Part No.:
3236597

HYDAC transmitters
(4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor)
Male M12x1 to
Male EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
(electrical connection type "5")
Part No.:
3236601
E 18.364.2/11.13
ZBE 35
401
ZBE 36

an AquaSensor AS 1000
Part No.:
909737
ZBE 38
Y adapter (black) for HMG 30X0 to

double the number of input sockets
Part No.:
3224436
ZBE 41
Y adapter (yellow) for HMG 30X0

for connecting a
ContaminationSensor CS 1000
Part No.:
910000
ZBE 3010
CAN adapter for HMG 3010

for connecting a CAN-Bus
Part No.:
921238
17
Connection cable
for HMG 30X0 - PC (USB),

Spare Part
Part No.:
6040585
Hydraulic adapter kit
for HMG
2 pieces each
- Adapter hose DN 2 -1620 / 1620
(400 mm and 1000 mm)
- Pressure gauge conn. 1620 / G1/4
- Adapter 1650 / 1620
- Bulkhead union 1620 / 1620
Part No.:
903083
HDS 1000 RPM probe
E 18.364.2/11.13
for HMG 30X0

including reflective foil set
Part No.:
909436
402
HDS 1000 reflective foil set

Spare Part, Quantity: 25
Part No.:
904812
UVM 30X0
Module for HMG 30X0 for connecting

different input signals
909752
Part No.:
Plastic case
for HMG 500/510 and accessories

Part No.:
6043006
Power supply (230 V AC)

for HMG 500/510
Part No.:
6043562
Connection cable
for HMG 510 - PC (USB),

Spare Part
Part No.:
6049553
17
ZBE 30-02 (5 pole)
Connection cable M12x1, 2 m

male/female
Part No.:
6040851
ZBE 30-05 (5 pole)
Connection cable M12x1, 5 m

male/female
Part No.:
6040852
Sensor simulator to simulate

2 HSI sensors, ideal for training
purposes
Part No.:
909414
Note:

described.
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E 18.364.2/11.13
SSH 1000
403
E 180.000.2/11.13
Notes:
404
E 180.000.2/11.13
Notes:
405
E 180.000.2/11.13
Notes:
406
HYDAC-Bro Bremen
Riedemannstrae 1
D-27572 Bremerhaven
Tel.: 0471 / 70 0572 - 4200
Fax: 0471 / 70 0572 - 4242
HYDAC-Bro West
Riedinger Str. 6
D-45141 Essen
Tel.: 02 01 / 3 20 89-0
Fax: 02 01 / 32 84 41
HYDAC-Bro Mitte
Dieselstr. 9
D-64293 Darmstadt
Tel.: 0 61 51 / 81 45-0
Fax: 0 61 51 / 81 45-22
HYDAC-Bro Sdwest
Rehgrabenstr. 3
D-66125 Dudweiler
Tel.: 0 68 97 / 509-01
Fax: 0 68 97 / 509-1422
HYDAC-Bro Sd
Dieselstrae 30
D-71546 Aspach
Tel.: 0 71 91 / 34 51-0
Fax: 0 71 91 / 34 51-4033
HYDAC-Bro Hamburg
Mhlenweg 131-139
D-22844 Norderstedt
Tel.: 040 / 52 60 07-0
Fax: 040 / 52 60 07-15
HYDAC-Bro Nord
Kirchhorster Str. 39
D-30659 Hannover
Tel.: 05 11 / 56 35 35-0
Fax: 05 11 / 56 35 35-56
INDIA
HYDAC (India) Pvt. Ltd.
A-58 TTC Industrial Area
MIDC, Mahape
IND-Navi Mumbai-400 701
Tel. (0091) 22-41 11 88 88/12/79
Fax: (0091) 22-27 78 11 80
E-mail: k.venkat@hydacindia.com
JAPAN
HYDAC Co. Ltd.
KSK Bldg. Main-2F
3-25-7 Hatchobori, Chuo-ku
Tokyo, 104-0032 Japan
Tel.: (0081) 3 / 3537-3620
Fax: (0081) 3 / 3537-3622
LUXEMBURG
FRIEDERICH-HYDROPART S.A.R.L.
Route dEsch, C.P. 38
L-3801 Schifflange
Tel.: (00352) 54 52 44
Fax: (00352) 54 52 48
MALAYSIA
HYDAC Technology Sdn. Bhd.
No. 16 Jalan Pengacara U1/48
Temasya Industrial Park
MAL-40150 Shah Alalm
Tel.: (0060) 3 -55670250
Fax: (0060) 3 -55670252
E-mail: common@hydac.com.my
Technical Office Ulyanovsk

ul. Efremova, 29, office 418
rUS 432042 Ulyanovsk
Tel.: (007) 8422 61 34 53
Fax: (007) 8422 61 34 52
E-Mail: uljan@hydac.com.ru
ARGENTINA
HYDAC TECHNOLOGY
ARGENTINA S.R.L.
Av. Belgrano 2729
(B1611DVG) Don Torcuato
rA-Tigre / Buenos Aires
Tel.: (0054) 11 4727-1155/0770/2323
Celular 15 32 96 9797
E-Mail: argentina@hydac.com
CHILE
HYDAC Chile
Las Araucarias # 9080 - 9110
Parque Industrial Las Araucarias
Quilicura
rCH-8720041 Santiago de Chile
Tel.: (0056) 2 /5 84 67 54
Fax: (0056) 2 /5 84 67 55
guillermo.viertel@hydac.com
INDONESIA
Hydac Technology Pte Ltd
Rep Office Indonesia
Perwate Tower - CBD Pluit
6th Floor, Suite A
Jl. Pluit Selatan Raya
rI-14440 Jakarta
Tel.: (006221) 300 27505
Fax: (006221) 300 27506
E-mail: info@hydac.co.id
Internet: www.hydac.co.id
rOK
rOM
S
SGP
SK
SL
T
Tr
TW
SINGAPORE
Hydac Technology Pte Ltd.
2A Second Chin Bee Road
Singapore 618781
Tel.: (0065) 6741 7458
Fax: (0065) 6741 0434
SLOVAKIA
HYDAC, s.r.o.
Schmidtova 14
SK-03601 Martin
Tel.: (00421)- 43-4135893, 4237394
4220875
Fax: (00421)-43-4220874
E-mail: hydac@hydac.sk
SLOVENIA
HYDAC d.o.o. Slovenia
Zagrebska c. 20
SL-2000 Maribor
Tel.: (00386) 2 /460 15 20
Fax: (00386) 2 /460 15 22
E-mail: info@hydac.si
THAILAND
Aerofluid Co. Ltd.
169/4, 169/5 Moo 1
Rangsit-Nakhonnayok Rd.
Lampakkud, Thanyaburi
Patumthanee 12130
Tel.: (0066) 2577 2999 (30 lines)
Fax: (0066) 2577 2700
Email: info@aerofluid.com
TURKEY
HYDAC Ltd. Sti.
Namk Kemal Mahallesi
Adile Nasit Bulvar
174 Sok. No.9
Tr-Esenyurt - Istanbul
Tel.: (0090) 212 / 428 25 25
Fax: (0090) 212 / 428 70 37
E-mail: info@hydac.com.tr
TAIWAN
HYDAC Technology Ltd.
No. 18 Shude 1st Lane, South District
TW-Taichung City/Taiwan 40242
Tel.: (00886) 4 / 2260 22 78
Fax: (00886) 4 / 2260 23 52
E-Mail: sales@hydac.com.tw
UKr
Technical Office Novokuznetsk

ul. Nevskogo, 1, office 300
rUS 654079 Novokuznetsk
Kemerovskaya Obl.
Tel.: (007) 3843 99 13 46
Tel./Fax: (007) 3843 99 13 45
E-Mail: novokuz@hydac.com.ru
SVERIGE
HYDAC Fluidteknik AB
Domnarvsgatan 29
S-16308 Spnga
Tel.: (0046) 8 / 4452970
Fax: (0046) 8 / 4452990
Internet: www.hydac.se
E-mail: hydac@hydac.se
UKRAINE
HYDAC Ukraine
Bro Kiev
ul. Novokonstantinovskaya, 9,
Korpus 13, 2 Etage
UA 04080 Kiev
Tel.: (0038) 044 495 33 96
(0038) 044 495 33 97
Fax: (0038) 044 495 33 98
E-mail: info@hydac.com.ua
USA
PrC
rUS
POLSKA
(Lithuania, Latvia)
HYDAC Sp. z o.o.
ul. Reymonta 17
PL-43-190 Miko ow
Tel.: (0048) 32 226 26 55, 32 326 29 00
Fax: (0048) 32 226 40 42, 32 326 29 01
E-Mail: info@hydac.com.pl
ROMANIA
HYDAC SRL
Str. Vanatori Nr. 5 B
rO-100576 Ploiesti
Tel.: (0040) 244 57 57 78
Fax: (0040) 244 57 57 79
E-Mail: hydac@hydac.ro
USA
HYDAC TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION
HYCON Division
2260 City Line Road
USA-Bethlehem, PA 18017
Tel.: (001) 610 266-0100
Fax: (001) 610 266-3540
Internet: www.hydacusa.com
E-mail: sales@hydacusa.com
VN
PORTUGAL
Gustavo Cudell Lda.
Rua Eng. Ferreira Dias, 954
P-4149-008 Porto
Tel.: (00351) 22 / 6158000
Fax: (00351) 22 / 6158011
Internet: www.cudell.pt
E-Mail: info-es@cudell.pt
Technical Office St. Petersburg

Obvodnyi chanel emb., 138,
blok 101, of 401
rUS 190020 St. Petersburg
Tel.: (007) 812 495 94 62
Fax: (007) 812 495 94 63
E-Mail: petersb@hydac.com.ru
MAGYARORSZG
HYDAC Hidraulika
s Szrstechnika Kft.
Jsz u.152/A
H-1131 Budapest
Tel.: (0036) 1 359 93 59
Fax: (0036) 1 239 73 02
E-mail: hydac@axelero.hu
ITALIA
HYDAC S.p.A.
Via Archimede, 76
I-20041 Agrate Brianza
Tel.: (0039) 039 / 642211
Fax: (0039) 039 / 6899682
Internet: www.hydac.it
E-mail: hydac@hydac.it
NEW ZEALAND
HYDAC Ltd.
Unit 14, 13 Highbrook Drive
East Tamaki
NZ-Auckland
Tel.: (0064) 9271 4120
Fax: (0064) 9271 4124
RUSSIA
HYDAC International
ul. 4-ya Magistralnaya, 5, office 31
rUS 123007 Moscow
Tel.: (007) 495 980 80 01-03
Fax: (007) 495 980 70 20
E-Mail: info@hydac.com.ru
Internet: www.hydac.com.ru
GREECE
Delta-P Technologies Ltd.
2, Grevenon Str.
Gr-11855 Athens
Tel.: (0030) 210 3410181
Fax: (0030) 210 3410183
E-Mail: delta_pi@otenet.gr
HONG KONG
Hydac Technology (Hongkong) Ltd.
Room 602, 6/F, Silvercord Tower 1,
30 Canton Road,
Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: (00852) - 23 - 69 35 68
Fax: (00852) - 23 - 69 35 67
NETHERLANDS
HYDAC B.V.
Vossenbeemd 109
NL-5705 CL Helmond
Tel.: (0031) 492 / 597470
Fax: (0031) 492 / 597480
E-mail: info@hydac.nl
KOREA
HYDAC Duwon Co.
4th floor Wonwook Bldg.
768-12 Bangbae, Seocho
rOK-Seoul 137-069
Tel.: (0082) 2/591 09 31
Fax: (0082) 2/591 09 32
E-mail: johnkim@hydackorea.co.kr
ZA
MEX
N
NL
NZ
P
PL
DK
FI
GB
Gr
H
IND
HYDAC-Bro Nordost
Pankstrae 8-10 (Gebude H)
D-13127 Berlin
Tel.: 0 30 / 475 98 40
Fax: 0 30 / 475 98 4-29
GREAT BRITAIN
HYDAC TECHNOLOGY Limited
De Havilland Way, Windrush Park
GB-Withney, Oxfordshire
OX29 0YG
Tel.: (0044) 1993 866366
Fax: (0044) 1993 866365
Internet: www.hydac.co.uk
E-Mail: info@hydac.co.uk
NORGE
HYDAC AS
Postboks 657
N-1401 SKI
Tel.: (0047) 64 85 86 00
Fax: (0047) 64 85 86 01
E-mail: firmapost@hydac.no
CHINA
HYDAC Technology (Shanghai) Ltd.
28 Zhongpin Lu
Shanghai Minhang Economic &
Technological Development Zone
P.r.C.-Shanghai 200245
Tel.: (0086) 21 / 64633510
Fax: (0086) 21 / 64300257
E-mail: hydacsh@hydac.com.cn
rA
HYDAC-Bro Sdost
Wiesestr. 189
D-07551 Gera
Tel.: 03 65 / 73 97-320
Fax: 03 65 / 73 97-600
FINLAND
(Estonia)
HYDAC OY
Kisllintie 5
FI-01730 Vantaa
Tel.: (00358) 10 773 7100
Fax: (00358) 10 773 7120
E-Mail: hydac@hydac.fi
MEXICO
HYDAC International SA de CV
Pirul, 212
54090 Los Reyes Ixtacala
Tlalnepantla (Edo. de Mexico)
MEXICO
Tel.: (0052) 555 / 565 85 11
Fax: (0052) 555 / 390 23 34
MOVICONTROL S.A.
Rua Prof. Henrique de Barros 5 B
2685-339 Prior Velho
P-1801 Lisboa Codex
Tel.: (00351) 219 429 900
Fax: (00351) 219 413 500
Internet: www.movicontrol.pt
E-Mail: geral@movicontrol.pt
rCH
DEUTSCHLAND
HYDAC-Bro Berlin
IBH Ingenieurbro und
Handelsvertretung Hammer GmbH
Kaiser-Wilhelm-Str. 17
D-12247 Berlin
Tel.: 0 30 / 7 72 80 50
Fax: 0 30 / 7 73 80 80
AGENCE DE CHATEAUNEUF
LES MARTIGUES:
Tel.: (0033) 4 42 49 61 35
CZ
ESK REPUBLIKA
HYDAC S.R.O.
Kanadska 794
CZ-39111 Plan nad Luznici
Tel.: (00420) 381/20 17 11
Fax: (00420) 381/29 12 70
E-mail: hydac@hydac.cz
FRANCE
HYDAC S..r.l.
Technople Forbach Sud
BP 30260
F-57604 Forbach Cedex
Tel.: (0033) 3 87 29 26 00
Fax: (0033) 3 87 85 90 81
E-Mail (sige):
hydac_france@hydac.com
E-Mail (agence Nord-Est):
ag_nest@hydac.com
AGENCE DE BORDEAUX:
Tel.: (0033) 5 57 54 25 20
HK
SCHWEIZ
HYDAC Engineering AG
Allmendstr. 11
CH-6312 Steinhausen/Zug
Tel.: (0041) 41 / 747 03 20
Fax: (0041) 41 / 747 03 29
E-mail: hydac-engineering-AG@hydac.com
Internet: www.hydac.ch
EGYPT
Yasser Fahmy Hydraulic Eng.
65-66-68 Saudi Building, Kobba
P.O. Box 6550 Sawah 11813
ET-Cairo
Tel.: (0020) 2 / 45 20 192, 45 30 922
45 30 923, 45 01 970
Fax: (0020) 2 /45 30 638
E-Mail: yasserf@yf-hydraulic.eg
AGENCE DE LYON:
Tel.: (0033) 4 78 87 83 02
E-mail: ag_lyon@hydac.com
CANADA
HYDAC Corporation
14 Federal Road
Welland, Ontario
L3B 3P2
Tel.: (001) 905 / 7149322
Fax: (001) 905 / 7144664
Internet: www.hydac.ca
E-mail: sales@hydac.ca
ESPAA
HYDAC TECHNOLOGY SL
Capcir 5, P.O. Box 162
E-08211 Castellar del Valles
Tel.: (0034) 93 / 747 36 09
Fax: (0034) 93 / 715 95 42
AGENCE DE PARIS:
Tel.: (0033) 1 60 13 97 26
E-mail: ag_paris@hydac.com
BRASIL
HYDAC Limitada
Rua Fukutaro Yida, 225
CEP 09852-060
Br-Sao Bernardo do Campo-SP
Tel. (0055) 11/43 93 66 00
Fax: (0055) 11/43 93 66 17
E-mail: hydac@hydac.com.br
HYDAC S.A.
Zona Industriale 3, Via Sceresa
CH-6805 Mezzovico
Tel.: (0041) 91 / 935 57 00
Fax: (0041) 91 / 935 57 01
E-mail: info.coolingsystems@hydac.ch
Internet: www.hydac.ch
BELARUS
HYDAC Belarus
Timirjazeva 65a, biura 504-505
BY 220035 Minsk Belarus
Tel.: (00375) 17 209 01 32-33
Fax: (00375) 17 209 01 35
E-Mail: info@hydac.com.by
Internet: www.hydac.com.by
DENMARK
HYDAC A/S
Havretoften 5
DK-5550 Langeskov
Tel.: (0045) 702 702 99
Fax: (0045) 63 13 25 40
E-Mail: hydac@hydac.dk
rI
BULGARIA
HYDAC EOOD
Business Center Iskar Yug
Mnchen-Str. 14
BG-1528 Sofia
Tel.: (00359) 2 970 6000,
(00359) 2 970 6060
Fax: (00359) 2 970 6075
E-mail: office@hydac.bg
Internet: www.hydac.bg
ET
BELGIQUE
HYDAC sprl
Overhaemlaan 33
B-3700 Tongeren
Tel.: (0032) 12 260 400
Fax: (0032) 12 260 409
HYDAC-Bro Nrnberg
Bauhofstrae 4
D-90571 Schwaig
Tel.: 09 11 / 24 46 43-0
Fax: 09 11 / 24 46 43-4260
AUSTRALIA
HYDAC Pty. Ltd.
111 Dohertys Road,
Altona North.
AUS-Vic. 3025
postal address:
P.O. Box 224, Altona North.
AUS-Vic. 3025
Tel.: (0061) 3 / 92 72 89 00
Fax: (0061) 3 / 98 360 80 70
E-mail: info@hydac.com.au
HYDAC-Bro Mnchen
Danziger Str. 21
D-82194 Grbenzell
Tel.: 0 81 42 / 6 52 77-0
Fax: 0 81 42 / 6 52 77-22
MAL
A
AUS
B
BG
BLr
Br
CDN
CH
STERREICH
(Slovenia, Croatia, Bosnia- Herzegovina,
Serbia and Montenegro, Macedonia)
HYDAC Hydraulik Ges. m.b.H.
Industriestr. 3
A-4066 Pasching
Tel.: (0043) 72 29 / 6 18 11-0
Fax: (0043) 72 29 / 6 18 11-35
E-mail: info@hydac.at
VIETNAM
HYDAC International
E-Town Building, Mezzanine Floor
Executive office, Room 7,
364, Cong Hoa Street,
Tan Binh District
VN-Ho Chi Minh City
Tel.: (00848) 812 0545 Etx: 215 & 214
Fax: (00848) 812 0546
SOUTH-AFRICA
(Namibia, Zimbabwe)
HYDAC Technology Pty Ltd.
165 Van der Bijl Street
Edenvale 1614
ZA-Johannesburg
Tel.: (0027) 11 723 90 80
Fax: (0027) 11 453 72 37
hydacza@hydac.com
Hytec S.A.
P.O. Box 538
113 Koornhof Str. Meadowdale
ZA-Edenvale 1610
Tel.: (0027) 11 / 573 5400
Fax: (0027) 11 / 573 5401
E-mail: olivern@hytec.co.za
08
Accumulator Technology 30.000

Filter Technology 70.000
Global Presence.
Local Expertise.
www.hydac.com
Electronic Product Catalogue
HYDAC Headquarters
HYDAC Companies
HYDAC Distributors and Service Partners
Accessories 61.000
Hauptstrae 27
66128 Saarbrcken
Deutschland
Tel.:
+49 6897 509-01
Fax:
+49 6897 509-1726
E 180.000.2/11.13
Cooling Systems 5.700
Electronics 180.000
HYDAC ELECTRONIC
GMBH
E 180.000.2/11.13
Compact Hydraulics 53.000
Filter Systems 79.000
Process Technology 77.000
Electronic
Product Catalogue

HE-Catalog 2014 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HE-Catalog 2014 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HE-Catalog 2014 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Accumulator Technology 30.

Electronic Product Catalogue

Cooling Systems 5.700

Compact Hydraulics 53.000

Filter Systems 79.000

Process Technology 77.000

Production and automatic function testing.

Development and manufacturing plant in Saarbrcken-Gersweiler.

HYDAC Servicenter, a complete

The information in this brochure

2. Electronic pressure transmitters

3. Electronic pressure switches

4. Pressure sensors with flush membrane

5. Electronic temperature transmitters

HYDAC electronic GmbH

6. Electronic temperature switches

9. Flow transmitters / flow switches

10. Speed sensors

13. Display and monitoring units

14. Service instruments

16. OEM products for large volume production

for electrical connection type "4" (Binder, Series 714M18)

Industries and applications

There is almost no hydraulic or

- Load limit control

Aviation and Aerospace Industry

- Pump station / Media supply

- Rocket test rigs

Iron - Steel - Metal

Power Plant Technology

- Hydraulic weight counter-balance

Pulp and Paper Industry

Oil and Gas Industry

Electronic Pressure Transmitters

Pressure transmitters for general applications:

OEM product for large volume

High pressure (from 40 bar)

Low pressure (up to 40 bar)

Accuracy (max. error)

Further pressure transmitters for special applications can be found in the

ECE type authorisation

Approval for potentially

Approvals for Shipping

The pressure transmitter series

Accuracy 0.125 % FS typ.

HDA 4 8 4 X X XXX 000

EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)

male electr. conn.

male electr. conn.

The information in this brochure relates to

The pressure transmitter series

Accuracy 0.25 % FS typ.

HDA 4 7 X X X XXX 000

EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)

male electr. conn.

male electr. conn.

male electr. conn.

The information in this brochure relates to

This pressure transmitter has been